Relationship Between Neoliberalism And Imperialism Essay Argumentative Essay Help

Table of Contents Introduction

Understanding imperialism and neoliberalism

Relationship between neoliberalism and imperialism


Introduction Neoliberalism and imperialism are two concepts that expound on the political and economic discourse in the world. The two are part of the many theories that theorize the functioning of the society. Therefore, the two concepts are highly related in the manner in which institutions in the contemporary globalized economy function.

Neoliberalism, which was advanced from liberalism, refers to the economic philosophy that was developed in the Western world by the liberal scholars. This concept was developed in the 1930s, when the world was facing tough economic times due to the impacts of the First World War.

Arguing against National Socialism and capitalism as the leading causes of the poor economic situation in the world, neoliberalism opposed the development of a market economy by putting the state at the centre of control. On the other hand, imperialism is a policy that backs the expansion of the authority of a country by pegging on economic and political tools.

This paper explores the similarity between neoliberalism and imperialism. The article goes further to show the linkage of the manner in which the two concepts expound on the developments in the economic, political, and socio-cultural realms in the contemporary globalized world.

In this paper, it is argued that most of the propositions that are made by the proponents of neoliberalism enhance the development of imperialist tendencies in the global economy.

Understanding imperialism and neoliberalism As observed in the introduction, a deeper comprehension of the development of the philosophy of neoliberalism is rooted in the developments of the 1930s. During this period, states had absolutely lost the power to control the economy due to the nature of political and economic philosophies that were being embraced by states.

The Great Economic Depression that occurred in the 1930s is one of the indicators of the inability of states to restrain the economy. It is as a result of these developments that the states sought for means of ensuring they re-established their potential to control the economies.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As the western world, led by the United States, later attained the control of the world long after the Second World War, the idea of putting the state at the centre of the economic functionality in the society gained prominence. Keynesianism was highly embraced at both the national and international levels.

It is as a result of the continued embraced of Keynesianism that conferences resulted in the development of international economic institutions to help in maintaining economic stability through the imposition of controls in the economy were held.

The stability of national economies was guaranteed under the watchful eye of the international economic institutions like the World Bank and the International Monetary Fund. The guarantee of security came from the nature of financial controls, like the devaluation of currencies.

However, what ought to be noted at this point is that the nature of economic policies that were developed as a result of the embrace of neoliberalism made states to be the determinants of the economic trends in the world. It is essential to bring in imperialism at this point. Imperialism is essentially a policy that supports the increase in authority and dominance by states in the world.

Borrowing from the traditional times where the states increased their authority and control through conquest, the modern type of imperialism is portrayed through the use of soft political and economic policies. Most of these policies feature in neoliberalism.

Neoliberalism gave the state the powers to determine the economic trends. A substantial number of political scientists argue that the main form of imperialism in the contemporary globalized world is depicted by the economic power and prowess of states.

Relationship between neoliberalism and imperialism As noted in the argument above, there is a strong relationship between imperialism and neoliberalism. The development of neoliberalism is seen as one of the critical steps in the enhancement of imperialism in the contemporary global society because imperialism was developed much earlier than neoliberalism.

We will write a custom Essay on Relationship between Neoliberalism and Imperialism specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Arguing from the economic perspective, it can be noted that neoliberalism was critical in giving states powers to control the economy. Therefore, countries that had stronger economies during the 1970s when neoliberalism was fully enforced were at a more significant advantage of gaining a mileage in the control of the world economy.

The embrace of the Keynesian principles enables the dominant states to develop stronger trading organizations and the subsequent expansion of these organizations in the world through the establishment of periphery organizations known as subsidiaries. When pictured now, dominant firms in the world, most of which originated from the Western world due to the neoliberal thought, have dominated the global economic arena.

It is essential to explore the nature of dominance in order to understand how these forms of dominance depict imperialism. A substantial number of political commentators relate the advancement of neoliberalism to a kind of political project that was developed to embrace a certain form of capitalism across the globe. This capitalism is embraced in different ways, mostly in the nature of the functioning of the global political and economic institutions.

Taking it from the earlier point about the advancement of global trade through the sprouting of multinational corporations, it has been noted that multinational corporations reflect a higher level of capitalism and imperialism in the contemporary globalized world.

While it is rational for one to appraise the multinational corporations for embracing the competitiveness of markets across the world, the level of dominance that is depicted by the operation of the multinational companies is what results in the argument that these institutions are the centres of imperialism in the global political economy.

It is essential to observe that most of the multinational companies came from the western world, which I synonymous with the promotion of capitalism. Most of the multinational companies have been too dominant in the foreign states in which they operate due to their contributions to national economies.

In most cases, the multinational corporations influence the political landscape in the foreign countries in that the political decisions have to factor in the considerations of the multinational companies because of the position that they occupy in the national economies of the foreign nations where they operate. This means that the international economies have been deeply influenced and controlled by the multinational companies.

The level of dominance exhibited by the multinational companies enables them to engage in malpractices under the watch and protection of the foreign governments. In other words, it is apparent that the mother countries can make use of the multinational companies to advance their foreign policy goals and objectives across the world.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Relationship between Neoliberalism and Imperialism by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Therefore, the Western world has, for a long time, made use of the multinational corporations to exercise their power, authority, and influence over the developing countries in which their multinational operate.

Also, the sprouting of the multinational corporations in different countries across the world has been responsible for the adoption of capitalistic tendencies in various economies across the world. It is critical to note that the Western world highly values capitalism; thus, neoliberalism has greatly aided these countries to spread the ideology of capitalism.

The adoption of capitalism across the world depicts the achievement of the western world and a form of imperialism. However, this is slowly changing as other regions in the world, like Asia, come into the global economic arena.

More often than not, dominant countries in the world like the United States take advantage of the neoliberal principles to forcefully establish and sustain their philosophies. For instance, the United States makes use of the international institutions to enhance the state of hegemony, which it enjoys.

By virtue of international cooperation and the promotion of global peace as embraced by globalization, the United States relies on its supremacy as the leading financier of these institutions to influence the political course in other countries; not as a way of supporting the nations, but as a way of exerting its influence and control over states and other players in the global arena.

Under the pursuance of corporate security, most political science researchers argue that neoliberalism has been integrated with imperialism to promote what is referred to as liberal imperialism.

Neoliberalism has resulted in the increased democratization of the world. It is critical to observe that democracy is an ideology of the Western world. With the embrace of neoliberal principles is the growth of the idea of globalization and cooperation among states through the advancement of technology and the growth of the global mass media.

Most political scientists argue that globalization and its resultant developments are a new form of neoliberalism. The growth of technology and interconnectedness makes it easy for people to access the developments that take place in different regions across the world.

The idea of the embrace of humanity has gained more comprehensive coverage through the global mass media in the sense that the autocratic form of governance is often subjected to criticism and opposition. This promotes the development and institutionalization of the principles of democracy in different states and institutions across the globe.

The Western world manages to expound the subject of human rights through globalization and the resultant growth in media coverage across the globe. This enables the western world to promote its philosophy of democracy. The growth and wider adoption of this philosophy also depicts the dominance and control of the world by the West and the promotion of imperialism.

Countries that exercise democracy are greatly applauded in the world today. The Western world only fosters positive relations with the countries that embrace capitalism and democracy, while mostly ignoring and enhancing negative publicity for the countries that fail to incorporate these philosophies in governance.

The nature and trends of cooperation that is witnessed as a result of globalization depict the search for political and economic mileage by states in the global political economy. It is common to see countries in the world today, engaging in bilateral and multilateral agreements.

Beginning with multilateral cooperation, a lot of commentators observe that forms of neo-imperialism highly feature in multilateral cooperation between states. An example is the embrace of a free trading environment in the world under the spirit of total liberalization of the global trading environment to promote global trade. The idea of free trade promotes an imbalance in the economic arena.

The nations that have a comparative advantage in the trading arena take advantage of this state to advance their economic status over the countries that have a comparative disadvantage.

Thus, the subject of free markets continues to dominate the series of trade negotiations that are mediated by the World Trade Organization, where the developing nations keep voicing their concerns about their inability to gain from the free global markets due to their disadvantage.

The picture that is painted here is that neoliberalism acts as a basis on which several policies that promote the interests of a few states are developed, thereby helping the few states to exercise control over other states in the economic and political realms. This depicts the exercise of imperialism in the global trade arena.

Conclusion This paper has argued that that the sets of principles that are embedded in the neoliberal school of thought result in the continued exercise of imperialism, with the difference only lying in the different forms of imperialism that are exercised in the political, economic, socio-cultural, and technological realms.

Imperialist tendencies are eminent in the modern tendencies of trade and development where principles of dominance and authority over other states are exercised indirectly. From the discussion in this paper, it can be concluded that the concepts of neoliberalism, like globalization, support certain aspects of imperialism and neo-imperialism to a large extent.


E-Recruitment: Analysis of Current Trends Case Study best college essay help: best college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

How HR professionals can make online recruitment effective

Strategies to alleviate the negative effects of e-recruitment

Psychological contract and e-recruitment

How to recruit highly qualified candidates

Security protocols



Introduction In an organization, recruitment is one of the core activities or responsibilities of the Human Resource Department. It involves finding, interviewing, selecting, and employing qualified applicants. E-Recruitment is one of the methods used by organizations to find suitable candidates for job positions. It involves recruiting employees with the help of electronic sources, mainly through the internet.

Organizations advertise job positions on online job boards and employment agencies. Online recruitment saves time, reduces cost, and gives organizations an opportunity to select employees from a large pool of talent (Geutal


The significance of Adam Smith’s “invisible hand” concept on modern economics Research Paper essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

A critical analysis of Smith’s “invisible hand”

The significance of the invisible hand theory

Karl Marx’s theory

John Keynes Model

The Austrian school of economics

The Chicago school of economics


Works Cited

Introduction Adam Smith, the Scottish economist, studied at the Glasgow University and the Balliol College of Oxford in England. He taught and published a number of works like “The theory of moral sentiments” in 1759. His publications gave him the motivation to conduct a study on the causes and nature of the wealth of nations in 1776. This inquiry became a significant milestone in the history of economics.

Since then, Adam Smith became a renowned global capitalist. Economic scholars remember him for his free-market ideals. Certain economic authorities regard Smith as the father of economics. He is one of the most distinguished scholars of economics in the world. Smith is also a primary advocate of the laissez-faire approach to economic policies.

Adam Smith’s research on the causes and nature of the wealth of states is similar to the philosophy of the “wealth of nations”. The theory recounts the industrial revolution in Europe. It illustrates how industrial development causes the restructuring of the economy and differences in the wealth of the nations. However, critics of the philosophy of the wealth of nations advanced that Adam Smith did not produce original ideas.

Smith is the first scholar to compile and publish thoughts about the wealth of nations. Therefore, he is responsible for popularizing the ideas that explain the classical school of economics. The concepts laid a foundation for other economists to build on Smith’s work and consolidate the classical theory of economics. They provided scholars with the framework for analyzing the Great Depression.

In his ideologies, Adam Smith created the concept of an “invisible hand” that controlled the forces of demand and supply in the market. The laissez-faire concept of reducing the interference of the state and impact of taxation in a free market affirmed the fundamental premises of Adam Smith’s ideas.

The concept of the “invisible hand” in economics postulates that each person unconsciously helps in creating the best result in a market through personal decisions. Personal choices contribute to balance in the market.

An example of the applicability of the “invisible hand” may involve the interactions among butchers, brewers, and bakers. The interactions of these experts can assist in the production of food and drinks for human consumption. The butcher engages in selling meat and its products to earn an income and fulfill peoples’ need for food.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The brewers and bakers also satisfy the needs of their clients by selling various products within their areas of occupations and subsequently procure their living. According to Adam Smith, this cooperation of the professionals creates a linked system of wealth creation for the participants.

The butcher, brewer, and baker create wealth for the nation through this system of production. Smith explains that individuals seize opportunities that have likelihoods of bringing high business prospects.

A critical analysis of Smith’s “invisible hand” Adam Smith is a religious scholar and his invention of the “invisible hand” describes his perception of God’s management of the universe. Smith viewed the “invisible hand” as a system through which a supernatural being managed the universe by creating happiness to human beings. Smith explains in his concepts that a formal structure in the society promotes proper functionality of the theory.

For example, people need to respect moral values and property rights. Smith explains that the role of government is to defend the wealthy from the poor. His concepts illustrate an overview of how Smith understands the universe. He perceives the world as an entity that operates through several mechanisms.

He acknowledges the presence of a benevolent deity who controls the world to ensure maximum satisfaction for human beings. Smith postulates that the existence of God makes human beings behave differently. He notes that the world is a perfect entity with a balanced happiness equation for everybody. Smith observes that even the wealthy are not happier than the poor.

He suggests that human beings believe that wealth makes them happier than its absence. Smith elaborates that human beings’ mode of thought compels them to struggle and work hard to achieve a wealth status. He feels that wealth improves people’s satisfaction through the principles of trade and division of labor. Adam Smith explains that moral values are vital to the structure of wealth creation.

For instance, in order for trade to operate, appropriate contracts, access to information, availability of products and services and application of the rule of law must be available. These components provide a forum for wealth creation.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The significance of Adam Smith’s “invisible hand” concept on modern economics specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Adam Smith’s theory of “the invisible hand” has a different meaning in the contemporary society. The concept may refer to an invisible hand system where the determination of results comes from decentralized elements. In addition, the decentralized components may lack a general agreement among themselves. The agreement may not be intentional. It occurs in a subconscious manner.

The action of the components in the “invisible hand” theory lacks a central coordination. The components may not share the actual outcome as a byproduct of the objectives of the theory. In addition, the process of the invisible hand regulation may also function even without the components’ knowledge. This aspect denotes the essence of the term “invisible hand.”

The theory of the “invisible hand” works within the free market set-up. Adam Smith explains that buyers make choices on the basis of price. They most likely buy products with the lowest prices. The theory also postulates that entrepreneurs make choices on the basis of the amount of profits expected. Entrepreneurs lay down strategies that may ensure that they accrue the highest levels of financial gain.

Adam Smith explores the idea that consumers control entrepreneurs’ investments by buying goods and services in the market. This fact sets the framework for establishing a market. The market produces the goods that customers need, and this aspect improves the economic standards of the nation.

The market-based economy controls the people’s manner of thinking. It makes people think and speculate about what others may desire or want. Adam Smith explains that this may be a large proportion of the positive aspects of the “invisible hand” theory. Smith explains the existence of two strategies of obtaining cooperation and help from other people in the mechanism of the theory.

The first strategy examines the attitudes and kindness of people. This aspect makes people act in a fawning and servile manner. Smith finds this strategy repulsive and limited in its chances of success. The second strategy evaluates the motives of others. This strategy appreciates that people may be dependent on one another. People do not receive assistance from God alone but diverse individuals too.

The second strategy indicates that one can offer a bargain to another person on account of goodwill. For instance, a person can procure dinner as a result of the good will of the butcher, brewer or the baker. Adam Smith observes that an individual possesses value when he or she is proposing an exchange.

In addition, when one carries out an exchange, the other party can recognize that the item of exchange is of use and offer help. This analogy explains why the level of self-esteem has a connection with someone’s job. An organization that pays its workers well does so in its recognition of their contribution and worth of their resources.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The significance of Adam Smith’s “invisible hand” concept on modern economics by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Adam Smith’s “invisible hand” theory is a simple and persuasive model of explaining unseen forces in a free market situation. The model is a demonstration of reality in the operation of a free market. Adam Smith presents a practical model that conforms to the reality of events.

A lot of skepticism “develops” regarding the theory of “invisible hand’s” connection to the improvement of human economic status. Adam Smith postulates that the theory is fundamental in providing a balance to the economic well-being of human beings. However, the theory has wide implications in the determination of economic status of any nation.

Certain economists misinterpret the notion of a “free market” in the contemporary society. Certain economic perspectives of the “free market” theory reinforce corruption and immoral economic practices in the society. However, the ancient definition of a free market entails one that upholds freedom of entry. This fact means that no barriers should prevent investors from market competition.

The significant characteristic of a free market underscores the existence of a large number of minor suppliers without lead market players that influence prices. Certain theorists negate the real meaning of the principle. Distorted perceptions dictate that a free market refers to a scenario in which the government cannot control market policies. However, this meaning assumes that the “invisible hand” theory is infallible.

Certain market players try to distort the freedom of the market in order to continue exercising monopoly of market prices. They try to eliminate competition from the market. New competitors fail to gain entry into the market. Businesses may not function efficiently without government regulation.

For instance, many businesses cannot operate properly without the structure, laws and regulations from the government. Therefore, this understanding creates a conflict concerning the definition of a free market.

The fundamental principle of classical economics refers to the freedom the government accords players in the operation of markets. Certain economic theorists refer it as the laissez-faire approach. It allows the “invisible hand” to control how everyone conducts his economic functions and also creates a proper atmosphere for doing business for many people.

The significance of the invisible hand theory The contemporary society regards the “invisible hand” theory as a natural phenomenon that regulates the free market through demand and supply competition. The theory is essential in enhancing efficiency in capitalist economies. Competition for scarce resources creates a balance in the market and innovation in productivity to create wealth.

The “invisible hand” theory is the foundation of the classical school of economics. The theory serves as the framework for research in the field of economics. It reveals that the creation of wealth for use and production improves the status of the nation. The “invisible hand” theory examines the mechanism of action of a free market.

It illustrates that individuals may be free to process, use and trade in goods and services in a free economy. This aspect forms the basis of policy formulation in modern commerce. The concept explains that the elements of a free market are essential in promoting economic growth.

The “invisible hand” theory promotes democracy in the market. It accords people the opportunity to run their businesses liberally in the form of trade of goods and services. The invisible hand theory predicts that individuals possess the power to decide what to buy and sell in an efficient way.

The theory outlines the importance of adequate information as a principle of free market operation. It explains that inadequate information may lead to misleading prices, low quality and efficiency of supplies and inadequate competition.

The concept of the invisible hand theory explains the mode of action between the demand and supply. The interdependence between the forces of demand and supply dictates the prices of commodities in a free market.

Adam Smith’s theory of “the invisible hand” ensures that economists make sound decisions especially on policy matters. Economic policies ensure that markets do not fail to function efficiently. Market failure can occur due to a mismatch of information proportions between the producers and consumers. It can also happen as a result of market monopoly. The “invisible hand” is the most efficient method of allocation of resources.

The theory is relevant in the contemporary society because it explains the forces of free markets. The theory reveals that individuals’ pursuance of their interests also enhances the interests of the society.

A comparison of the “invisible hand” theory with other theories Adam Smith’s work laid the framework for several economists to think, expand and elaborate on diverse economic theories. The theory prompted Karl Marx to study capitalism in a different way. Karl Marx is a German scholar on political science and economics. He studied capitalism from a pessimistic and revolutionary observation point.

Karl Marx’s theory Adam Smith made his observations on the basis of harmony and growth. In contrast, Karl Max advanced his ideas in regard to the instability, decline and struggle of humanity. Max explained in his studies that the value of production comes from labor. He notes that a capitalist is a person who possesses the funds, wealth and organizational knowledge to sustain a processing industry.

Karl Marx suggests that the resources and profits of a capitalist come from exploiting labor. Exploitation of labor comes in the form of underpaying employees for the value of products they produce. Marx runs the theme of pessimism in his narration and explanation of capitalism in the community. He does not conform to the notion of a profit-oriented organization.

The notion of exploiting labor affirms Karl Marx’s argument of class struggle at the center of capitalism. In his studies, Adam Smith postulates that the free market competition and capitalism are good for the economic status of the society. In contrast, Karl Marx affirms that the struggle to create wealth and exploitation of labor causes class struggle in the society and tension between workers and capitalists.

Marx explains that this tension can intensify over time as business ventures expand. Karl Marx proposes that this concept may change the society towards a two tier society of rich people as capitalists and a group of lowly paid workers without benefits.

Karl Marx predicts the failure of capitalism and transformation of the community towards communism. He elaborates that in communism, “people” or “lowly remunerated workers” become the owners of the factors of production. Karl Marx’s ideas of communism had adverse effects on various countries. His economic ideas were not successful in Eastern Europe in the 20th Century.

A number of instances may affect Karl Marx’s ideas. The first instance explains that centrally planned economies are less efficient than capitalist economies in production and delivery of services and goods. These economies are not efficient in creating the highest amount of goods for the largest number of people. The second instance shows that employees’ incomes can increase over time (Yunker, 11).

This aspect undermines the theory’s explanation that the exploitation of labor may be based on the interest of financial gain. Despite widespread criticism and skepticism of Karl Marx’s theories, they retain relevance and credit in economics. They expose the weaknesses of a capitalist economic model.

For example, large business organizations enjoy comparative advantages over small companies. Big companies can absorb or reduce the activities of small companies.

John Keynes Model Adam Smith’s work also led to an investigation on capitalism by a British economist, John Keynes. Keynes conducted a research on capitalism and developed different views from those of Adam Smith and Karl Marx.

In his publication, General Theory of Employment, Interest, and Money, John Keynes postulates that capitalism increases people’s orientation to saving as their income levels increase and this changes the spending of the economy as a whole.

Keynes interrogates the functions of state policies in free market economies. Keynes based his work on the period of the Great Depression. Millions of people lost their employment and savings during the mentioned period. Governments did not lay down effective strategies to curb the effects of the depression. People started to worry about Adam Smith’s “invisible hand” theory and its role in the depression.

John Keynes explained that there was one strategy that would overcome the depression. He explained the need for the government to start spending in order to put capital into individuals’ custody. This fact could trigger the demand for services and goods and reignite the economy again.

John Keynes advised President Franklin D. Roosevelt to initiate a big public works industry to provide work to the idle labor force. However, the emergence of World War II problems brought new economic challenges and interfered with government spending.

World War II accelerated the level of production to a high amount through the manufacture of guns, fighter jets, trucks and various types of ammunition. Keynes’ theory led to a transformation of millions of men in the labor force into the military.

John Keynesian’s economics model favors the use of government power in regulating the market. It encourages application of state policy to control spending and taxation (Wenz, 44).

The relevance, authenticity and validity of Keynesian’s idea of a “slow moving economy” may be controversial even in the modern society. In contrast to Adam Smith’s “invisible hand”, the Keynesian theory favors government interference in the market. The theory forms part of Keynesian economics.

The Austrian school of economics The Austrian school of economics originates from Carl Menger, an Austrian economist and scholar. He wrote the book, “Principles of Economics” in the year 1871. The economic principles espoused in the book became the pillars of marginal transformation. Carl Menger evaluates in his publication that the economic principles of services and goods may be unpredictable in nature.

The model explains that what is valuable for one individual may not apply to another. Menger examines that an improvement in the production of goods may lead to the regression of the individual’s subjective nature. This fact advances the concept of diminishing marginal utility within the Austrian school of economics.

The concept of the Austrian school of economics interrogates the perspective of a verbal framework that procures protection from the challenges of central economics. The theory points to considerable deviations with other schools of thought. It provides unique illustrations of complex economic issues. The Austrian school of thought is fundamental in explaining complex economic concepts.

The school uses logic of prior thoughts to find economic laws of universal application. In similarity to other economic schools of thought, the model makes use of data and mathematical models to advance its objectives.

The theory proposes the idea that subjective factors may determine prices. The prices may include individuals’ preferences to products. This fact contradicts the classical school of economics that advances that the cost of processing may be accountable for the designing of prices.

The neo-classical school of thought also proposes that the interaction of demand and supply forms an economic equilibrium that determines the price. The Austrian school of economic thought disputes the classical and neo-classical views of price determination (Sullivan et al, 36). The classical and neo-classical perspectives reveal that subjective principles also dictate equity between demand and supply.

The Austrian school of thought and the classical concept disagree concerning the laws of supply and demand which dictate interest levels in a free market. The Austrian school of thought explains that subjective factors determine the amount of interest rates.

The thinking explains that an increase in financial supply without a proportionate increase in production of services and goods causes an increase in prices (Landsburg, 13). However, this growth is not simultaneous. The theory explains that certain goods may increase in a higher rate than others. This aspect may lead to a high deviation in the prices of goods.

Adam Smith’s “invisible hand” theory was the foundation of the formal science of economics. Karl Marx’s theory of capitalism made him a famous scholar who made a big impact in the community. John Keynes prompted new aspects of economic observation in the economic policy of the world.

His concepts were fundamental in the formulation of economic policies and institutions that regulated the economy. Keynes inspired the formation of the International Monetary Fund. This fact happened at the closure of the Second World War.

The Chicago school of economics The school is popular for its support of monetarist and free-market concepts. It notes that stability in the market depends on a state of money availability. Milton Friedman is the principal scholar behind the theory. He supports most of the principles of Adam Smith’s model but adds modern aspects.

The model explains that aspects like modern social responsibility in business can improve the economic environment. Authorities in the economic field continue to carry out research on all the mentioned theories in order to improve and help future generations.

Conclusion This paper confirms that Adam Smith’s “invisible hand theory” continues to influence other ideas positively. Economic authorities may conduct additional research in order to develop a concept that can integrate all the strengths of the theories discussed in this paper.

The theorists need to adopt economic policies that address dynamic financial needs of various states of the world. Countries derive their economic practices from relevant theories. They use the practices to formulate policies. States that fail to recognize the role that economic theories play in improving financial practices may suffer from stagnation in their development.

Works Cited Landsburg, Steven. Fair Play: What Your Child Can Teach You About Economics, Values and the Meaning of Life, New York, USA: Free Press, 2010.Print.

Sullivan et al.Economics: Principles in Action, New Jersey, USA: Pearson Prentice Hall, 2011.Print. Wenz, Peter. Take Back the Center: Progressive Taxation for a New Progressive Agenda, Massachusetts, USA: Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 2012.Print.

Yunker, James. Economic Justice: The Market Socialist Vision, Maryland, United States of America: Rowman


Toyota Motor Corporation Research Paper college essay help online: college essay help online

Firm’s History

Toyota is a Japanese company that deals in the manufacture of automobiles. It is a multinational company with operations across the world. The company was started in the year 1937 by a man known as Kiichiro Toyoda.

He had inherited a company that dealt with the creation of automobiles from his father. The company has formed partnerships with other companies such as Hino Motors, Daihatsu, and Lexus to constitute the Toyota Motor Corporation.

Before the formation of this corporation, the Company’s operation in the Toyota Industries had started back in the year 1933.

The first product produced by the company was the Type A Engine that was produced in the year 1934 when the company was still operating under Toyota Industries. It produced a passenger car for the first time in the year 1936. The car was called the Toyota AA (Liker


Separation between girls and boys in the classroom Analytical Essay college admission essay help

Introduction Sex separation is becoming a common practice in most learning institutions globally. The practice is widespread generally in high schools as compared to primary schools.

Indeed, separation of boys and girls is considered vital especially among teenagers since it holds the capacity of fostering moral values, sanity, and development of basic human principles.

It also eradicates the occurrence of sexual cases among students that have been increasing in various settings. The concept has presented immense benefits to teachers, students, and parents.

At the outset, it has enabled every stakeholder in the education sector to understand his or her role in promoting delivery of quality education. Likewise, it has fostered discipline and instillation of proper ways of living among individuals of diverse sexes.

The practice has also been contributing in reducing teenage pregnancies that has been at a record high of 46% in US (Woolston, 2012, p. 1). Most studies report high level of pregnancy among teenagers especially in mixed schools as compared to those who are separated.

The studies also indicate that girls are more vulnerable and prone to getting premature pregnancies and other chronic diseases if they are exposed to boys. The findings show that boys and girls especially in high schools cannot stay and study effectively since they are sexually active at the stage.

Their studies normally get disturbed since boys always seek to make advances to girls. Girls too are always impatient at this stage given that it remains the appropriate stage when, they tend to discover themselves including their potentials (Larsson


The Business Plan: JAMA Company Report writing essay help

Executive Summary The car wash industry develops rapidly to respond to the increasing needs and demands of customers. The JAMA Company is one of the leading companies within the market, which works to provide the high-quality services and increase the company’s competitive advantage.

The JAMA Company’s strengths are the focus on the provision of the top quality services and the 24-hour support for all the customers in different communities because of using the innovative technologies.

The Business Description

The JAMA Company is a corporation which operates within the field of car wash services. The company works to guarantee the provision of its customers with such services as normal cleaning, outside polishing, and full polishing.

Being at the high stage of the development, the company plans to increase the competitive advantage while orientating to utilizing the effective technologies such as apps for making calls and using the call center services to reach customer at different places within a short period of time. It is possible to forecast that at the end of the third year, the company will pay dividends close to the highest percentage norm to its shareholders.

The principal aim of the business plan is to communicate this prospect to the JAMA Company investors operating in the car wash industry and to attract more investors to participate in the business as well. The JAMA Company intends to have the two years loans that will cover its business operations during the first three months.

Such forecasting tools as the time series analysis, regression, and correlation analysis are incorporated in the business plan in order to demonstrate the accuracy of the predictions in relation to the expected revenues.

The current organization structure is based on the work of ten sales executives, and it is expected that each representative is able to work with more than five customers per hour, depending on the urgency of the services which are discussed and provided. Following the assumption mentioned above, it is possible to note that the company can work for 50,000 clients per year while providing the high-quality services.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Mission Statement

The mission of the JAMA Company is to provide the high-quality services in relation to normal cleaning, outside polishing, and full polishing in order to satisfy the customers’ needs with references to the use of specific apps and call center services to contact the customers quickly and successfully. The JAMA Company develops to become the leading service supplier of car wash services within the industry.

The company is devoted to creating a binding association with its customers by providing the excellence service as well as the effective customer support. The company’s strategic goals and objectives are to grow steadfastly, becoming profitable during the third month of operations as it is depicted in the business plan.

Products and Services

The JAMA Company plans to operate effectively basing on the work of four car wash small and mobile stations to provide the car wash services in four different locations.

The work of these car wash stations should depend on the effective communication with the customers with the help of such technology as the call apps and with the help of call centers to ease the provision of services as well as to improve the efficiency of service provision, while guaranteeing the immediate feedback.

The company intends to provide the segregation of duties in relation to providing the cleaning, outside polishing, and full polishing services. The use of reports and performance assessments can lead to the better administration of business. Thus, the initiative can contribute to the increased profits for the company.

Marketing Strategies Consumer Inducement

The JAMA Company focuses on car wash services. The corporation is created as a personalized service for its customers to provide the systematic services. The company can differentiate itself among the other competitors within the industry because of offering the high-quality services for the customers.

A good business strategy enables the company to overcome the competitors since the orientation to the customers’ final decisions is prevailing. The JAMA Company has strived to provide the high-quality product to the clients while guaranteeing the superior services with attractive prices that can be discussed as convincing for the customers to use the proposed services.

We will write a custom Report on The Business Plan: JAMA Company specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More From the company’s perspectives, the current generation of customers has the special powers in influencing the selling-purchasing relations. That is why the company demonstrate the concern about the customer’s preferences and orients to the customers’ interests and decisions in order to satisfy them completely relying on the customer lock strategy as the way to reduce the negative effects of competition within the industry.

The company studies the customers’ opinions on the services to receive and understand the feedback on the company’s services. The company plans to refer to the effective sales promotion and advertising strategies, ensuring that the company’s services are fully accepted by the customers.

To contribute to the sale promotion, the company intends to employ an expert to control the business promotion strategies and work with the latest technologies. The implementation of the idea to use the call apps and efficient call centers is rather effective to promote the company’s services as well as to build the reputation within the industry.

As a result, the implementation of these strategies makes customers use the promoted services since they are attracted to the company. This situation can lead to the increased revenue in relation to the business development.

Advertisement and Promotion

The company’s advertising and promotional strategies are organized and developed basing on three major perspectives which are the public relations, promotion of the Internet site, and the improvement of the company-customer relations.

Public relations

The JAMA Company relies on providing the information about the company and services in newspapers and magazines. These efforts will be realized with references to developing the stories concerning the company’s mission and objectives, concrete actions and services, the company’s potential customers as well as the company’s personnel.

All these attempts and approaches can guarantee the acceptance and recognition of the company and its services within the community. Thus, such strategies can lead to the enhanced profits of the company in return because of creating the good reputation of the company to the public’s perception and feedback.

Building good relations with the public is a key approach to the successful business because the potential clients can be attracted to a company which focuses on the sustainable relations with the community.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Business Plan: JAMA Company by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The company communicates with the community within which it operates with references to the concept of the corporate social responsibility. Thus, the principle of the social responsibility is the key to the successful business as it can boost the company’s image in the public’s eyes, and this situation can lead to reduction of misunderstanding within the community in relation to the company’s services.

The customers will be ready to use the company’s product when they experience the need for the product and services. Thus, good public relations must be upheld with references to succeeding in the competitive market where customers have the power to decide what to buy and where to buy as well.

The development of the website for promoting the company’s services would enable the business to reach many customers within a short period and rather easily.

The focus on the other promotional techniques can cost about $ 25,000 since an expert should be employed to develop specific strategies to attract more customers to the business because the company’s employees often do not have the relevant expertise in the field.

It is necessary to pay attention to the development of the management and marketing departments in order to use all the benefits expected from the implementation of the innovative technologies for supporting the services proposed by the company for the customers belonging to four different communities.

That is why it is important not only to provide the detailed information about the advantages of using the call apps and call centers for the target audience but also to refer to the customers’ interests which can be different with the references to the definite communities or locations.

The company’s website

To receive the information about the customers’ satisfaction in relation to the company’s services within a short period, it is necessary to promote the materials about the use of four new locations for car washing, available apps, and call centers with the help of the JAMA Company’s website.

The use of the Internet as a tool of advertising and as the part of the promotion strategy is effective because the Internet resources can be discussed as the fast-growing and key promotional channels. The Internet promotional campaign is expected to be successful because it is a convenient way of communicating the customer within a short period of time.

The focus on the Internet resources and social networks can become the part of the major promotional strategy used by the company since almost many people have the access to the Internet connection, and it can be easy for the company to win the customers’ attention.

The Internet cost is minimal if there will be reductions in advertising and promotion costs. That is why the company is oriented to creating a website for advertising the services.

The company-customer relations

The company intends to maintain the customer records in relation to sales by phone, and the business can use a lot of information on the company’s customers to modify the approach to selling services.

In order to achieve the maximum from the customer look-in strategy as well as to focus on the reduction of hostile competition within the industry, the business orients to retaining details about each customer’s behaviors and attitudes to ensure that the services that they are given are satisfactory.

The focus on feedbacks is relevant since the company is able to correct any minor mistakes that the customer can notice while attracting new customers to the company. These strategies can lead to the reduction in competition, the customer lock-in as well as to increasing the competitive advantage.

The Operations Plan The first step is the selection of the four specific locations for placing the mobile and small car wash stations. The location of the company’s car wash services centers is strategically important to guarantee the easy access of the customers to the provided services.

The main aim of planning the effective location of services centers is to ensure that customers are in a position to have the services done by the company without seeking any external parties for assistance. The company’s estimates to cover the rent payments are of $ 240,000 totally per annum as well as the expected material costs are of $120,000.

The JAMA Company is a new competitor within the market, and a good strategic position and location with references to the car wash centers and call centers will guarantee the availability of the company’s services. While analyzing the perspectives, it is essential to pay attention to the customers’ behavior, their needs, and to the price they prefer.

The business can take advantage of the situation in order to reduce the time necessary for the product to be recognized within the market and be fully accepted by the customer.

This approach can lead to the reduction in start-up costs, advertising and promotional costs. Thus, the company’s management considers the choice of location as the focus on the strategically useful places to locate four different stations which services can contribute to the competition within the industry.

The company intends to develop the 24-hour provision of the assistance and support for the customers with the help of call centers and modern call apps. The company tries to ensure that its services are available at any time, and it provides the friendly services to the customers.

The company is oriented to establishing the balanced services provided to its clients. This approach will contribute to improving the company’s image and its reputation among customers.

The use of the call apps and developed call centers with the highly technological equipment will enable the company to enlarge the number of the sales representatives to react to the customers’ calls.

The use of innovative technologies contributes to utilizing the full on-screen data on the customers and the services they want to be offered since the company intends to have four outlets or stations that will provide the equitable services to the customers in relation to their preferences.

The company will have the full data on the customers’ needs so as to provide the satisfactory services. In this case, the implementation of call centers services and the use of call apps to support the four new stations in different locations are based on the use of top technologies and proper equipment.

The next stage is the recruitment of the support team. The business intends to distribute jobs to persons in relation to their qualification, and the company ensures that each worker knows what is expected and what duties should be performed.

New employees will be required to pass specific tests developed by the company’s management team before beginning the recruitment process in the company because the business aims to hire quality workers. The business outfit policy will command the management team to regulate the company’s following the right path to succeed and to demonstrates professionalism in the industry.

The Financial Plan and Forecasts The Financial Summary

The JAMA Company focuses on providing the car washing services in four different parts of the country within the same period of time.

Referring to the financial analysis worked out for the first year of the company’s operation, it is possible to state that the company relies on raising a net profit in $329,000 after the first year of operation while fixing the net total for the first month of implementing the idea as 21,500 and the net profit in -30,500 and for the twelfth month – the net total in 113,000 and the net profit in 71,000 (Figure 1).

Figure 1

The company plans to have a steady growth rate in relation to the sales. This strategy will be attained with the focus on the latest technologies for providing services as well as with the concentration on guaranteeing the customer satisfaction in different regions in which the business will be operated.

The number of clients expected during the first year of operation with the use of call centers and call apps will be increased with references to the implemented promotional strategy.

The company plans to earn the revenue of $54,000 per annum from the cleaning department, $255,000 from the outside polishing, and $534,000 from the full polishing. The revenue from different departments would amount $843,000 per annum after the second year of operation with the new technologies.

The Operating Costs

It is also necessary to calculate the possible operating costs for the first year of providing the services in order to see the complex picture of the potential revenues and predict all the expenses and gains. The company’s monthly expenses include expenses on salaries, fuels, material, and housing as well as on insurance and visa (Figure 2).

Moreover, it is essential to predict the expenses on rents, advertising and promotional companies, the new equipment in call centers, and the use of call apps along with the specific phone equipment for the support teams.

Figure 2

The detailed analysis presents some favorable trends in sales forecasting and, as a result, such other factors as the intensive capital rationing as well as the effects of inflation might inhibit the achievement of the estimates. Some measures have been undertaken to minimize the adverse effects of those externalities. The management team believes that the only factor that inhibits attainment of this budget analysis is the effective financial plan.

All the other factors contributing to the achievement of this forecasting have been fully incorporated, and the company’s management team considers that as soon as the financial plan is developed, the business can have no other focus than the orientation to the high returns.

The sales projection aims at ensuring that the fixed cost should be preserved at the minimal level since the changes can affect the break-even point.

The company is a new competitor within the industry, and the high fixed costs as start-up costs accentuate the possible downfall in business and that is why it is important to provide the realistic forecasting that incorporates all the elements of the financial forecasting while constructing and analyzing potential estimates.

The Break-Even Point

In order to propose some assumptions of the financial development of the company, it is necessary to calculate the break-even point according to which the company’s expenses and profits are equal (Figure 3).

Figure 3

The focus on the situation when there are no financial losses or gains in relation to revenues is necessary to forecast the potential profits in the future. The JAMA Company can earn no profit or loss when it reaches a break-even point with references to spending $ 33.97 per unit of services provided as it is calculated below.

Contribution margin per unit total contribution /No. of unit produced.

Contribution margin per unit (2,085,000 / 2035) = 1024.57

Break even point = (total fixed / contribution margin per unit)

Break even point = $ 34, 800 / $ 1024.57= $ 33.97

This point is regarded as a stable point at which the company will signifying that the liquidity position of the business can be rather high in relation to the low ratio. The break-even point can be achieved within a reasonable time, accentuating the useful income statement projection.

The statement of the company’s financial position, as well as the aspects of the cash flow, can depict a positive trend, and the strong capital base can be enhanced since the margins of safety will be low, and the company will focus on the proper stock management in order to guarantee the constant supply of material as well as the provision of services to the customer.

The poor inventory system would make the company to have a bad reputation with the customer.

Return on Investment

The company can also achieve 24% return on investment with references to the stated net profit after calculating taxes and with references to the total assets. Thus, the company intends to use the funding from external sources as well as from their sources which is worth 15% of the total value of the initial capital required and seeking 85% from the outside funding.

Business Control Quality Control

The company’s workers need to have the necessary high skills and expertise in field of support and providing the car wash services. The JAMA company intends to use the specific software to manage investigation on the personnel’s effectiveness in order to control the quality of the services provided.

This approach can guarantee that all the received calls with the help of call apps are dealt with in the similar manner and with references to the ethical code of conduct developed for the company since the customers require the high-quality and professional services.

We are going to ensure that the customers are encouraged to give feedback on the received services in relation to whether the company is able to deliver the services on time as well as whether the services which are offered to them meet the expectations, and whether the improvements should be implemented.

Thus, the management, quality assurance, and sale departments control the company’s performance and focus on the customers’ reaction as well as on the areas which should be improved regarding the information on the productivity.

Ensuring that the active cooperation exists between the company and the public living in the community, it is necessary to refer to the concept of the corporate social responsibility which contributes to building the effective business reputation. As a result, more clients will be attracted to the business.

The employment of the well-trained and competent workers can also lead to the improved efficiency and to the increased production because the management team believes that a competent worker can understand the role of high-quality services in the business as well as the business goals and objectives.

Thus, the company will provide the high-quality products and services along with offering the competitive and rather affordable price for customers. This approach to the promotional strategy can make more clients visit the company’s stations and service centers.

Accounting Systems

The company will concentrate on using the latest accounting software in business in order to manage the company financial system. This software is effective to check on the sales performance as well as promotional activities frequently. This process will enable the management team to assess the productivity in relation to the observed revenues received by different stations located in different places.

The JAMA Company provides the payment to workers basing on the performance reports and contracts, and it will be easy to assess the employees’ performance and to ascertain the employees who achieve the higher performance results.

Long-Term Goals

The company’s commercial purpose is to operate above or close to the break-even point at the end of the financial period with a steady growth rate during the next three years. The company focuses becoming profitable after the three months of the business operation depending on new technologies, four new stations, call centers, and on the use of call apps to receive and send the orders and feedbacks.

The company orients to the net profit of at least $320,000 per annum with the profit margin being higher than 8% after three years from developing the business.

Opportunities and Risks Today, the company provides three basic services, which are normal cleaning, outside polishing, and full polishing. The company will expect to diversify its business operations and services provided as well as to expand the services in relation to the work of the support team with the help of call centers established to support the work of four new small stations located in different regions of the country.

The company also plans to negotiate the insurance contracts to safeguard their properties against damages and possible risks.

The JAMA Company also plans to implement the superior service content as well as the additional investing in other ventures while ensuring the work of the effective and updated database management systems. This procedures and approaches will lead to improved client loyalty as well as to increasing the competitive advantage.

The threats for the company’s development and operation within the market depend on the ineffective strategies used by the management team when the team tries to implement specific mechanisms to ensure that the company remains active in the market and within the industry.

It is important to cope with the competitors within the industry while providing unique and superior products and services to the clients available with references to comparably low prices.

Conclusion The mission of the JAMA Company is to become the principal service supplier of car wash services. The company is devoted to creating a binding association with its clientele with providing the excellent services as well as the adequate customer support with the help of call apps and call center services.

These factors are important because customers are inclined to choose car wash service centers, which can guarantee the provision of the top quality services in relation to cleaning and polishing cars. That is why the company’s strategic goals and objectives are to achieve the rapid growth and to become profitable during the third month of providing operations.

To achieve the stated results, the JAMA Corporation currently plans to refer to establishing four services centers as rather small stations which activities are supported with the help of call centers and useful call apps. The focus on using innovative technologies is necessary to guarantee the company’s achievement of the significant competitive advantage.

The main features of the car washing industry in which the JAMA Company operates are the presence of a large number of small competitors which can attract more customers while providing the high-quality services along with proposing the appropriate prices.

While developing the work of new call centers and new four services centers, the management team of the JAMA Company should pay attention to such facts as the preferences of the local customers in relation to using the specific cleaning and polishing services during different periods.

The JAMA Company should orient to the customers who are inclined to choose the high-quality services for adequate prices, thus, the company’s aim is to attract the price-conscious and quality-conscious customers while ensuring them that the company focuses on the high-quality 24-hour provision of services and support with the help of call centers and specific call apps.


Evaluation of Walmart Evaluation Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Table of Contents Cost Leadership

Differentiation Strategy

Acquisition Strategy

Product Quality Concerns

Labor Practices

Business Ethics

Market Share

Advertising Strategies

Evaluation of the Analysis



Works Cited

Cost Leadership Walmart’s main business strategy focuses on building and maintaining cost leadership in the market. The company’s slogan reads, “Everyday low price”. This highlights its main focus on cost leadership. The strategy entails offering the same market products offered by rival firms at lower costs, but without compromising the quality.

Walmart manages to achieve this objective by relying on a highly efficient supply chain management that only avails products to the consumers at the right time when they need them. This eliminates additional costs that come from holding stock within the company’s premises (Schermerhorn 223).

Walmart uses a sophisticated technology to interconnect its operations with those of the suppliers. In essence, information about stock levels within the company is relayed in real time. The sophisticated IT system relays the information to the suppliers immediately every time consumers purchase a commodity from the retailer. This makes it possible for the suppliers to monitor the stock-levels at any given time.

Thus, restocking occurs at the opportune time just when the clients need the products and in the exact quantity. The ‘in-time’ logistics in the company has been the main reason behind its cost leadership in the market.

The retailer also sells products in smaller quantities to allow its customers to pay less (Schermerhorn 223). Walmart acquires goods packed in large quantities, but it repacks them in much smaller quantities for sale at reduced prices. This sustains its “Everyday low prices” slogan.

The true meaning of the slogan would not be achieved if the firm decided to sell the commodities in the large packaged quantities that it acquires from the supplier.

Differentiation Strategy Walmart pursues a differentiation strategy whose main objective is to offer products and services that are unique in the market. Although the firm is not involved in manufacturing, Walmart stocks products that are specifically packaged in branded material. The company has invested heavily in repackaging materials to enable it achieve the differentiation mission.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Additionally, Walmart offers unique warranties that other rival retailers in the market do not offer (Daft 253). This creates a unique feeling among the consumers, making them believe that the experience is only available in Walmart and not from any other retailer.

Acquisition Strategy Walmart has focused its efforts on market acquisition as a way of expanding its market presence. The firm considers acquiring other already existing retailer firms in foreign markets and maintaining their original names to cope with the globalization phenomenon and increasing market competition among rival retailers.

This is the case in most conservative markets where a foreign trade name may not augur well with the company. Walmart also considers acquiring and merging with other businesses outside the retail industry as a way of expanding its portfolio.

This also helps in spreading the company’s risks evenly (Daft 255). Walmart, for instance, acquired Kosmix, which is a social mobile platform. Walmart operates under the ASDA trade name in the United Kingdom after the latter was acquired in 1999 by Walmart.

Product Quality Concerns Walmart has instituted a mechanism that focuses on maintaining high product quality. All Walmart stores around the world are required to fulfill the Global Food Safety Initiative (GFSI). This GFSSI procedure calls on all food suppliers to be subjected to the factory audit checks as a way of ensuring that the products meet the desired quality.

The retailer has worked together with The Sustainability Consortium (TSC) since 2009 as a means of developing measurement, as well as reporting systems.

The target is to enhance product sustainability and eliminate problems attached to product quality. In this arrangement, TSC performs research on metrics and the reporting systems. The research, in turn, helps Walmart to engage suppliers while clearly understanding the products sold.

We will write a custom Essay on Evaluation of Walmart specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In recent times, however, there have been rising concerns over poor quality of products sold by Walmart. For instance, the fresh foods sold by the firm have been found to suffer from poor quality. This problem is mainly linked to another challenge being faced by the firm, the challenge of staffing and related issues (Weiss 472).

Walmart’s fresh foods have only managed a low market share in comparison to other market players. This could be an indicator of the worsening product quality concerns.

Labor Practices Walmart has been involved in accusations with labor union bodies, religious organizations, and community groups over its labor practices and policy. The retailer was taken to court over what its accusers termed as discrimination of its staff along race and gender. Three women employees filed a sex discrimination complaint against the retailer in 2012, accusing Walmart of failing to promote them because they are women.

The accusations leveled against the company also mention the fact that female employees generally earn less compared to their male counterparts (Daft 122). Workers in the firm have also accused their employer of failing to observe acceptable labor practices, resulting in poor conditions of work in the various stores owned by the retailer.

Business Ethics Walmart considers ethics as the strongest aspect of its success in business. The organizational structure has an established global ethics office whose main mandate is to promote its culture of integrity (Walmart para 1).

The office also develops and helps in upholding the policies that relate to ethical behavior concerning all the stakeholders. Ethics education is offered on a routine basis to the employees. In this case, all workers undergoing training in the firm are subjected to consistent integrity lessons.

Walmart supports a special award related to business ethics, the Integrity in Action Award, to further emphasize on the need to enhance business ethics (Walmart para 1).

The award is offered in recognition of individuals or associates of the firm who demonstrate a greater level of integrity through their consistent actions. Such recognized associates must also have inspired others to do the right thing while dealing with Walmart in one way or the other.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Evaluation of Walmart by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The retailer practices integrity itself when selecting winners for the award by allowing the associates to conduct their own voluntary nominations. The resultant global votes determine the perfect recipient of the award. Walmart also takes consideration of each of the countries where the firm has a presence (Walmart para 3).

Market Share The retailer has the biggest market share compared to its competitors in the USA, which is Walmart’s traditional market. Walmart’s heavy presence throughout the country and its business model that makes it stock virtually all kinds of commodities have been critical in sustaining market share leadership.

On the global front, Walmart serves up to 94 million customers every week through its 5,651 established stores in 26 countries.

However, a paltry 5.5% market share was registered in the year 2011 in China where the company is still in its early stages of development. The failure by Walmart to register a strong market share in China is attributable to the conservative nature of the Chinese. Market share growth in India has also been hampered in recent years following decisions by authorities in the country to shift foreign direct investment.

The North-American market of Canada has equally posed great challenges to Walmart. The Dollarama Inc. is emerging as the fiercest competitor in the mass retail market in the rich Canadian market. Walmart trails Dollarama with the second best market share of 26%.

This percentage of market share is 16 points less the share of Dollarama, which stands at 42% market dominance. Target Corp. is the third with a market share of 23% (Bloomberg News, 2012, para 1).

However, Walmart’s subsidiary ASDA in the UK maintains an 18% market share, which is the second biggest in the country. Tesco still maintains the largest market share in the UK retail industry, standing at 30.2% overall (“Walmart: Update on International Markets” para 5). The African market equally has a strong Walmart presence of more than 300 stores that spread across 12 countries in the continent.

Massmart, which is Walmart’s subsidiary in the region with a 51% stake ownership, has the fastest growing market rate, especially in the sub-Saharan region (“Walmart: Update on International Markets” para 6). The pie chart below depicts Walmart’s market share situation in the traditional US market.

Source: Catala para 3

The chart shows that Walmart has a commanding share of more than half the market size. The second strongest competitor, Costco Wholesale Corp., does not even command a third of the market size.

Advertising Strategies Walmart is adopting the use of technology in its advertising. In this strategy, the company focuses on developing a mobile app to reach its targeted markets. Shoppers using the app are able to see additional content, such as product information and the recipe.

The company’s target is to reach a larger number of existing and potential buyers by exploiting the growing popularity of mobile devices as a result of the advancement in the ICT platform. The mobile app is a more interactive way of advertising because it allows the user to obtain more details about products and services.

Walmart has adopted the use of popular social media platforms to create market awareness to further utilize the power of technology in its advertising. For instance, the firm has a Facebook page where a large community of customers and potential buyers meet virtually and discuss issues about their retailer.

This increases market awareness because of the strong word of mouth power as customers share their experiences amongst each other.

The company also uses the opportunity to communicate directly with individual customers while seeking to address some of the unique issues that affect them, thus learning more about the tastes and preferences of their customers. The company’s use of the social media platform in advertising also helps it to maintain its operating costs at a lower level, thus building on its competitive edge more.

Evaluation of the Analysis Walmart has a greater potential of expanding in Asia and should be considered as Tech-Shield’s best choice as far as investing is concerned. Its cost leadership focus and strategy will attract more buyers in the region, resulting in higher profits. Most Asian economies are still considered as developing and have a weaker buying power compared to North America and Europe.

Walmart will utilize its low price policy to attract more buyers with inferior disposable income and make the firm to benefit from the resultant economies of scale. Tech-Shield will receive a bigger dividend rate coming from the huge profits amassed. This will be positive for the growth of the company.

The low price policy pursued by Walmart has seen the company introduce a new business modality of selling products in smaller quantities.

This will further attract customers towards the firm because most of them will find buying products from Walmart to be a more affordable practice. The more customers will appreciate the retailer, the more it will have its chances of making huge profits and increase the potential for Tech-Shield to get better returns.

The differentiation strategy by Walmart equally increases the potential of the company to make better profits. Walmart stands a better chance to attract more customers and make higher sales than its rivals because of the increased market competition within the retail industry. Buyers increasingly feel that whatever commodity or service they purchase from Walmart is unique, thus they get attached more to the firm.

The attachment increases their level of satisfaction and enhances their loyalty towards the firm. Walmart is poised to maintain high profitability for longer periods given such a positive business environment. The company can, therefore, sustain to pay attractive returns to all its shareholders for long.

The acquisition strategy that is pursued by Walmart is another significant consideration that should influence Tech-Shield’s decision to invest in Walmart. Walmart is sure of expanding in the market in many other countries in the world through the acquisition approach.

The experience that the company has gathered over the years through its subsequent acquisition of different retailers to gain access into new foreign markets eliminates the possibility of making over ambitious plans to a great assistance.

Such successful acquisitions in high potential markets will translate to a larger market for both firms. Walmart will register bigger profit margins because of the expanded market. This will enable Tech-Shield to earn higher returns as one of the shareholders.

Walmart’s future prospect is still promising, although its global market share has been threatened in some regional markets. The retailer still enjoys a strong lead in the highly lucrative US market. The US market contributes a significant profit portion to Walmart’s overall corporate profit. Walmart has maintained a strong market share position in other significant European markets, such as the UK.

This portrays the company’s strong market position going forward. Going with this trend, it is appropriate to conclude that no other global retailer brand will find it easy to topple Walmart as the global leader in terms of the overall market share. Walmart’s extensive global expansion is unrivaled.

This goes further to highlight Walmart’s potential of sustained industry leadership in as far as the overall market share is concerned. To this extent, a decision by Tech-Shield to invest in the company is the most strategic because of definite greater market revenue, which transforms to higher returns.

Recommendation I suggest that Tech-Shield should invest in Walmart. Walmart has a positive business profile that reassures a higher return on the part of Tech-Shield. There is no present threat to Walmart’s growing global market, strong market leadership in the highly valuable US market, and the sustainable cost leadership strategy that it has implemented.

This implies that the strong market leadership position that Walmart enjoys is set to prevail for long. In turn, a move by Tech-Shield to invest in Walmart will see it earn good returns for a long period. This will eventually improve Tech-Shield’s capital base.

Conclusion Walmart offers the best investment alternative for Tech-Shield. The company’s cost leadership strategy gives a greater market growth assurance. The firm is capable of maintaining its operating costs at a low level compared to many of its industry rivals. This is a significant aspect in as far as building a competitive edge in the market is concerned.

This will continue attracting more buyers for the company and maintaining the already existing customers. It also gives the company the confidence that profitability will remain high. The strong business ethics that focuses on maintaining integrity amongst the entire firm’s associates also gives hope for a greater business fortune for the firm.

Integrity is a critical aspect that attracts customers and enables them to build strong loyalty towards the firm. Walmart will evidently reap maximum profits as it strives to enhance integrity. This will, in turn, trickle down to Tech-Shield as a shareholder. However, it is critical to note that Walmart also faces potential distractions that could derail its future ambitions in case no efforts are made to rectify them.

As a shareholder in the firm, Tech-Shield should push for a renewed commitment on the part of Walmart to address the concerns of poor labor practices.

Workers are significant players towards the greater performance of a firm, thus Walmart should ensure that it focuses on improving the plight of the workers before concentrating on the external customers. The firm should equally put additional measures in place to ensure quality concerns raised over its products are addressed fully.

Works Cited “Walmart: Update on International Markets.” Guru Focus. 2012. Web.

Catala, Raymond. Walmart Market Share Analysis, n.d. Web.

Daft, Richard. New Era of Management, Mason, OH: Cengage, 2008. Print.

Schermerhorn, John. Management, Hoboken, NJ: Wiley, 2010. Print.

Walmart. Home. 2013. Web.

Weiss, Joseph. Business Ethics: A Stakeholder and Issues Management Approach, Mason, OH: Cengage, 2008. Print.


What is Social class and how does it contribute to our understanding of the social determinants of health? Analytical Essay cheap essay help

Introduction Social class can be defined as a manifestation of structural inequality in the present day social system which creates different “classes” of individuals based on their economic status. This is commonly manifests as the following social classes:

Upper Class

This class within society is normally associated with individuals who have accumulated considerable amounts of wealth and social influence (Ritzer 2007). In most cases, this group consists of individuals who are business owners, land owners or have inherited their wealth through the endeavors of their parents.

This social class has the greatest amount of opportunities available to them in terms of wealth generation, health and education by virtue of their economic status and connections.

Middle Class

The middle class in society consists of individuals with more opportunities than the lower class but fewer opportunities than the upper class.

This section of the population normally consists of individuals with useful skill sets or levels of educational attainment that are valued by companies resulting in people from this class obtaining high paying jobs that allow them to maintain a relatively “well off” lifestyle in terms of wealth generation, health and the ability to provide opportunities for the same kind of life to their children (Ritzer 2007).

Lower Class

The lower class within society has the least amount of opportunities available to them due to a lack of economic means and social connections (Howarth, 2007). This class consists of individuals with low levels of education and they have fewer job prospects and opportunities for promotion due to a lack of skills and aptitude.

People belonging to the lower class, by virtue of their limited opportunities, have relatively little economic power and usually subsist on a “paycheck to paycheck” basis (Ritzer 2007). Unfortunately, the lower class is the largest portion of the current population in society and is commonly known as the “working class” since they are part of most manual labor operations (Howarth, 2007).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More What is Structural Inequality and how does it impact social determinants of health? Structural inequality, in essence, is an inherent bias within social structures which can provide some advantages to a select group of people within society while at the same time marginalizing others (Robert


4G Cell Service Research Paper argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Table of Contents Introduction


Technological progression

Adaptation of 4G networks

Social progression

Economic progression

Evolution of cellular networks


Works Cited

Introduction Mobile communication has changed the way people used to communicate. The advancements made within the technology field can be attributed to these changes. Communication has been joined to mobility due to this, thus people are finding it easier to interact without necessarily moving over long distances.

There has been increased growth within the wireless industry both in terms of subscribers and mobile technology (Lemstra, Hayes and Groenewegen 47). The use of fixed lines has reduced over the years. In its place is an increasing number of fixed line subscribers.

Mobile cellular users were four times more than users of fixed lines by the year 2010. Development of cheaper mobile phones also facilitated the growth. More people have access to mobile phones due to their ease of use and maintenance.

Background Mobile phone communications over cellular network work through the use of packet data. This is a wireless data transmission technology that sends digital radio signals through wireless packet switching. The cell phone is a device that can be considered as a simple radio transmitter and receiver. It is also equipped with an omnidirectional antenna.

The cell phone is able to transmit radio signals to a nearby cell tower. The distance of the cell phone from the cell tower can vary greatly depending on the technology used (Steinbock 22). With strong wireless technologies, the distance can reach distances of up to 250 miles. A service box is also attached to the cell tower. Thus, both the cell tower and the service box comprise a base station.

The base station is then connected to a switching station via cables. The switching center deals with establishing a connection between one cell phone and the called number.

The developments in communication networks resulted from the realization that networks should be efficient. Thus the designs of these networks should also encourage efficiency in the network’s functionality. This led to the network design and optimization initiatives by various telecommunications stakeholders. The stakeholders include network operators, device vendors, wireless network experts and governments.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Thus, they frequently meet and discuss various specifications that would guide a new generation of wireless communication network. Once a specification has been agreed upon, various parties come together and implement a given wireless network by using an established specification.

Technological progression Wireless technologies have been characterized with the shortest time in which they have advanced and evolved. The latest wireless technology is fourth generation (4G). Wireless technologies have followed a trend whereby efficiency and performance within the mobile environment were the main goals. The first generation (1G) was able to achieve basic mobile voice.

Through this, mobile devices could communicate with each other over long distances. Thus, it was known as the FM technology and resulted in mobile radios that could access radio signals within a wide range. The network was used during the 1980’s (ABI Research 29).

The second generation (2G) then evolved which was characterized by better coverage and capacity. It was able to solve the problems witnessed by the 1G networks. The 2G networks were considered digital systems.

Thus, such services like short messaging and data became available. Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) and CDMA2000 1xRTT are the basic 2G technologies.

Sometimes CDMA2000 1xRTT is referred as a 3G technology as it meets the minimum speeds expected of a 3G network. EDGE, a method of data access over the cellular network, is also considered as 3G though it is still 2G. The 2G networks became available in the 1990s (ABI Research 31).

Thereafter, the third generation (3G) network arose and it sought to transmit data at higher speeds. This was done so that mobile networks could be as fast as mobile broadband. Various specifications were established by the ITU to detail what 3G networks are characterized by.

We will write a custom Research Paper on 4G Cell Service specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This network was expected to provide network speeds of up to 2Mbps while indoors. At mobile speeds the throughput was at 144kbps and 384kbps at pedestrian speeds. 3G networks are comprised of CDMA2000 EV-DO, UMTS-HSPA and WiMAX (Sauter 111). The agreements on the requirements of a 3G network were established by a project called International Mobile Telephone 2000 (IMT-2000)

The fourth generation (4G) was later developed which brought with it better advancements within the telecommunication field. This network catered for multiuser environments through the introduction of advanced mobile services. It also supported both fixed and mobile networks. Moreover, the 4G network could handle a varied range of data rates and applications with high mobility.

Adaptation of 4G networks 3G upgrades led to the development of LTE (Long Term Evolution) and WiMAX networks. Thus, the cellular industry has easily adapted to these new standards. In places where the technology is functional, older 2G and 3G networks are still used. This is because many people do not have mobile phones that can access 4G networks. Thus, they are forced to depend on the older versions as subscription grows.

Thus, LTE is not universal. It is still a new technology so most cell phones with 4G capabilities are also backward compatible with older networks like 3G and 2G (Saboji and Akki 80). The principles established by IMT-Advanced guide the characteristics and deployment of 4G networks.

4G networks are expected to operate with a very high spectral efficiency. Moreover, 4G networks should be operable within 40 MHz radio channels and more. Thus, 4G networks can reach 100MHz radio channels. Many countries are expected to roll out 4G networks by 2020.

4G networks have a throughput rate totaling 1.5 Gbps. This is attributed to their spectral efficiency which during its peak is at 15 bps/Hz. 4G arose from the realization that 3G networks may become overwhelmed by applications that require intensive bandwidth.

4G networks have speeds reaching ten times of those provided by 3G. The first commercially available 4G standards were WiMAX offered in the U.S. and LTE (Lemstra, Hayes and Groenewegen 56).

The development of new technologies within the communication industry was triggered by increasing user demand. In comparison to 3G, the technological advancements arising from 4G were to combine all previous mobile technologies that exist. Thus, 4G is characterized by a technological progression where it advances and improves all previous mobile networks.

Not sure if you can write a paper on 4G Cell Service by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More These include GSM, General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), Wi-Fi, Bluetooth and IMT 2000. Thus, 4G has been referred to as all-IP as it combines all technologies that existed. This is done to ensure harmonization of all services to be provided.

In comparison to other networks, the functionality of 4G networks is distributed amongst a set of gateways and servers (Agbinya 34). Thus, the network is cheaper in deployment and application.

Social progression People depend on communication networks for the consumption of both video and television streaming services. 4G networks have made these services faster, thus it has had a significant impact on social interactions. It has also become easier to make video calls due to the speed and latency of 4G networks.

4G networks led to performance improvements in various multimedia applications. For instance, it has facilitated online gaming due to the increased speeds. Moreover, more people are able to stream videos online (Steinbock 36).

Online video games have been significantly impacted by 4G networks. More role playing and social games are being developed by gaming companies to cater to hardcore online gamers. This has also facilitated connectivity whereby more people can easily play and download games. Thus, it is easier and cheaper to purchase games online instead of using hard copies. Moreover, real time interactions through games have become easier.

This is especially important for multiplayer games where real time interactions are important to enjoy the game. The online entertainment industry has also grown due to the introduction of 4G networks. With the increased speeds, high quality videos can be uploaded online and also be watched. Thus, 4G has facilitated online sharing of videos as it takes less time to download a high quality video.

HD movies have also become the norm, and this has led to increasing growth of the online entertainment industry. Many companies are now distributing movies online as 4G ensures that consumers will enjoy high quality movies without loss of clarity (OECD 14).

Video communication has also been impacted. Many business organizations and individuals regard video communication highly as it makes communication over long distances realistic. Thus, 4G networks have provided a cheaper alternative that is faster and effective. 4G networks have proved to be advantageous socially.

The merge of various technologies that comprise 4G has enabled cheaper or free roaming (Agbinya 38). Thus, a subscriber can use their home country’s 4G network from wherever they are. This is because 4G networks are expected to have a global coverage. The differences that existed due to 3G networks will be minimized and users will be able to roam from any place in the world with 4G coverage.

Socially, 4G networks have facilitated collaborative efforts among professionals and intellects. This is because many users can access the network without causing a strain or decrease in speeds. This makes it easier for many people to collaborate on a specific issue. The current 3G networks are characterized by network congestion and strain constantly.

Many different mobile cellphones are competing for the same resources too. With 4G, devices will co-operate instead (Rumney and Agilent Technologies 32). This means that mobile phones will work in a similar way like broadband routers. Thus, mobile devices will become part of the cellular infrastructure itself. The users of a given network will have control of the network as they will own part of the network.

Thus, the network will be able to determine how much data is required by the user and will adapt accordingly. Thus, network capacity will be shifted based in the demands of a given user within the network. Issues like dropped calls due to congestion will be avoided because the mobile phone will have access to better capacity when need be (Kumar et al. 70). VoIP (Voice over IP) services will also improve.

Previous cellular networks like 3G and 2G were characterized by flat data rates. Operators used a flat data rate for charging their consumers data needs. With 4G, flat data rates will no longer be used. Thus, 4G networks will use a tiered model of pricing. Initially, users paid a flat rate and this led to strain on the operator’s network. Moreover, users did not fully gain from the networks use due to constant congestions.

With tiered rates, the operators will be able to gain. Initially, consumers will be uncertain about tiered rates. This is because many of them will reason that they will be overcharged for their internet use. This is not true as tiered rates encourage a better user experience. With 4G networks in place, a consumer will be able to use as much data as they need based on an established tiered system (Olsson and Mulligan 134).

4G networks will also enable more people to have access to faster network speeds. Broadband requires physical infrastructure to be established. This is depended on physical region and is also limited by costs. With 4G, network access will depend on users who have mobile devices with 4G connectivity. Thus, more people will be able to utilize 4G networks using their phones.

Faster networks have led to development of network sharing technologies known as wireless hotspots. This is a situation where a single mobile subscriber can share their internet connection to a variety of mobile devices (Lemstra, Hayes and Groenewegen 112). Thus, more people can enjoy the benefits of a faster networking speed through this mechanism.

4G networks have led to an intense change within the society. The social implications have been profound. Many people have found it easier to communicate through 4G. Social progression with 4G has led to a lasting impact on intellectuals and students. Leaning has become easier as more students use their internet for their educational needs. Social changes are also seen in the widening of the generation gap.

With faster internet access speeds, the generations that live now and in the future will be different from the generations that existed during the 2G period. Thus, rifts can be witnessed among the younger and older generations. Knowledge is considered as power, thus the younger generations can be seen as to be more powerful than the older generations.

Most western generations with improved data access speeds or have 4G are characterized by this drift. 4G has enhanced these social changes. Its impact on personal life can be compared to the effects of computers to businesses (Olsson and Mulligan 88). Societal changes will continue into the future as younger populations progress due to ease of accessing information.

Economic progression 4G cell services have also led to various economic progresses. With better and faster methods of communication, the growth of the economy has been facilitated. 4G network services has led to establishment of various companies that have had positive effects on the economy. Some of these companies include Amazon where commodity transactions are conducted online.

4G networks are advantageous to the economy, especially in cases where a business depends on communication and its employees travel constantly. Efficient and effective communication infrastructure can ensure that a business is successful. Thus, 4G networks will be advantageous. 4G networks lead to changes in ways of doing business, just as 3G led to changes in how business was conducted.

In many countries, broadband and communication networks are considered national infrastructure just like energy and transport. Thus, many countries will efficient and fast communication networks witness an increase in economic growth. Adoption of 4G networks will encourage a country’s economic growth (OECD 21). There are various advantages that arise from 4G connectivity.

Business communication will occur efficiently. Moreover, businesses will be encouraged to establish themselves in a country or region that has good network connectivity that is considered fast.

Countries that are currently trying 4G networks are characterized by stronger economies than countries which have yet to start 4G infrastructure development. New infrastructure is required for 4G services. Moreover, users also need to have a 4G enabled cellphone as to access the service. Countries with already established 4G networks have witnessed economic growth due to the effects of faster communication networks.

Evolution of cellular networks The evolution of 4G cellular networks began with the adoption of 2G networks. The European Commission made GSM compulsory in Europe in the early 1990’s. This is attributed to its lower power consumption. Thus, it allowed the production of smaller handsets which had greater security and a long battery life.

Nokia, Ericsson, regional wireless carriers and operators seized the moment to guarantee their domestic advantage within foreign markets. On the other hand, licensing issues were being faced by the U.S. as it tried to find the best network for its region. By 2000, Western Europe was home to the largest cellular market (ABI Research 32).

Continuous historical advancements led to the establishment of 4G networks. Before the change from voice to data, mobile evolution was always seen as movement from analog to broadband. At the start, the objective was to achieve a global standard for the 3G era (UMTS). This was not easy to achieve as Qualcomm came up with the CDMA technology that was considered more efficient than UMTS.

Despite this, GSM still determined the evolution of platforms until the internet became dominant and important. After many regional disagreements and dialogues, a single flexible standard was adopted by all parties (Saboji and Akki 82).

The adoption of 3G began much earlier in Japan. NTT DoCoMo, a major operator in Japan, was the pioneer of the transition in 1999. This occurred two years before the official implementation of the first 3G networks around the world.

With the development of new cellular platforms, the core technologies have resulted in an increase on the capacity held by a spectrum. Thus, stakeholders in the mobile industry have aggressively demanded for improved wireless networks that are of high speeds. By 2005, a large percentage of the world was yet to adapt to 3G networks

Conclusion In conclusion, 4G networks have evolved for a long time since the adoption of 1G network in the 1980’s. The need for faster speeds and efficiency has led to increased developments within the communication field. This has led to constant evolution as various stakeholders in the communication industry try to encourage faster network speeds.

There has been an increasing demand from mobile subscribers which influenced researchers to come up with new specifications that guide 4G networks. Through history, there has been a trend to merge existing technologies and make them efficient. 1G networks were able to guarantee basic mobile voice and signaled the beginning of evolving mobile networks.

The 2G networks were then characterized with better coverage and capacity. This was followed by 3G which led to improved speeds and finally 4G which will ensure greater improvements and benefits. 4G systems will function as complete IP-depended wireless internet networks.

It will be able to provide various telecommunication services, inclusive of mobile services that are advanced. Thus, this essay provides an analysis of 4G networks and its technological, social and economic progression.

Works Cited ABI Research. “4G Networks to Handle More Data Traffic Than 3G Networks by 2016, Says ABI Research.” Business Wire (English). 27 October (2013): 22-36. Print.

Agbinya, Johnson Ihyeh. Planning and Optimization of 3G


The power of a folksong in transforming an individual and the relationship between Whitehead’s book “John Henry Days” and Dylan’s folksongs Essay online essay help: online essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The Power of a Folksong in Transforming a Person

Relationship between Dylan’s Songs and Whitehead’s Book




Introduction A folksong is a song that has the ability to adapt culture, human history, and art. Folksong usually employs the language used by the target audience when conveying its message. Furthermore, many people use folksongs to present their messages, feelings, views, opinions, and suggestions to a certain set of individuals. Significantly, the songs have the power to change someone into a very different person, either temporarily or permanently.

The change depends on the level of engagement of an individual and the determination demonstrated by the person. Additionally, folksongs especially those sung by Dylan present some resemblance with the main character used by Whitehead in his book “John Henry Days.”

The similarities are presented by the passion possessed by Dylan towards folksongs and Henry towards the contest. Thus, this essay examines the power of a folksong in transforming an individual and the relationship between Whitehead’s book “John Henry Days” and Dylan’s folksongs.

The Power of a Folksong in Transforming a Person The phrase “I is somebody else” used by both Dylan and Sante was sourced from Rimbaud who was a poet. The phrase demonstrates the power of folksongs in changing someone into a different individual. The phrase sheds some light into the life and experiences of Dylan. Evidently, Dylan quickly transformed from an unknown young man into a famous folksong star in New York City.

Dylan states that, life quickly changed when he began acquiring the status of a star in folksongs, because he “was quickly promoted to a poet, oracle, conscience of his generation, and in a lateral move, pop star.”1 Therefore, the life of Dylan changed from the previous self into a famous and popular star of New York.

The changes forced him to adopt new lifestyles and become a different person from what he initially was before the transformation.

Dylan’s life became different from his past life, and hence, he was no longer the previous unknown young man. He was a popular star known by a number of people in and outside the city of New York and the United States. His mode of dressing, eating, and the friends changed because of the new status acquired. He states that he “did everything fast, thought fast, ate fast, talked fast, I even sang the songs fast.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More I needed to slow my mind down, if I was going to be a composer with anything to say.”2 This implies that Dylan’s was no longer his former self but a different person, a folk star. The change was evident from the new character adopted after acquiring the new status.

The change of Dylan from his former self to a different personality forced him to look for ways to escape and return to the previous self. He highlights that, after going through overwhelming experiences from the acquired state, he had to devise a number of strategies to escape the new state.3

He tried singing songs using different styles such as western and country. Since Dylan had acquired a new status of fame, he had to behave in a manner different from his previous self. This was attributed to the fact that the new life attracted attention and scrutiny from the public. According to Sante, since Dylan sang for people all the time, his life changed, and he started living a life based on what he practiced.4

Therefore, this explains the fact that folksongs can change the life of an individual into a different person.5 Although sometimes the changes may be temporary as is the case with many stage performers, some changes are permanent or long lasting, as was in the case of Dylan.

The personality of Dylan transformed from ordinary person to a mysterious person. In an interview with Los Angeles times Dylan states that, his life became a mystery from the time he produced his first record.

“Dylan is a complex, mercurial human being of astounding gifts, whose purposes are usually ambiguous, frequently elusive, and sometimes downright and unguessable.”6

Interviewer uses words such as complex and mercurial being to denote Dylan’s new change. This implies that Dylan was no longer his former self, but a mysterious person and a folk star

We will write a custom Essay on The power of a folksong in transforming an individual and the relationship between Whitehead’s book “John Henry Days” and Dylan’s folksongs specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Relationship between Dylan’s Songs and Whitehead’s Book When asked about his fame and songs, Dylan gives reasons why his songs lasted for many years. He states that his songs were designed technically and professionally; hence, creating a form of attraction for the audience, who always wanted to listen to the songs.

According to Dylan, he employed poetical and folksong skills coupled with his knowledge of folksongs in creating the songs, which explains the reason why the songs lasted and remained in the minds of the listeners. For a song to captivate and last for a long time, it should be touching, inspiring, and motivating.7 Thus, Dylan technically and innovatively incorporated these factors into his songs to enhance their quality and durability.

Whitehead in his book “John Henry Days” employs poetical and literary skills creatively in writing the book. This results in the production of a captivating and interesting book. Over the years, many people have bought and read the book because it is interesting and educational.

In the book, Whitehead presents a journalist known as Henry who built a railroad and won a competition between him and the rock drill powered by steam before he fell down and died.8

According to Whitehead, Henry does not only look physically fit for the contest, but also the journalist proves to be prepared and ready for the race. The contest takes place in West Virginia and though Henry dies after the contest, he displays outstanding courage and stance.

While Dylan used folksongs to convey information to the target audience, Whitehead used literary skills to relay information to his audience. The folksongs of Dylan transformed his life in a manner similar to the writings in Whitehead’s book “John Henry Days.”

Some form of accord exists between Dylan’s songs and the resilience demonstrated by Whitehead in the book and the actors he used. In both scenarios, some form of determination is expressed either by the main players or by the characters employed in the context. For instance, Dylan set his standards high and his determination was driven by the ambitions and good life.9

The determination enabled Dylan and Henry to give outstanding presentations in their respective fields. Additionally, Dylan and Henry display passion in all the activities that they performed. The passion gave them strength and energy to perform these activities perfectly. This is evident from Henry who struggled and managed to complete the contest although he dies afterwards.10

Not sure if you can write a paper on The power of a folksong in transforming an individual and the relationship between Whitehead’s book “John Henry Days” and Dylan’s folksongs by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This demonstrates the importance of passion and determination. Subsequently, it also explains the reason why Dylan’s folksongs and Whitehead’s book are among ancient literature, which have lasted for a long time and remain relevant in modern society. According to Brown, a story should have artistic style that renders the reader captive in an innovative manner.11

Hence, Henry who is the main character used in Whitehead’s book and Dylan’s folksongs, chronicles, have some level of agreement, as they both demonstrate the importance of good artistic skills and passion of one’s work.

Conclusion Folksongs are powerful and can lead to changes in the personality of an individual to a different self. Changes presented by folksongs are either temporal, which last for a short period, or long lasting. The essay used the example of Dylan who was transformed himself into a popular star of folksongs. In the essay, Dylan changed from a young unknown man to a popular star admired by a number of fans.

In this case, Dylan’s change was a long lasting one. In addition, the essay argued on the relationship between folksongs of Dylan and Henry, a character used in Whitehead’s book titled “John Henry Days.” According to the argument, there exists some level of agreement between the two elements as both demonstrate artistic skills of creativity and innovation that makes them leave good legacies and captivate individuals.

Bibliography Brown, Cecil. Frankie and Albert. New York: Oxford University Press, 2007.

Cantwell, Robert. When We Were Good. London: Harvard University press, 2009.

Dylan, Bob. Chronicles. New York: Simon and Schuster, 2004.

Sante, Luc. “I Is Somebody Else.” In Kill all your Darlings: Pieces 1990-2005.

Edited by Luc Sante. Portland: Verse Chorus Press, 2007.

Perry, Steve. Songs that Fall from the Sky. New York: Oxford, 2006.

Whitehead, Colson. John Henry Days. New York: Knopf Doubleday, 2009.

Footnotes 1 Bob Dylan, Chronicles (New York: Simon and Schuster, 2004). 143.

2 Luc Sante, “I Is Somebody Else.” In Kill all your Darling, ed. Luc Sante (Portland: Verse Chorus Press, 2007). 24.

3 Bob Dylan, Chronicles (New York: Simon and Schuster, 2004). 144.

4 Luc Sante, “I Is Somebody Else.” In Kill all your Darling, ed. Luc Sante (Portland: Verse Chorus Press, 2007). 7.

5 Robert Clantwell, When We Were Good (London: Harvard University Press, 2006). 45.

6Luc Sante, “I Is Somebody Else.” In Kill all your Darling, ed. Luc Sante (Portland: Verse Chorus Press, 2007). 162.

7 Steve Perry, Songs that Fall from the Sky (New York: Oxford, 2006) 24.

8 Colson Whitehead, John Henry Days (New York: Knopf Doubleday, 2009). 389.

9 Bob Dylan, Chronicles (New York: Simon and Schuster, 2004). 142.

10 Colson Whitehead, John Henry Days (New York: Knopf Doubleday, 2009). 389.

11 Cecil Brown. Frankie and Albert (New York: Oxford University Press, 2007). 3.


Humanitarian non-organization WFP vs. IFAD Research Paper argumentative essay help

Table of Contents Introduction


What the agencies have done so far in specific areas

What is common and what is different between these agencies

Negative ways


Works Cited

Introduction Study literature shows that there are various humanitarian non-governmental organizations across the world. However, this study seeks to analyze the World Food Program (WFP) and the International Fund for Agricultural Development (IFAD). The study takes into consideration their goals, achievements and failures. It also compares the activities undertaken by these agencies as well as how they operate across the globe.

Goals The WFP is a global charitable United Nation agency. It is globally the biggest charitable agency responsible for combating food shortage. The agency supplies food where it is considered necessary during urgent situations. The organization helps in saving the emergencies’ victims from starvation. Provided the source of crisis is over, the agency uses food in assisting those who are affected in rebuilding their lives.

In this regard, the agency effectively transforms into a development agency. The contemporary goals of this agency include saving lives and protecting the living standards during urgent situations. When such emergencies are over the agency seeks to mitigate severe food shortage. It devotes resources to emergency preparedness and puts preventive measures in place.

These efforts include restituting the livelihoods of whoever is affected during crisis. In addition, the WFP aims to minimize persistent food shortage and malnutrition. From the development perspective, WFP seeks to reinforce the abilities of countries to minimize food shortage.

Essentially, the main aim of WFP is to reduce global hunger particularly in developing countries through the application of various strategies. That is, WFP is mandated to ensure considerable reduction of global hunger through the application of various strategies (Food Program 2)

The IFAD is mandated to finance farming development specifically during food production. The authority of this agency is restricted to developing countries. The agency was established to ensure that individuals who live in complete poverty have the opportunity to produce food that can sustain their livelihoods. The core goal of the agency pertains to the improvement of food production.

In fact, the production of foodstuffs is in terms of quantity and quality but these take place in the developing countries. That is, developing states produce large chunks of valuable foodstuffs to help curb emergencies. Besides, the goal of this agency is to marshal supplementary resources that may be used during crises to assist in agricultural growth within poor states.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More What the agencies have done so far in specific areas The evaluations on the effectiveness of WFP demonstrate positive outcomes in view of delivering charitable activities and growth goals. The most evident successes have been in the delivery of food to the victims during emergencies.

The achievements have contributed to the deterrence of acute food shortages hence curing malnutrition, chronic starvation and death. Most of such foodstuffs have been purchased from farmers who were initially supported by the agency after disasters occurred in Africa.

In the year 2008, WFP implemented the Purchase for Progress (P4P) initiative. It was implemented in more than 20 countries including Asia, Central America and African states. The WFP in collaboration with other partners support farmers with technical knowledge, credit and access to inputs. When agricultural products are ready, the WFP always purchase them from farmers.

Such foodstuffs are stored and distributed to other emergency cases that emerge across the globe. For instance, more than 312, 120 bags of foodstuffs prized at $121 million were bought from the planters’ groups, SME dealers, and advertising podiums (World Food Program 2).

The IFAD has made significant steps in upholding sexual parity in the developing countries. It recognizes the responsibility of females in producing foodstuffs, ensuring domestic foodstuffs safety and managing intrinsic assets.

In this regard, it reflects on the fact that women have limited access to resources that are necessary for food production. The most significant step by IFAD was achieved when the agency published and approved a document in 1992 aimed at empowering rural women and spearheading economics for advancement.

According to IFAD report, from the fiscal 1990s, the International Fund for Agricultural Development planned and executed various detached female ventures and development ingredients or actions intended for the deprived females. In the past years, the International Fund for Agricultural Development provided its local segments with approved donation funding and local sexual category programs.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Humanitarian non-organization WFP vs. IFAD specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More They were aimed at molding competence, scientific sustenance and studying sex associated guidelines and promotion. Various areas constructed particular local sexual category plans, employment areas and state subsidy-financed programs meant to empower females and streamline masculinity (IFAD 2013, 3).

The IFAD has been successful in empowering women in Uganda and Tanzania. These countries have made tremendous steps in decentralizing their activities to allocate most governmental positions to women.

Based on this recognition, the IFAD joined hands with such governments to assist rustic women to advance economically through agriculture. The collaboration has seen governments lay infrastructures via which IFAD can easily access or accessed by women who need financial support for agricultural purposes.

What is common and what is different between these agencies The agencies were founded under the United Nations conventions in different years. While the WFP is mandated to distribute relief food during emergencies, the IFAD is responsible for funding agricultural activities in third world countries (Kliest and Singh 68). The goal was to facilitate the supply of food to poor families in order to alleviate chronic hunger.

The WFP has been very successful in the distribution of food during emergencies and reestablished the livelihoods of victims of these tragedies. However, it has failed in its effort to promote gender equality. However, it has made significant steps in improving the lives of women and girls.

The agency has promoted the recognition of women not only as vulnerable groups, but also as essential contributors to the domestic and national food security.

The main difference between these two agencies is the approach used towards the eradication of poverty among those who are affected. Nevertheless, the WFP is not selective with respect to global location where it offers assistance provided an emergency has occurred.

The consequent beneficiaries of the programs are not selected on gender basis. Conversely, IFAD concentrates on third world countries and further narrows it operations down to women. Thus, women benefit more from IFAD support compared to men (IFAD 23).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Humanitarian non-organization WFP vs. IFAD by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Negative ways The IFAD supervisory panel has been riddled with political gimmicks. The trend was set under the first president of the agency named Al-Sudeary. This was seen when he was administering funds for political gains. Apparently, he turned down the effort by 17 developing countries to create project classification and groundwork missions.

The requests were not expeditiously handled while the meeting that was supposed to follow was postponed indefinitely. The debate regarding the operation of the agency has been neglected by most Western countries.

The silence has been interpreted as a move to ensure the failure of the fund. In fact, the move by the United States to be omitted from the list of funders of the agency has been suspicious. In the context of IFAD, there are powerful principles backdrops. It has been claimed by some quarters that the establishment of the agency was aimed at preserving the capitalist structure in the developing countries (Tabolt 275).

In the context of the developing countries, the development agenda and those who are behind its implementation are aggravated by the desire to compel the developing countries to embrace the new structures of domination approved by the sponsors.

In view of the conditions that the Executive Board attaches to the funding of agricultural development in the developing countries, the growth models support the wealthy at the expense of those who are deprived. The requirement by the agency for the beneficiaries to pay interest on concessional funds is sarcastic. The fund was initially intended to benefit poor countries so that they may develop agricultural products.

The allocation of the vast resources collected from sponsors and other financial organizations is subjected to influence of Western countries. The resources are not allocated founded on the need by the recipient country. Warah observe that resources are allocated imperially with the aim of influencing the recipient to comply with certain conditions that aggravate the existing poor conditions 8.

WFP faces the challenge of environmental sustainability. The agency has resources but does not invest time and financial resources in environmental interventions in areas where it operates. The failure is a challenge for the people that the agency seeks to restore their livelihoods since they continue to exist in challenging environments. Besides, the WFP initiatives fail to engage with poor country governments.

In fact, the governments despite being poor have the potential to offer logistical support for effective operation of the agency (Warah 35). The agency has been complimented for effective response to emergencies in terms of food distribution. However, planning for transition between relief and recovery is not effective.

The agency continues to distribute food over long periods despite the fact that the victims are ready to start livelihood recovery. Finally, the agency holds consultative meetings for months or years before logistical support is supplied to the victims to start their operations again.

Conclusion From the study, it becomes apparent that both agencies have had impacts on third world countries and tragedy victims. However, still many things must be done in order to realize the complete and deliverable capacities of these agencies.

Works Cited IFAD. “IFAD’s Efforts and Achievements in Gender Equality and Women’s Empowerment.” Approach Paper, 5.3(2010): 1-33. Print.

Kliest, Ted and Goberdhan Singh. “Review of the World Food Programme’s Humanitarian and Development Effectiveness.” Global Support Report, 4.1(2012): 1-78. Print.

Tabolt, Ross. “The International Fund for Agricultural Development.” Political Science Quarterly, 95.2(1980): 261-276. Print.

Warah, Rasna. The Development Myth. Milton Keynes, UK: AuthorHouse, 2008. Print.

World Food Program. Purchase for Progress: Achievements. London, UK: Sage Publishers, 2013: 1-2. Print.


The Challenges that Being Black Creates for Douglass and Obama Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Challenges during Obama and Douglas’ early years of life

Challenges during Obama and Douglas’ education life

Challenges in Parenting and identity

Challenges in adulthood and career development


Works Cited

Introduction Life is very interesting because it has many spheres. Wherever people come from, or the challenges they have faced to reach their current position is of less significance. On literally looking at Barack Obama, the president of the United States, one would think his childhood life was on a silver platter. The same applies to the famous author, Frederick Douglas, who was a famous human activist during his time (Weidt 63).

Barack Obama and Frederick Douglas have one thing in common; they are both black people who encountered many challenges in their struggles to live with the whites. The two individuals passed through many difficulties in their childhood and career life. Times had changed in the twentieth century, and one could think that racism was a thing of the eighteenth century.

However, that is not the case since a lot of racism was evident in the twentieth century, and Barack Obama was one of the victims. Many authors have written books, poems, and other literary works in their attempt to portray racism in different ways. However, narratives based on personal experience are so insinuating because they depict a real life experience.

To express his personal struggles, Barack Obama wrote his book, Dreams from my father, while Frederick Douglas wrote the book entitled, Narrative of the life of Frederick Douglas, an American Slave. From the narrations in the two books, this paper gives a critical analysis that compares the challenges that being black created for Douglas and Obama.

Challenges during Obama and Douglas’ early years of life On his birth in 1818, Frederick Douglas was known as Frederick Augustus Washington Bailey. Frederick was born and raised as a slave, and thus, he worked as a slave in Maryland for a long time during his childhood. Slave children had no right to access education, and although Frederick desired to read and write, he never had that opportunity during slavery.

Frederick suffered from beatings and physical torture during his childhood (Douglas 942). After a series of sufferings, Frederick finally managed to escape from slavery, and headed to New York before eventually settling in New Bedford, Massachusetts.

Barack Obama was born to Ann Dunham of Kansas, and Barack Obama Sr., a PhD student from Kenya, in Honolulu, Hawaii. Obama was luckier than Frederick was because slavery had reduced during his birth.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More He never suffered from beatings, physical torture and other cruel practices as Frederick did in his childhood slavery. However, in his daily life Obama experienced considerable instances of racism. Obama lived in the neighbourhoods of the whites and white’s children could repeatedly bully him.

Challenges during Obama and Douglas’ education life During his childhood, Frederick Douglas remained enslaved in the farms while the white children were in good schools. The white farmers took advantage of the powerless blacks, and made it difficult for their children to access education.

Douglass and other black children had to work on the farms and this made them very ignorant. The children of the whites went to the best schools to gain knowledge, which would establish and improve their future careers. Frederick only received self-education whenever he encountered some educated and freed blacks. He only lived with the hope that someday he would get a chance to learn how to read and write.

Obama did not receive such challenges because education was a primary right during his time of birth. Slavery had long been abolished, but Obama faced a lot of racism for being black in his education life. During his childhood, Obama could not secure a change to study in the best schools. The best schools were meant for the whites and the elite individuals.

The blacks and the poor people in the society had access to medium- standard schools. In such schools, education was not up to standard as compared to the elite schools attended by the children of the whites the wealthy individuals (Atwater 124). Obama experienced bullying in schools from the whites. In his college studies, Obama struggled a lot to fit in the America society (Atwater 126).

There was a clear indication of racism when Obama tried to establish his political career to become the first African-American president of the Harvard Law Review while studying his law career in Harvard Law School.

Challenges in Parenting and identity Challenges in parenting and the search for personal identity emerged as some of the greatest challenges that being black created for Frederick and Obama. Douglass did not know his father, but he only heard rumours that a white master fathered him. According to Frederick, slave children hardly knew their origins, dates of birth or relatives.

We will write a custom Essay on The Challenges that Being Black Creates for Douglass and Obama specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This is because the white masters separated the black children from their relatives early in life. For instance, Frederick was separated from his mother to avoid disclosure of his biological father. Probably, Frederick’s mother was a victim of rape, and that is why the white master never wanted any revelation.

Frederick indicates that the slave’s children were separated from their mothers at twelve months of age, where their mothers were hired to work as slaves in farms far away. An aged grandmother would then take over the care of the toddlers. With the motherly love, Frederick’s mother would travel for miles to have a closer look at her child and soothe him at night.

The hard work during the day, the miles at night, pains and suffering of Frederick’s mother would not spare her life, and she died while Frederick was seven years of age. Frederick underwent psychological torture because he was not allowed to be with his mother during her times of sickness, death or burial. That was a remarkably tough moment that Fredrick faced for being black.

On the other hand, Obama’s father was a black person who had to return to his home after they divorced with Obama’s mother. Obama experienced psychological torture trying to know his father who had returned to his native land, Kenya. Obama’s mother had little knowledge of his father’s origins and relatives, yet the boy wanted to know his real identity.

His struggles continued until Obama gave up on the search for his father. On one cruel morning, during the cold month of November, Obama received a call from his aunt Jane in Nairobi, Kenya, informing him of his father’s death in a car accident. Just like Frederick, Obama suffered psychological torture because all he could remember were stories of his mother telling him that his father was a terrific driver.

Challenges in adulthood and career development A sound education foundation is of paramount importance in every person. For Frederick, lack of proper education in childhood, the quest for self-education and the need to escape from slavery were challenges that messed up his adulthood (Miller 54). Frederick had to meet strict terms and conditions before leaving the farm, and this delayed his chance to obtain education.

Even after leaving the farm, Fredrick had to live like a fugitive slave. He bought his freedom by making endearing friendships, touring Europe and risking his life as an organizer of anti-slavery movements (Miller 73). Frederick had to undergo significant struggles to become a competent writer and orator. He had to struggle tirelessly to become an African-American social reformist and diplomat.

Racism is what prolonged his struggle to become a popular anti-slavery and human rights activist. The fact that Frederick was black prolonged his potentiality to make use of his literary and public speaking skills to mobilise people against doing evil.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Challenges that Being Black Creates for Douglass and Obama by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More For Obama, racism prevailed in his struggle to establish his career as a lawyer, educator, and politician. The fact that he was a black and poor youth almost ruined his early adulthood. The poor black youths used drugs and abused substances because of unemployment frustrations, lack of education, and hopelessness (Obama 93). Obama was among them, and he could drink himself stupidly.

After recollecting his life, Obama entered the field of politics, where racism clearly portrayed in his campaigns for election as the first Africa-American president of Harvard law review.

Conclusion From this analysis, it is evident that racism is the central theme in the two books. In their youth and adult lives, Obama and Frederick provide adequate evidence of the challenges that their skin colour created. They describe how racism ruined their life, whereby, Obama was almost carried away by alcohol and drugs.

From the two narratives, it is evident that both authors were able to overcome racism and its challenges to become great people. Although Fredrick died in 1895, his history of a life well lived will prevail in the American history. Barack Obama is the president of the United States, and he is a clear indication that the struggles in life are not significant; what matters is the final destination.

Works Cited Atwater, Deborah F. “Senator Barack Obama: The Rhetoric of Hope and the American Dream.” Journal of Black Studies 38.2 (2007): 121-29. Print.

Douglass, Frederick. Narrative of the Life of Frederick Douglass, an American Slave, New York: Crown Publishing Inc, 1990. Print.

Miller, James A. Frederick Douglass 1818-1895: The Heath Anthology of American Literature, Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1998. Print.

Obama, Barack. Dreams from My Father, New York: Random House, 2004. Print.

Weidt, Maryann N. Voice of Freedom: A Story about Frederick Douglass, Minneapolis: Lerner Publications, 2001. Print.


Literature Review online essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Understanding Temporary Organisations and Project Stakeholders

Literature Review and Critique


Reference List

Introduction The investigation of factors that lead to better project performance and success is increasingly gaining currency among scholars and practitioners, especially after the realization that project management provides organisations with the means to be efficient, effective, and competitive in a changing, complex, and unpredictable environment (Ika 2009; Tabish


What Themes of ICT should be taught in Secondary School Coursework scholarship essay help

Abstract This paper explores the ICT themes that should be taught in Secondary School.

Through the case study review and primary data collection, the results indicate that research and e-awareness theme is the most preferred since learners are equipped with practical skills which can be applied in their daily lives.

In the conclusive part, the paper recommends integration of the ICT tools in the research and e-awareness theme for the relatively simple learning stage.

Introduction Research background

Teaching ICT in high schools has become mandatory as the world is turning into a global village. At present, technology has found its place in every aspect of a human life. At the high school level, teaching ICT has evolved from a simple to complex approach in order to guarantee relevancy.

Several ICT themes have been proposed in high school education execution. Specifically, the suggestions have revolved around the research and e-awareness theme, e-application theme, and creativity theme (Baines


Piaget’s Quote in Relation to Adult Learning Analytical Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Theory on Adult Learning

The need for Learning Objectives

Teaching Through Inquiry Versus Teaching Through Modeling

The Behavioral Theory and Adult Learning



Introduction This paper analyzes Piaget’s Theory of Learning in the context that the main purpose of learning is to produce persons with the ability to invent and not simply re-create what others have done. The paper also discusses the need for learning objectives and the controversy surrounding the same.

Finally, it explores the usefulness of teaching through inquiry and teaching through modeling in the learning environment.

Theory on Adult Learning There are various concepts and/or theories which can be used to contextualize Piaget’s argument in relation to adult learning. The ones discussed in this paper include the Holistic Model, the Elemental Model, and Thorndike’s Theory.

The Holistic Model advocates for learning that is transformative, meaningful and that has an orientation of helping the community. People are able to see things differently after going through education.

They see things in terms of how they affect society. Hence, education enlightens them on how to deal with emerging issues in the society (Knowles, Holton


Model of the social contract Analytical Essay essay help

Table of Contents Socrates and the Third Argument on Social Contract

The First Cause

A Sound Argument for the Existence of God: Argument to Design

Cartesian Dualism

Emergent Materialism

Socrates and the Third Argument on Social Contract In the argument on social contract, Plato presents a model of the social contract that ties the citizen to the law. However, we ought to take care when comparing the Socratic social contract concept with the modern concept of the social contract as perceived by Hobbes and Rousseau. In Rousseau’s concept, the state is an absolute outcome of the common will of the citizens.

As such, the social contract is an arrangement among citizens to exist collectively under set laws. Plato, on the other hand, believes that the contract is between a specific native of the state and the law. Plato views the law as an actual entity while Rousseau sees it as an abstract construction designed for the people by the people.

Plato’s representation of the state (law) as an entity is creativity that generates an imagination of the meaning that Socrates conveys. The representation is meant to elicit a favorable mood for ethical contemplation. In this contract, the citizen pledges to submit to the law and to stand by the determinations of its courts. This is intended to maintain order and peace in the state.

However, in portraying the law as directives that have to be observed, Plato shows the law as authoritarian. Plato’s theory, which equates the law to parents in a status of great authority, depicts them as dictators. Though the law can be coaxed into change, the citizens are meant to obey the law at all times.

Socrates’ social contract argument implies that if one enjoys the advantages of citizenship, then he vows to obey the law of the state. A problem arises when a noncitizen breaks the law. Applying the principles of Plato’s theory becomes complicated as the person is not bound by the contract.

The First Cause Developed by Saint Thomas Aquinas, the first cause argument is based on the principle of sufficient reason, which we use each day in science and normal thinking processes. When we encounter something new we naturally try to establish its cause.

If it appears that there is no physical cause, we often consider a psychological cause and ultimately resort to a supernatural explanation. Eventually, we discover that the world is made up of a chain of causes with one cause linked to the next.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Human existence, for example, can be traced back to billions of causes all the way from the big bang theory to the progression of the protein molecule. The main concern here is the cause of the universe in its entirety and not the causes of its components.

There is a cause that precedes all the causes. To deny such a cause means a retreat down the chain of causes including the denial of the doubter’s own existence. If we stick to the chain of causes and concede that indeed an uncaused cause exists, then there is a perpetual and necessary being who is the supreme cause. According to Aquinas, that uncaused necessary being can only be God.

Some philosophers refute this argument on the basis of contradiction. They argue that the first premise implies causality in everything that exists, but the conclusion infers that there is something uncaused (God). To avoid such contradiction, the first premise can be changed to say that everything in motion has a cause or everything contingent has a cause. God is neither in motion nor contingent.

A Sound Argument for the Existence of God: Argument to Design This is a teleological argument for the existence of God. According to this argument, the design (order) that exists in the world is proof for the presence of a gifted designer. This designer is in most cases identified as God. One of the classic proponents of this school is William Paley.

Paley likens the intricacy of living things to the subordinate intricacy possessed by a watch, which we know is designed by a gifted being. According to Paley, living things cannot be without a maker in the same way a watch cannot exist minus a watchmaker.

The argument from design asserts that the universe is specially designed for human occupancy. It also states that there are various ways in which the universe could have existed such as having altered laws of physics from the ones we know.

The universe could have possessed a different planetary arrangement or even began with a bigger or smaller ‘big bang’ than it did. It could have occurred in a way that could not support life. The fact that the universe exists the way it does enables its inhabitation. The precision in design of the universe is a sign of a master planner at work.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on Model of the social contract specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The design argument is of extensive and persistent appeal. Theists appreciate that order and beauty are works of deliberate and intelligent design.

Arguments supporting design are made to defend this notion and convince the atheists that it is the most reasonable argument for the existence of a supreme being. Though these arguments exist in various forms, their underlying principle is that the order we see is deliberately caused by an intelligent designer.

Cartesian Dualism Dualism is the perspective on the body-mind problem, which proposes that the mental and the physical are real and distinct. In her correspondence to Descartes, Elisabeth of Bohemia sought clarification on how the material extended nature of the body could interact with the immaterial and (un-extended) mind.

Descartes proposed a mechanistic interpretation of the material. He argued that though the body and mind are distinct, they still interact. Elisabeth wanted to know the exact nature of the interaction between the extended body and the un-extended mind.

Since the immaterial mind is not extended, it cannot have direct interaction with the body. Descartes asserts that the place where this interaction takes place is the pineal gland (‘the seat of the soul’) in the human brain. In his view, this is the only component of the body that is not a duplicate.

Descartes postulates that the brain collects neural signals from different body regions, which it sends to the mind. For instance, a signal of pain felt in the stomach is sent to the brain.

It is imperative to note that (in the Cartesian view) the brain and the mind are not synonymous. Part of the duty of the brain (specifically the pineal gland) is to link the body to the mind. However, due to its physical extended nature the brain is not the mind. Unlike the body that is physical and reducible, the mind cannot be reduced.

The Cartesian view remains the most appropriate response to the dualistic nature of the body-mind problem since it makes a deliberate attempt to link the body and mind. Though Descartes recognizes the independent nature of the body and the mind, he still sees the need for their interaction as they both belong to the same individual.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Model of the social contract by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Emergent Materialism In evolutionary theory, emergent materialism is the growth of a system that cannot be projected or justified from antecedent forms. Generally, materialists refute the existence of the mind as a unit superior to physical existence. They maintain that feelings, impressions and ideas are produced by processes in the physical brain. Emergent materialism is a physically inclined theory that proclaims the mind as an irreducible element.

The theory asserts that the study of mental occurrences is not dependent upon other sciences. In agreement with other varieties of non-reductive physicalism, emergent materialism is criticized for attempting to ‘have its cake and eat it.’

According to this view, there is an actual distinction between a conscious (rational) human and a simply physical or purely biological entity. To emergent materialists, a purely biological or physical account of human nature is a blind undertaking.

Despite the fact that human beings are constituted of purely physical and biological components, reflection and deliberate activity make up new forms of composition of these physical constituents. This is done in accordance to a new and definite level of laws. In brief, human beings are not merely physical or biological objects as their mental processes are governed by psychological principles.

An emergent property is dependent upon some fundamental properties of the object, and it can have no independent existence away from the object.

However, the emergent proponents postulate a degree of independence in a way that the new forms are not reducible to their antecedents. This linkage between body and mind makes emergent materialism the most applicable school of physicalism.


Innovation and Its Positive Impact on the Society Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

Innovation is the process through which new ideas, products and methods are introduced. This new ideas and products are believed to have a positive impact on the society. Governments from all over the world have been encouraging their citizens to be innovative, especially the youth.

In order to encourage innovation among young people, governments have come up with curriculums that encourage innovation. We are all encouraged to embrace innovations that will be able to help us change our lives in a positive way.

The statement “I never did anything by accident, nor did any of my inventions come by accident, but by working hard” goes to show that innovations just don’t occur by accident. People work hard and invest a lot of money and time. Innovation is a process that requires a lot of patience and creativity. Innovation is a process that has ups and downs. An innovative person never gives up.

A good example in this case is Thomas Edison who invented the light bulb. Before inventing the light bulb, Thomas went through a hard time. He was forced to work hard and would spend some of his nights working instead of resting.

He failed a lot of times but he never gave up. He kept on working hard and with time he was able to invent the light bulb. It was then that he came up with the now famous quote in which he says that he never failed and that he only discovered 10000 ways through which a light bulb cannot work.

It was through hard work, patience and persistence that he was able to invent the light bulb. By inventing the light bulb he was able to change the lives of many people.

Role of strategic gateways Research has shown that most companies have problems bringing in new products into the market even after spending a lot of money in the development and launching of these products. Research has shown that these products fail while in the market. Some of these products never even make it to the market.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More A stage gate model is a system that that is supposed to help move a new product from an idea to the launch of the product. The Stage gate model divides this process into various activities (stages) and decisions points (gates).

Why and when it is used? The stage gate model is used to manage the risks that are associated with the development of new products. This is because the product development and innovation process faces a number of risks. It is through this model, that these risks can be assessed. The stage gate model also minimises the chance of something going wrong along the way.

How does it work? The system works by managing the risks associated with product development and product innovation. The people in charge of the project will gather information needed to move the project from one stage to another. The information gathered will range from financial information to market information. The expenditures incurred will increase as the project moves from one stage to another.

Key stages of the project are separated to help the management understand the product innovation and development process. The proposed product is carefully scrutinised at each stage and the management is advised on when to abort the project if it fails to meet the set objectives.


Hiring an Effective Staffing Manager Evaluation Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Abstract This paper examines the attributes needed to hire an effective staffing manager, compares human resource planning for a large international bank and for a local police department as well as evaluates the processes behind recruitment effectiveness.

Through globalization and the process of outsourcing and offshoring, employee teams are no longer isolated to merely being within the same building, state or country, rather they are now scattered across a wide breadth of countries, regions and business cultures which staffing managers need to take into consideration.

It is based on this that this paper will tackle the various characteristics needed in hiring an effective staffing manager, the inherent differences between a local and international organization and how to measure recruitment effectiveness.

Hiring a Staffing Manager When it comes to hiring a staffing manager for an organization, the following are the key skills and attributes I would focus on when deciding on a proper candidate:

Capacity to understand the requirements of a job

The most important capacity for any staffing manager is the ability to understand the needs of a job versus the type of employee candidates that would apply for it. A job’s requirements are not limited to the skills needed in order to perform it well; rather, they extend to the capacity of an employee to be able to understand the various nuances and key details needed to be able to do a job well.

Such an attribute is often gained through experience and, as such, it is necessary for a staffing manager to be able to determine how an employee’s experience correlates into being able to meet the requirements of the job that is available successfully.

Being able to create an effective hiring strategy

Another of the requirements needed by a staffing manager for an organization is the capacity to develop an effective hiring strategy. What must be understood is that most large enterprises have a relatively high churn rate as compared to smaller organizations due to the sheer amount of employees that work there. As a result, it is often necessary to replace a percentage of a company’s employees on a yearly basis.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More An effective staffing manager should be able to examine the staffing needs of the company versus its regular employee churn rates and come up with a hiring strategy that ensures that a constant stream of employees are able to replace those that leave while at the same time ensuring that the company does not hire too many workers. This can help to reduce operational losses as a result of having an insufficient workforce.

Other examples of effective hiring strategies that a staffing manager needs to take into consideration are the type of medium they would utilize in order to hire employees. Within the past 15 years the internet has created a means for the HR departments of companies to reach out to a broad selection of employees through websites such as

Taking this into consideration, a staffing manager might consider using traditional means of getting prospective new hires (i.e. through newspaper ads) or use the internet, which is far cheaper. The ability to determine which strategy would be the best and most affordable for the company is one of the qualities needed in a staffing manager.

Hiring Experience within a Particular Industry

In explaining the intricacies in hiring practices, Moeller


RMB in China Essay cheap essay help

Is RMB trading at fair value? One of the subjects that have continued to raise a discussion is if the Chinese Yuan has been trading at its fair value. In 2007, China’s GDP was estimated to be over 10%, which was considered as its peak. The current-account surplus during the same year provided a strong indication that RMB was undervalued. However, this proof is less convincing now.

At the moment, the RMB is more than 30 % resilient in actual trade-weighted terms as compared to the year 2005. This has happened after its peg to the U.S dollar was scrapped. Fairly, China’s current-account surplus declined to 2.8% of GDP in the year 2011 (Taillard 67).

The most standard approach in estimating the actual worth of a state’s currency is to evaluate the exchange rate required to bring its current-account inequity to a “standard” level. According to economic analysts, a current-account surplus or shortfall of not more than 3% of the GDP is tolerable.

According to International Monetary Fund, China’s current account surplus was expected to decline to just 2.3% of GDP the last year, and progressively increase to slightly more than 4% of GDP by the year 2017. This was in contradiction to the earlier estimations which were 6.3% and 8% respectively.

The IMF’s novel predictions indicate that, on average, China’s current account surplus should be 3.2 per cent in the next 7 years. If this estimation is accurate, then it is wrong to claim that RMB is considerably undervalued (Feenstra and Wei 268).

Impact that RMB’s appreciation or depreciation would have on U.S. MNCs The RMB’s appreciation or depreciation will affect the cost of imports and exports across China. When the exchange rate of RMB depreciates, the cost of Chinese exports would be comparatively low. Conversely, the products exported to China from the U.S would be relatively costly.

Consequently, the cost of U.S multinational corporations’ exports and manufacturing of their merchandises that compete with China’s importations would decrease. Even though most of the affected corporations would be in the manufacturing sector, service companies would not be spared either. The overall impact of this would be an increment in the trade deficit.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It would also cut on the increased demand for such commodities and services. All these impacts would be experienced in the short run. If the exchange rate policy caused the RMB value to depreciate, then it would be so under the influence of demand and supply.

Some U.S MNCs also import raw materials and capital equipment from China. If the value of RMB depreciates, the cost of these products would be low. This increases their output making such MNCs’ products more competitive globally (Minikin and Lau, 104).

Works Cited Feenstra, Robert C, and Shang-Jin Wei.China’s Growing Role in World Trade. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2010. Print

Minikin, Robert, and Kelvin Lau.The Offshore Renminbi: The Rise of the Chinese Currency and Its Global Future. New York: Wiley, 2013. Print

Taillard, Michael. Economics and Modern Warfare: The Invisible Fist of the Market. New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2012. Print


Ontological and Wager Argument Essay college essay help online: college essay help online

There are many theories that try to prove the existence of God. Ontological argument stipulates that God exists because atheists contradict themselves in how they perceive the existence of God. Therefore, according to the argument, the existence of these contradictions gives a confirmation that God exists.

Although many philosophers support the ontological argument, some philosophers have made serious criticisms on the existence of God. According to Anselm, since God is a supreme being who is believed to be above all creatures, it implies that any argument that concerns his existence requires a careful scrutiny from both atheists and non-atheists (Rauhut 176).

While Anselm and Wager are major proponents of the ontological argument, Hume and Kant are some of the opponents of the ontological argument. Therefore, this essay analyzes the objections of Hume and Kant and assesses their differences with the objections presented by Pascal’s argument.

According to Hume, there is a clear impression of the existence of animals such as dogs and cats as one can derive the concepts from practical impressions. He argues that, since there are no clear impressions on the existence of God, his existence can only be in our minds.

Thus, Hume objects the ontological argument by saying that God only exists in our minds as blurry idea, which depicts God as the greatest being. In his assertion, David Hume concludes that “any existence claim seem to require matters of fact and can never be a mere analytic judgments” (Rauhut 179). Hence, it is not plausible for one to use analytic judgments in proving the existence of God.

Comparatively, critics of Wager cite beliefs as the major shortcoming of the ontological argument. They argue that one cannot use beliefs to prove the existence of God. Moreover, in their argument they state that beliefs are not usually under the voluntary control of an individual, and thus lead to the complexity of many gods worshipped by many religions.

Another philosopher, Kant notes that real existence is greater and more convincing than imaginative existence. Kant argues that if something exists in reality, it cannot be greater than the object that exists in understanding (Rauhut 180). Hence, he believes that for one to prove the existence of an object, it should be real.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Thus, Kant objects the ontological argument because the argument is based on imaginative existence of God, which does not provide the reality concerning his existence. In comparison, critics of Wager’s arguments highlight that Wager uses beliefs and faith to prove that God exists. The critics claim that the use of belief is confusing because people are unable to control their beliefs, which consequently subjects them to many gods.

Ontological argument is a controversial argument that supports the existence of God. The argument states that, since scholars and philosophers who oppose the concept regarding the existence of God contradict themselves, they prove that God exists. According to Hume and Kant, something must be real and visible for it to exist. For instance, Hume and Kant use visible and tangible objects in their arguments.

Furthermore, Hume and Kant argue that the ontological argument is not practical because it only presents God as a supreme being who is invisible and only exist in one’s mind. Moreover, critics of Wager’s argument noted that ontological argument has its basis on beliefs. According to the critics, beliefs are not under one’s control, and thus cannot be used to prove that God really exists.

Works Cited Rauhut, Nils. Ultimate Questions: Thinking about Philosophy. New York: Prentice Hall, 2010. Print.


Sustainability Metrics: Thring and Bellagio Principles Report (Assessment) essay help site:edu

Sustainability has been a topic of heated debate for decades. People, officials, policy makers, educators all strive for sustainable future, though there are a few people who can really follow sustainable principles.

Notably, there are numerous sustainability principles and approaches which have been developed by different people. Though, none of the approaches has been chosen as the one to follow.

It is necessary to note that there are several sustainability metrics which can help chose the most appropriate approach. This, in its turn, can help people adopt the most efficient sustainability approach.

It is possible to illustrate evaluation of sustainability metrics by comparing and contrasting two widespread approaches. The Thring sufficiency concept and the Bellagio principles for sustainable development will be compared.

In the first place, it is necessary to note that the two approaches have a lot in common. For instance, the Thring sufficiency concept provides a particular scale of sustainable consumption (Tester et al., 2012).

Hence, sustainable consumption presupposes sufficient amount of product (food, energy, services, etc.) that ensures high quality of life without unnecessary excess which often leads to numerous issues.

Likewise, the Bellagio principles of sustainable development presuppose evaluation of possible negative as well as positive consequences of people’s activities (Tester et al., 2012).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More These principles are close to the Thring sufficiency concept. More so, it is possible to state that the Bellagio principles can be implemented with the help of the concept developed by Thring.

Furthermore, according to both approaches responsibility should be shared among individuals and governments. Each individual as well as the government should follow the principles of sustainability, which is the key to success.

Apart from similarities, the two approaches also differ in many ways. One of the most significant differences is that the Bellagio principles are more comprehensive and detailed.

Thus, these principles can be seen as a plan to follow to achieve sustainability in all aspects of people’s lives (Tester et al., 2012). In contrast to the Bellagio principles, the Thring concept can be regarded as a specific way to identify sustainable practices in this or that sphere.

There is no description of possible ways to achieve sustainability in the sphere. To illustrate possible use of both approaches and their difference, it is possible to consider such issue as urban transportation.

According to the Thring concept, it is clear that urban transportation should suffice for all inhabitants of the area to access urban facilities.

When there is insufficient transportation, public transport will be overcrowded and lots of people will be unable to access certain destinations which can negatively affect the development of the area as qualified employees will be unable to access their working places.

We will write a custom Assessment on Sustainability Metrics: Thring and Bellagio Principles specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More On the other hand, too much transportation leads to increase in emissions and the necessity to build roads which is associated with additional (considerable) energy consumption. Thus, a possible solution is to provide sufficient public transportation which will make private vehicles unnecessary.

People will be able to use public transport to get to their working places. Admittedly, this is possible when the government as well as every individual can accept the sustainable approach. This solution can be applied if people focus on the good for all rather than on personal benefits.

When it comes to the Bellagio principles, the issues concerning urban transportation can be solved with the help of a comprehensive plan.

First, the city government will set clear goals, e.g. to develop sufficient urban transportation system. Then, the officials will implement holistic approach and make sure that all essential of the problems are included in the discussion.

For example, such aspects as availability of transport, environmental consequences, cost-effectiveness, etc. will be highlighted. The government will also assess the present state of the urban transportation system.

After that, the government will develop specific timelines for each stage of the plan, e.g. timelines for development of efficient routes, production and provision of vehicles, etc. According to the Bellagio principles for sustainable development, it is essential to assess implementation of the plan.

Thus, supervisors will assess the changes. For instance, the supervisors will trace the number of private vehicles, the number of people using public transport, the amount of emissions, the degree of satisfaction, etc. Besides, it is crucial to ensure openness of the assessment.

Therefore, people should be able to access reports on implementation of the plan. These can be online reports which are updated regularly. More so, there should be place for commentaries or different forms of feedback as people should be able to participate in the process as well.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Sustainability Metrics: Thring and Bellagio Principles by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This will contribute to effective communication. It is also necessary to note that communication should be transparent and plan developers as well as conductors should understand goals set, timelines developed and approaches which can be used.

It is also important to make sure that all groups of stakeholders involved can participate in the process of the plan development. Officials, employees, entrepreneurs, unemployed people should all take part in the discussion.

Finally, the government should be totally responsible for the implementation of the plan and encourage individuals to share their vision.

In conclusion, it is possible to note that the two approaches mentioned above are effective when combined. Thus, the Bellagio principles for sustainable development can be the basis and the Thring sufficiency concept can be used at the stage of evaluation and assessment.

Reference List Tester, J.W., Drake, E.M., Driscoll, M.J., Golay, M.W.,


Job Analysis Importance Analytical Essay essay help

Job analysis refers to the process of gathering all the relevant information pertaining a given job specification. It involves evaluation of data on the overall job content and the required personal attributes necessary for the successful execution of such duties.

Three Elements of Job Analysis Job analysis comprises of three major elements; sources of data, data collection and data analysis. The initial stage of job analysis demands that the recruiting or hiring personnel identifies sources of data relevant to the job at stake.

These sources may include; the current manager of the proposed position for which hiring is being done, workforce plans and even staff members who had previously held the same position.

External data sources include managers who employ similar positions as well as staff members from other organizations with similar positions like the one in question (Hartley, 2001).

Data collection involves the actual process of gathering information related to the position. During this process, information that provides solutions to issues such as the objectives of the job, the physical location of the job and the current trends in the job market are considered.

Sometimes, the hierarchical position of the job must also be given much weight.

The final element of job analysis is the evaluation of the information collected where the gathered information is grouped into functional areas. Irrelevant and wasteful information is also discarded during this phase.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The functional area tasks are then simplified to eliminate unnecessary complexity and arranged in order of importance.

Significance to the Hiring and Employee Development Aspects of HRM Job analysis is an important aspect in hiring and employee development. For instance, the information obtained during job analysis may be subsequently used in clearly defining the responsibilities of a given job position.

The information is also considered during the recruitment and selection of new employees as well as training of newly recruited members depending on their performance standards.

Lastly, information gathered during job analysis is crucial in developing salary and remuneration programs for the employees. It may also be used in job redesign to enhance efficiency in production (Hartley, 2001).

Importance of PAQ Position analysis and questionnaire is a widely used information collection technique in employee selection and recruitment. Specific objective oriented questionnaires are designed and administered to prospective incumbent employees prior to an oral interview.

Position analysis and questionnaire is particularly important because it saves time as it limits the extent and range of response from the respondent. Some people are naturally talkative and might consequently be tempted to do the same during oral interviews.

Thus, this method limits them to specific relevant responses hence cutting down on the overall time spent as well as tendencies to give too much information which is irrelevant (Ulrich, 2006).

We will write a custom Essay on Job Analysis Importance specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More PAQ is also important as it helps the employer to ascertain the personal attributes and performance trends of the prospective employee.

This happens where the employer needs some performance experience and thus goes ahead to design a questionnaire that will help solicit for information from previous appointments.

The employer may also make the incumbent employee reveal reasons for resignation from previous appointments. Thus, the employer is able to evaluate whether the same person was dropped from the position or is moving out on other beneficial grounds.

Another importance of this technique is that it helps in benchmarking of an organization’s overall performance.

In the design of the questionnaires, most employers tend to gather information on how business is carried out in other organizations of the same type; more so from their competitors.

This helps the recruiting organization to gauge its current performance in comparison to its competitors and make necessary adjustments in order to compete favourably.

Challenges of Designing Job Efficiency for Customer Service Customer service job requires strong interpersonal skills and results from position analysis and questionnaire will thus be of great importance in redesigning of such a job to enhance efficiency and overall improvement in performance.

One such way that human resource personnel will use this information is to evaluate the daily work load of each customer care employee.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Job Analysis Importance by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More These cases may include scenarios where the employee has to answer phone calls and physically respond to customers and in most cases exhaustion may lead to boredom.

In the case of customer care attendants, such instances may result in mistreating or acting hostile towards the customers.

The human resource manager may opt to redesign the job in a way that another employee be taken to handle phone calls while the former be retained to deal with physical responses to clients.

This will reduce the workload and exhaustion. Introduction of another employee in the room will also provide company and reduce boredom hence improve output (Ulrich, 2006).

Redesigning Customer Service Job Using PAQ Human resource personnel may also use the information from position and questionnaire to redesign a customer care job in such way that the employees work in daily shifts instead of having a single employee work the whole day.

This can be more efficient compared to scenarios where a single employee works for a given period of time say a week before he or she hand over duties to another. Working half day ensures higher concentration levels and employees are bound to work better.

This information may only be obtained when the questionnaire is designed to allow the respondent to select amongst several job plans which is best suited to him. Most of them will go for a plan that allows them to work half a day.

Fleishman Job Analysis System There are several strategies of employee selection as proposed by the Fleishman Job Analysis System. One such strategy is through outsourcing. Here, the human resource department contracts a hiring firm in order to get the best suited candidate for the required position.

The hiring firm then advertises, recruits candidates and conducts interviews. The firm then selects the most qualified candidates in line with the organization’s requirements and presents them to the organization for staffing and training.

The second strategy of employee selection is through evaluation of knowledge, skills and abilities (KSA). In this strategy, the human resource department evaluates each job and designs the required knowledge, skills and abilities required for a given job.

The department also decides on the best way to assess candidates that possess such skills as enlisted for the job. Afterwards, the human resource department then embarks on processing the applicants on the basis of those assessment tools (Fine


Caesars Organization Case Study scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Information determines whether an organization, such as Caesars, would achieve its business objectives in the highly competitive market. Through effective communication, the organization is likely to establish strong relations with its customers. However, poor circulation of information results to poor service delivery, as it brings about lower inefficiency.

For instance, the top management might draft a vague email for its customers that would need clarification while some written materials might need rewriting due to several errors. This affects the flow of information, meaning that communication skills are needed to facilitate business development.

Poor information circulation leads to low morale among employees, given the fact that they are the most important asset of any organization, as they are charged with the role of service delivery. Additionally, poor information and ineffective communication skills affect innovation in the organization. The highly competitive market demands that an organization strives to achieve innovation, as it would give it an advantage.

Use of Database Technologies The use of database in running a business is important in a number of ways. For instance, it maximizes the transfer of information from one source to the other, implying that it provides a solution to the traditional storage system, which was ineffective and inefficient. The system allows microsecond response, which translates to less memory use for the large workloads.

This is known to diminish database pre-core certification costs. Database storage system permits faster report production and real-time dispensation of information on larger pieces of information, which steps up various applications by up to twenty times the normal speed. This would definitely improve the performance of the organization, as well as the output of the labor force.

Use of Distributed Databases or a Data Warehouse Distributed databases and data warehouse play an important role in collecting and organizing important information that would be utilized in making decisions in the organization. Data experts are charged with the responsibility of retrieving, summarizing, and formatting information to be used in analysis and execution of decisions.

In many organizations, including Caesars, several distributed databases and data warehouse are used d. SQL specifically describes the uses of SQL in any data warehouse while OLAP and data mining explains the online analytical processing, as well as data mining technologies that are employed in any data warehouse.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Effects of Security Breach Setting up security systems is always costly for any organization, but Caesars should ensure that adequate such systems exist to avoid damages associated with security breach. One of the effects of security breach is ruined reputation. Any information posted on the web is expected to stay forever while an email can easily be hacked, which would consequently affect the trust of customers.

Without appropriate security systems, the organization stands to lose its image in the public, which goes a long way to affect profitability. Vandalism is another effect of installing inadequate security systems, as fraudsters would take the opportunity to plant false information about the organization on the web. For these reasons, the organization has to consider setting up appropriate systems that would protect organizational data.

Types of Data Mart Data mart refers to the access layer that is often employed in data warehouse environment whose major role is to disseminate data to other users. Based on this, it is always allied to a particular business line or team of managers since they serve an important role in the organization.

Since data mart contains limited information that is specific to a particular department or section, the marketing department of the organization is expected to own it. Therefore, the department will be in charge of the hardware, software, and data itself. The marketing executive will have the opportunity to manipulate the data to suit the increasing demands of customers.

The three types of data mart are dependent, independent, and hybrid. Dependent data mart permits the unification of data in a single warehouse while independent data mart is mainly designed without the utilization of the central data warehouse. On the other hand, hybrid data mart plays an important role of combining various inputs without data warehouse.

Effects of Failing to Clean Information As already mentioned in the previous section, maintaining high-security standards and precautionary measures helps in keeping off the interests of hackers and fraudsters. Failure to clean information before loading it to the data warehouse might give hackers a chance to extend their heinous acts.

Description of Cluster Analysis, Association Detection, and Statistical Analysis Cluster analysis entails grouping data into various categories for purposes of analysis. It includes a statistical classification method that enables the subdivision of cases, information, and items into groups or clusters. The process allows the grouping of similar items, even though they might not be identical. Caesars should consider grouping or clustering similar information to allow statistical analysis.

We will write a custom Case Study on Caesars Organization specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Association detection entails an extensive process that determines whether any data set is related to a different category. It would help Caesars in linking up related information in the data warehouse. Finally, statistical analysis is the process of compressing data using the established mathematical formulas, such as ANOVA.


The ‘Surprising End’ In Rene Descartes’ Philosophy Critical Essay college admissions essay help

Rene Descartes is one of the most influential philosophers of the last few centuries, especially in relation to the study of origin and existence of mankind. In his work “Discourse on the Method”, Descartes attempts to explain a new method of reasoning, despite living in one of the most difficult periods. In the beginning, Descartes leans towards the controversial theory of the 19th and 20th centuries that “God does not exist” (Descartes, 2008).

However, towards the end of the discourse, Descartes suddenly changes his thoughts and informs his audience that there is at least some ‘supernatural’ power (God) in control of nature. Arguably, this is a surprising end of this discourse, which suddenly diverts the audience’s perception of the matter.

In part 1, Descartes elaborates his thinking on ‘a number of considerations regarding to the sciences’. First, every person has the knowledge and ability to distinguish ‘good from evil’ and fiction from the truth.

Descartes thinks that he has improved status due to his use of ‘the method’ (Cunning, 2009). According to his argument, Descartes seems to argue that the mind of a person can elevate the human mind above those of other people in a society or group.

Accordingly, Descartes thinks that he is a beneficiary of formal education, which has improved his level of thinking. However, he also believes that the book-based education complicates the nature of his brain. It is worth noting that Descartes’ life and way of thinking in the first chapters are influenced by his lifestyle.

His initial thinking that God does not exist is based on his perceptions of social and cultural life in his early years. For instance, he visits various parts of the world after leaving school. From his journeys, he realizes that every person has ‘natural light’, which is affected by education. This form of natural light is important in realising the ‘self’ for every person.

However, in part 2 of his work, Descartes tends to realise a new phenomenon- that the work of every individual is superior to that of any committee because every individual has ‘an open plan’ when taking any task.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More According to him, science, which every person learns when young, must be flawed because it is subject to many ideologies developed by various people in various times (Descartes, 2008). As such, this knowledge, including religion, is not correct. Here, he doubts the existence of God.

A number of changes have occurred between the Renaissance and the modern period. Descartes seems to lean towards these changes as he focuses on his arguments. For instance, the type of education and social life has greatly changed.

By the time he was writing, artistic and literal styles had become more liberalised than before, which gives him the freedom to argue for and against God’s existence. He notes that the changes in lifestyles affect the people’s way of thinking and perception of life and humanity.

From his strong knowledge in geography, history, geometry and sociology, Descartes tends to believe in three philosophies. First, people should never believe in anything unless they have an informed truth of the subject matter. Secondly, he believes that the process of reducing any problem disintegrates the entire matter into small units.

Thirdly, Descartes believes that one should always be orderly in his or her thoughts before proceeding from the simplest to the most difficult matter. Finally, Descartes thinks that it is better to create a long chain of reasoning and leave nothing out of context when solving a given problem of any nature (Cunning, 2009). From his analysis, this method is effective in solving social, cultural, religious and scientific problems.

However, he is not satisfied because he has some fears that it is in his own misconceptions, which interferes with the way of the real and pure reasoning. At this point, the reader realises that the argument is about to change course because the author seems to be diverting from his initial thoughts.

From this point, Descartes moves to the third part of the discourse. In this case, he proposes a provisional moral code for people (especially himself) to be used when one is rethinking his or her views of the world and humanity.

We will write a custom Essay on The ‘Surprising End’ In Rene Descartes’ Philosophy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Descartes argues that one must obey the rules and customs of his society and religion and should not be an extremist. Secondly, he argues that one must be decisive and strict and try to change the self and examine all the professions in the world. One must try to consider himself as best suited in doing something before acting.

Despite this strong concern about the society, Descartes’ final argument in part 4 of his discourse seems to turn him (and his audience) towards a sudden and surprising end- he seems to confess and believe that there is some “God”.

After travelling widely, Descartes writes his fourth part of the discourse (Marion, 2009). From this aspect, a person realises the proof of personal existence. As such, Descartes thinks that when based on reliability rather than pure reasoning, it becomes clear that the human soul has separated from the body.

Thus, Descartes uses his thoughts of ‘nonexistence of God’ to prove that there is God existing beyond human nature and powers. Consequently, this is a surprising end of the discourse because the reader expects Descartes to prove the inexistence of God as he had started. However, it is surprising to note that he uses the argument to prove the existence of God.

References Cunning, D. (2009). Arguments and persuasions in Descartes meditations. London, UK: OUP.

Descartes, R. (2008). Discourse on the method. New York, NY: Cosimo Inc.

Marion, J. (2009). On Descartes’ Metaphysical Prism: The Constitution and the Limits of Onto-theo-logy in Cartesian Thought. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.


Uncertainty reduction theory Essay best college essay help: best college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Interpersonal Communication in Cultural Differences



Introduction Uncertainty reduction theory is based on the tradition that strangers need to minimize the level of doubt in their early relations. The theory is based on the concept that people find it difficult to communicate due to uncertainty of the other person’s reaction. However, this insecurity can be reduced through interpersonal communication where relations created motivate people to engage in conversations.

Researchers link uncertainty reduction to a number of interpersonal communication strategies such as verbal and non-verbal interactions, similarity of a kind, information search, and self-disclosure (Ting-Toomey, 2012). To cut doubt amongst individuals, persons pursue passive, active, as well as interactive schemes (Gamble


Marketing Strategy of Rolex and McDonald Evaluation Essay writing essay help: writing essay help

Table of Contents Introduction


Marketing Leadership Council (MLC)



Introduction Marketing strategy of a company, in practice and theory, is often replete with gaps. Often, marketers have deviated from the theoretical principles to develop their own set of rules that they have dubbed more useful in marketing and selling their product.

This paper is a case study analysis of Rolex. The main objective of the paper is to ascertain the gap in the marketing strategy and principles adopted by Rolex with that of the theoretical marketing framework presented by McDonald and using anatomy of world class marketing.

WCM This analysis is done using the 10 points of world class marketing developed by Malcolm McDonald. The first point shows the market orientation of the company. The first point entails that it is the work of the company. It is the job of the top management to instill among its employees the ideal of customer orientation.

In other words, customer orientation has to be enhanced in order to ensure greater possibility of creating products that would satisfy the customers. In case of Rolex, the company has historically paid a lot of attention to the product that they created. As the company sells luxury products, it makes sure that all the qualities of luxury are presented in the watches crafted by the company.

Further, the customers should be made a vehicle for promotion. This can be attained only by making high quality products. A high quality product that satisfies the customers exceedingly would ensure that he/she promotes it to his/her peers. Rolex has achieved this through its quality and brand name. Thus, the first point of McDonald has been satisfied by Rolex’s marketing strategy.

Rolex is a luxury watchmaker. The company is famous for its unique targeting, segmenting, and positioning of their product. However, with the change in the generations and ushering of the new generation who is more inclined towards new fast moving technology than a timeless timepiece, Rolex faces a challenge as to how they can attract these new emerging customers. In this section, we will first discuss the marketing strategy of Rolex.

Usually companies carry out extensive research and analysis before formulating the four Ps of marketing – price, promotion strategy, place, and product. We undertake a thorough research of the marketing strategy and mix of Rolex.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The target customers for Rolex are both male and female. Targeting both the demographic section is advantageous and helps the company to spread its market.

Rolex’s advertising strategy entails celebrity endorsements. In order to cater to a certain economic class the company meticulously positions itself targeting the rich and the ones who crave for “class” rather than “beauty” . This is evident from the taglines used in previous Rolex advertisements such as “Class is forever” .

The products that are presently marketed by Rolex can be broadly divided into three collections – Oyster collection, new 2013 collection, and Cellini Collection. The oyster collection boasts of “elegance and prestige” and has twenty models in the collection.

The second collection is the new 2013 collection of Rolex is a new collection of chronometers with cutting-age technology instilled in them to attract the new generations and retaining their old classiness. The third collection is the Cellini collection .

The second point as enumerated by McDonald is to understand the sources of competitive advantage for the brand. McDonald has segregated this into three categories – superior position, skills, and resources. Superior position entails niche products with high degree of differentiation and concentration on pricing. The products are positioned in a niche market as luxury brand with high pricing.

The watches sold by Rolex are priced high. The pricing strategy goes with their promotion and positioning strategy. Further, as their products are made with very expensive raw material and they happen to be fitted with the best quality technology. The high price is equivalent to the positioning of the product as a luxury item.

Understanding the environment of the company has a specific implication on the marketing strategy of the company. An analysis of the macro and the microenvironment helps to ascertain the threats and opportunities that are present for the brand in the market.

We will write a custom Essay on Marketing Strategy of Rolex and McDonald specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In case of Rolex, the threat is the aging demographics of the target market of the brand. With aging population, the taste and preference of people are changing considerably, which has inculcated a threat to the organization’s product demand . Thus, the aim of Rolex should be to target younger target market

Luxury brands have swept over to the emerging economies. All marketers of different luxury items from automobiles to wristwatches have started targeting the developing, emerging market of the Asian giants like China and India . According to the predictions of analysts by 2018, Asia Pacific will be biggest market for luxury goods . This presents a unique opportunity for luxury watch brands.

The fourth point that is enumerated is to understand one’s competition. The company should categorically understand who their direct and potential competitors are. Further, they should also be aware of the substitutes, backward and forwards integration competitions, and of the competitor’s strength and weaknesses.

The major potential of Rolex is that it is in the luxury brand market, which is highly driven by brand loyalty and recognition. The direct competitors of Rolex are other brands like Omega, Longines, Cartier, Chanel, Patek Philippe, etc.

Figure 1: Rolex is the market leader in luxury watch market.

Further, Rolex faces the threat of fake products in the market. This provides a stiff competition in price-sensitive Asian markets.

The fifth is to understand the market segment. The market segment that the company has placed its product in is the luxury market, and the prices are high as they are placed in the luxury market. Rolex watches are branded as a symbol of superiority.

For instance, older advertisement campaigns of the company had tag lines like “If you were looking for lost empires here tomorrow you’d wear a Rolex” . The positioning of the products is that of excellence and symbol of success. The promotional strategy of Rolex can be categorized into following classes –

Not sure if you can write a paper on Marketing Strategy of Rolex and McDonald by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Advertisements in televisions

Print advertisements in magazines and newspapers.

Sponsors of gaming events like Wimbledon

Embedded advertisements in movies like those of James Bond

In television, the advertisements are usually placed in the lifestyle or sports channels showing major sporting events like tennis and golf. Usually Rolex advertisements accompany airing of James Bond movies. Rolex spends most in newspaper and magazine advertisements.

Promotions help companies to familiarize their products to the customers. However, what is promotion to a luxury brand like Rolex? The promotional strategy of Rolex is to sell the idea of the class that Rolex attaches to itself. Rolex is not promoted as just a brand, but as a way of life, as class, as society.

For instance, the Oyster models of Rolex was first introduced in 1926 as the first waterproof watches and since then has clad the wrists of many famous personalities but as timeless is the brand the essence of the clean, utilitarian design of Rolex has not lost its edge .

The tables below show advertisement expenditures of Rolex and its competitors in magazines and newspapers.

Figure 2: Advertisement Expenditure.

The sixth point is ascertaining the strength and weakness of the brand. In this case, Rolex’s strength is its product’s unique style and positioning. The weakness of the brand is its present appeal to the older target customers, and inability to target newer generations.

The seventh point is to understand the dynamic market for the product, i.e. to conduct a life cycle analysis. Life cycle analysis helps in ascertaining the position in the life cycle where the product lies.

The eighth point suggested by McDonald is to have a strong portfolio of products. The products that are offered by Rolex are unique and timeless. Their appeal is great as each are made differently and crafted in different styles.

The ninth point shows that a company should formulate a strategic marketing policy and stick to it. In case of Rolex, the company has adhered to its niche marketing strategy since the beginning and therefore its charm and demand has not faltered.

The last point presented appeals to the companies to maintain a professional attitude in promoting and marketing its products. It is important for the company to understand all the above marketing tools and continually evaluate its products using these tools in order to make predictions of any impending changes in future.

Marketing Leadership Council (MLC) Marketing leadership council is the new-age marketing tool that helps marketing leaders to change the way they have so far addressed the long-standing conventional wisdom. MLC is usually associated with the corporate executive board. The main areas that the MLC program looks into are – research, peer benchmarking, networking, online learning, best practices, support system, and diagnostic tools.

The main aim of the council is to help its members to benchmark their performance, risk factors, operational process, human resources, and transition of leadership. The MLC has provided certain aspects of business through their researches, which helps companies to benchmark their performance. This model enumerates the need to enhance presence in social media.

They believe more customers can be influenced through promotions in the social media. In case of Rolex, the presence of the company remains scant in any of the social networking websites. Very few online campaigns have been launched by Rolex so far.

One reason may be that the target customers are not same as the social network users. However, one must note that in order to target newer generations, Rolex must embrace innovative methods of marketing that other companies have already started to embrace.

The idea of MLC is not to teach the customers but to un-teach them. MLC dictates that marketers should strive to un-teach what customers already know about the product or brand. However, in case of Rolex, this rule may not apply, as the basis of Rolex’s success is what the customers already know about the brand.

Un-teaching that would deplete their existing brand name. the idea of the company was to make sure that the perception of the customers is properly molded through previous advertisements, which, unfortunately, the MLC model suggests to change. Therefore, this differs from the WCM point, which states that the brand should utilize its core competencies.

In this respect, the question that arises is, if the niche promotional strategy adopted by Rolex following the WCM model is apt for the company today. The question that arises is why does Rolex follow a niche promotional strategy?

The answer to the question is simple – Rolex’s product and positioning does not support and/or demand a mass-marketing strategy. Niche promotional strategy is apt for a brand like Rolex that sells only luxury items and that too, to a niche target market.

Conclusion The overall analyses of the two models demonstrate that Rolex has been following the WCM model more closely than the MLC model. The WCM model is more theory oriented while MLC is more application oriented. The company’s present marketing strategy demonstrates that they have continued to follow their old strategy and have not undertaken any effort to embrace the new age marketing principles.

This has intensified their problem of targeting new age customers. Based on the above study it can be intuitively said that Rolex needs to change the way their marketing team thinks and perceives their brand.

References Adams, A. 2013, Wrist Watch Brands


The Wind of the Prairies: Dust Bowl and the Economical Disaster of the 30ies Critical Essay a level english language essay help

When one comes to think of it, the economical disaster of the thirties was quite easy to predict; completely devastated from the WWI, on the one hand, and being on the verge of the outbreak of the WWII, on the other hand, the entire world was slowly pulling itself together for the disaster that was going to strike. For some states, however, the Great Depression meant more than another economical breakdown.

In the United States, the years of the Depression set the industrial North and the agricultural South even further apart, not to mention the fact that death rates across the state went through the roof. To make the matter worse, severe dust bowls, wind from the prairies, ruined the States’ hope for better harvest for another couple of years.

Because of the parallels that Timothy Egan drives between the thirties’ economical devastation and the exhaustingly dry wind from the prairies, the economical disaster, which was prior known to an average American of the XXI century only from history books, suddenly takes a specific and threatening shape, therefore, becoming more tangible and allowing to evaluate the scale of the catastrophe that swept the U.S. in the 30ies.

Apart from the metaphor of the Great Depression as the dust bowl that swept the economy of the entire nation away, Egan’s book has a number of intriguing elements that make one return to Timothy’s discussion of the devastation of the U.S. again and again.

Egan not only creates a pretty idiom but also stretches it further to represent more links between the dust bowl and the Great Depression without shying away from the differences between the two phenomena; moreover, Egan uses these differences to the advantage of his story.

Among these, the origin of the disasters should be mentioned. Egan stresses several times that, in contrast to the dust bowl, which is caused by nature, the Great Depression was entirely human-induced.

While Timothy does not draw the final conclusion at this point of his speculations, allowing the readers to make their own conclusions, it is rather clear that the idea of being responsible for the effects of one’s actions, especially if these effects take a nationwide or even a worldwide scale, is implied: “Books such as How to get Rich on the Plains explained how any investor could double his money in just five years” (Egan 20).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Remarkably unsettling and clearly aimed at shocking the reader into paying attention, the book may seem disturbingly dark and, therefore, somewhat artificial, which one may consider its basic flaw. On second thought, however, the atmosphere that Egan manages to build in the process of telling the story of the most complicated era in the history of the USA, serves its purpose perfectly well.

In addition, to be honest, the Great Depression did cause numerous deaths of starvation and poverty in the United States, and silencing these facts would have been unfair: “The high Plains never recovered from the Dust Bowl” (Egan 309).

Moreover, when one comes to think of what exactly makes such great impression on the reader, not the shocking facts listed by Egan, but the objectivity, with which the author analyzes them, as well as the fact that Egan does not make hasty conclusions about the Great Depression and the people who were responsible for it come to the fore.

Instead of passing judgments, the author provides a careful analysis, which cannot trigger any reproaches concerning the author’s political commitments; as Egan would put it, “[…] the sheriff had no time for politics” (Egan 106).

Eventually, one should give credit to Egan’s ability to create likable and relatable characters. While one might complain about the characters lacking personality, they are still fleshed out relatively well, and, when reading Egan’s book, one can feel that what the author describes has really happened.

As little character development as the story suggests, one can still feel the emotions that the characters feel, and empathize with each of the people described, which is arguably even more important than creating a complete character arch.

For example, the readers only know that William Carlyle “built a dugout in 1915 for his family” (Egan 37), yet they relate to this character after learning how hard he worked and what a devoted father and husband he was.

We will write a custom Essay on The Wind of the Prairies: Dust Bowl and the Economical Disaster of the 30ies specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More After all, Egan never thought most of these people up – they had, in fact, exact prototypes in real life, and, in Egan’s defense, one must stress that he never resorted either to using the stereotypical image of a South dweller, or to ruining these stereotypes on purpose – instead, he merely disregarded them, thus, making the South-related clichés less powerful than they used to be.

Of course, it would be wrong to assume that Egan owes the success of his book solely to the metaphor that he used to get the main point across; quite on the contrary, the book is packed with other means of expression, including not only idioms but also a very compelling story, relatable characters and a cohesive manner of storytelling.

However, the connection between a dust bowl, the terror of the prairies, and a dust bowl, the economic disaster of the Great Depression, remains the glue that keeps the book together.

By comparing a natural phenomenon that causes disastrous effects with the phenomenon of the same effect induced by people, Egan makes the readers realize that the dire effects of the Great Depression were not only inevitable but also necessary for the further evolution of the United States and the entire world.

Having learned to anticipate the outcomes of their actions, even though with the help of such a harsh lesson, the North and the South were finally able to reconcile and set their differences aside for better cooperation.

Works Cited Egan, Timothy. The Worst Hard Time: The Untold Story of Those Who Survived in the Great American Dust Bowl. Boston, MA: Mariner Books. 2006. Print.


In Search for the True Meaning of This Land Is Your Land: What the Present-Day Americans Fail to Understand Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

As inspiring and honest as they were, the songs that Guthrie sang were a product of its era. This Land Is Your Land appealed to the American citizens that needed cooperation in order to stay calm and united in the heat of the fight.

Since modern U.S. citizens are unable to re-live the experience of the infamous Dust Bowl and the Great Depression, they cannot possibly embrace the ideas of loss and despair communicated in such lines as “A sign was painted said: Private Property/But on the back side it didn’t say nothing” (Guthrie para. 4).

When it comes to thinking what exactly modern American people fail to understand in Guthrie’s song, the weirdest thing is that Woody is much more famous now than he used to be in the era of the Great Depression, yet his present-day fans cannot quite put their finger on why exactly the song has gained such recognition and what makes it stand out of the range of songs concerning similar issues.

The fact that Woody was the first to write a song about the desperate state of the people trapped in the Great Depression does not seem to be the determinant in Guthrie’s case – a number of songs written to mark a particular historic event vanished without a trace, while their descendants appeared to be much more successful. Perhaps, there is more to the lyrics of the song than meets the eye.

One of the element that sets the song apart from not only the rest of Woody’s songs but also from the rest of the songs regarding the phenomenon of the Great Depression and the Dust Bowl, is its tendency to embrace the life of the entire United States; as if willing to take a family picture to cement the phenomenon of the Great Depression in people’s minds, Woody sang, “From California to the New York Island,/from the red wood forest to the Gulf Stream waters,/This land was made for you and me” (Guthrie para. 1).

The space that Woody embraces in his song gives a very tempting opportunity to read numerous innuendoes into the given excerpt, starting from the idea of togetherness, up to Woody’s concept of Communism as the principle of sharing at the time of nationwide trouble. In fact, a number of present-day critics interpret the given line as Guthrie’s call for people to join the ranks of Communists in order to fight the Great Depression.

The given interpretation is quite common for the present-day critics of Guthrie’s works; moreover, the discussion of the Socialist implications in the song often escalates to voicing the suspicions about Guthrie trying to spread Communist propaganda in the USA.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Considering This Land Is Your Land a tribute to the Communist ideas, however, would be quite a stretch. Instead, it would be more reasonable to view the song through the lens of a typical dweller of American South, who lost all possessions and was in desperate need for help. The people who were at the brink of going insane because of losing everything that they had did not need another blues song.

Instead, they wanted to hear about the Promised Land, where they could find a shelter from all their troubles – the place where the mere concept of property could be disregarded for the sake of feeling secure once again: “And on the sig it said ‘No Trespassing’,/But on the other side it didn’t say nothing” (Guthrie para. 5).

Therefore, the problem with understanding the meaning of Guthrie’s song is not that the people of the USA of the XXI century have no idea about the Great depression, but that people are trying to read into Guthrie’s song something that was never meant to be there.

“This land was made for you and me” is not a call for people accepting the Communist ideas readily – it is a reproach to the state authorities, which led the U.S. to the state of the Great Depression, throwing it into the Dust Bowl and leaving millions of people without anything to eat, anywhere to sleep and anyone to ask for help: “As they stood there hungry, I stood there asking,/Is this land made for you and me?” (Guthrie para. 6).

The song is a call for freedom and happiness, which many people can relate to today, yet, weirdly enough, link to the Communist ideas.

Although the song might seem unnecessarily upbeat for the present-day American people to represent such a dark and morbid page in the history of the USAA as the great depression, one must admit that the merits of the song, as well as the elements of originality in it, clearly shine through. More to the point, the song serves as a reminder of the lessons learned in the course of the state history.

Unless people remember the lessons that history has taught them, they are doomed to repeating the same mistakes again and again, which means that modern U.S. citizens should, probably, look into Woody Guthrie’s This Land Is Your Land.

We will write a custom Essay on In Search for the True Meaning of This Land Is Your Land: What the Present-Day Americans Fail to Understand specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Guthrie, Woody (Singer and songwriter). This Land Is Your Land. 1940. Web.


Maersk Line Case Study essay help online free

Table of Contents Introduction

Dilemmas Faced by Maersk Line

Explanations for the Success of Maersk Line’s Business Model

Why the New Business Model should Work

Why the New Business Model should Facilitate Differentiation

Strategic Choices Facing the CEO of Maersk Line

The Strategy that should be Chosen



Introduction This paper presents a detailed analysis of the Maersk Line case study. Maersk Line is the world single largest shipping company. Despite its organic growth over the years, the company is grappling with several challenges, which include increasing competition and high fuel costs. In this regard, the analysis will focus on three areas. First, it will highlight the dilemmas facing the company.

Second, it will highlight the factors that have led to the success of the company’s business model. Finally, the strategic choices facing Maersk Line’s CEO will be analyzed. Based on the analysis, recommendations will be made regarding the strategy that should be adopted by the CEO.

Dilemmas Faced by Maersk Line The CEO of Maersk Line is facing several dilemmas as he attempts to implement new strategies to improve the profitability of the company, as well as, to maintain its position as the industry leader. To begin with, the company is implementing a sustainable shipping strategy to overcome competition. The objective of this strategy is to reduce the environmental impacts of the company’s activities.

As a result, customers who are interested in reducing their ecological footprint will consider Maersk Line as the right transport partner. This will increase Maersk Line’s sales and customer loyalty. However, the dilemma in implementing this strategy arises from the costs associated with it. For instance, slow steaming helps the company to reduce fuel consumption.

However, it will reduce the competitiveness of the company during economic boom. In particular, slow steaming will prevent the company from responding to increased demand in the short-run. This is because Maersk Line will have to increase its fleet size, which is not possible in the short-run since orders for new ships take up to 4 years to be fulfilled.

Additionally, if other companies begin to ship at normal speed, Maersk Line will be less competitive because it will take longer than its competitors will deliver containers (Caputo, Fratocchi


Marketing Relationship: McDonalds Evaluation Essay college essay help online

Table of Contents McDonalds and Customer Relations

Stakeholders and Customer Relationship

Loyalty Programmes and their Effectiveness


McDonalds and Customer Relations The McDonalds Corporation is the world’s largest company in the field of hamburger fast food. The corporation started in the USA in 1940 has grown to a global presence of over 119 countries. Its customer base is 70 million daily. McDonalds started as a restaurant selling barbecues.

In 1955, business mogul Ray Kroc joined the restaurant as a franchises agent. He acquired the restaurant and employed a production line marketing concept to grow it to its current global presence. McDonalds’ development has come from realising franchisees and affiliates to run it.

The corporation runs only 15% of its operations. This ownership model allows for versatility in marketing. McDonalds employs different franchise models in different regions. The company made a profit of $5.7 billion in 2012 and revenue of $28 billion (Baines, Fill


LeBanze Automotive Company Case Study writing essay help: writing essay help

Introduction The company will be called the LeBanze Automotive Company. The mission of the company is to provide customized SUV and pickup trucks that are affordable and very durable.

The business strategy will be marke-oriented strategies such as product proliferation, product modification, and product diversification to meet the market demand. The business intends to penetrate the Gulf automotive market within one year.

This analytical treatise attempts to explicitly review the concepts of the organizational chart, supply chain, and efficiency in the business plan for the LeBanze Automotive Company.

The purpose of this business proposal is to describe the business type, its aims and objectives, the main activities, location, unique selling point, the reasons for creating this company, market environment, business needs, as well as rationale for the business, target market, customers, and key competitors.

The business is called the LeBanze Automotive Company and it is established as a private company in order to meet local market demand for the sports utility vehicles in the Middle Eastern Block.

The core business sector is the motor vehicle manufacturing industry, which also focuses on designing and creativity to customize SUVs to clients, especially in the UAE and the rest of the Gulf region.

Business Idea and Main Activities The LeBanze Automotive Company business will be established to address all needs of the SUV market in the UAE where the customers would be capable of purchasing their required vehicles from its outlets.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Moreover, they will get the facility to order by using the company’s web portal in which the company will deliver the vehicles within a reasonable period. The owners have already established a strong network within the UAE and the rest of the Gulf region.

The product line of the business will consist of a variety of off-road vehicles with specially integrated characteristics to mitigate physical problems like inbuilt communication unit challenges, stronger chassis, and quality part.

Aims and Objectives The aim of formulating this business is to sell SUV products to local businesses and private customers. However, it has aimed to introduce an online platform to attract the modern customers and to become a profitable company by the end of the first year of operation.

At the same time, this business is committed to provide quality products and outstanding customer care services to solve dilemmas and to please the clients.

On the other hand, the LeBanze Automotive Company has long-term objectives, such as, expansion of business in the customized SUV market, and vertical integration and merger with different companies to enter new market within the next five years of operation.

However, the key objectives of this automotive business are:

To boost its profit margin per year by 8% and to start new services from the second year of the business operation.

At the same time, the owners have some commitment to save the environment of the indigenous Middle Eastern Blocklocality. Therefore, it will introduce environment-friendly operational activities from the third year of the operation, such as hybrid and pure electric SUVs.

The owners will allocate 10% of the total profit for the marketing activity as it plays a vital role to increase sales revenue.

Business Location The business will need to find out an appropriate business location in the United Arab Emirates for setting up the SUV distribution centre and carrying out the operation profitably.

We will write a custom Case Study on LeBanze Automotive Company specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More However, in this context, it is essential to argue that the owners of this new business will have to survey the market of that location carefully in order to recognize and better understand the business atmosphere, traditions, demography, people, customers’ and attitudes in order to run the operations successfully.

The store will be situated in Dubai, United Arab Emirates, where the clients will get accessible transportation services. The company will then roll out smaller stores across the Middle Eastern Block.

A good position will make sure that the business will run profitably with a good flow of patrons, as people would be better aware of its location.

Unique Selling Points for the LeBanze Automotive Company The owners and marketers of the LeBanze Automotive Company will adopt five-stage processes in order to assess the business because banks are unresponsive to invest a large amount for the projects viewed as non-viable.

The LeBanze Automotive Company team will identify unique characteristics of their SUVs by comparing with the SUVs of the competitors, assess the emotional demand from the perspective of the customers, and find out the limitations of the competitors.

These procedures will help the management to avoid risks of investment to some extent. The business will design a unique campaign plan to aware to move forward as well as gain competitive advantages in the UAE’s SUV market (Arabian Gulf’s consumer spending boom par. 5).

Industry Analysis of the LeBanze Automotive Company Macro-environmental analysis

The macro-environment analysis studies external forces whose influence in one way or the other affects the performance of the LeBanze Automotive Company in particular. Players in any business industry often lack the ability to control these external forces.

Political environment

The closer economic relations in the Gulf region will benefit the LeBanze Automotive Company’s business performance for a long time. The country enjoys political stability, which is a perfect environment for doing business.

Not sure if you can write a paper on LeBanze Automotive Company by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This is a good assurance for shareholders, both domestic and foreign, that their investment is safe and it is an incentive to them to add even more (Arabian Gulf’s consumer spending boom par. 5).

With continued political stability, the LeBanze Automotive Company is poised to grow and expand even more as many investors are assured of safety in the event that they decide to put their money into the venture.

Economic factors

The Gulf region offers an economically sound environment that is good for business activity. The World Bank acknowledged UAE as a rich country in 2005 while the country’s GDP hit the $ 1 trillion mark in 2006.

The UAE economy has one of the highest Purchasing Power Parity (PPP) in the world. The country has little inflation and interest rates with one of the best infrastructures in the world.

UAE’s stable economy with the high living standards of her population portends a lucrative market for LeBanze Automotive Company’s business performance.

More citizens of the UAE and the Gulf region have a high demand for SUVs due to the country’s high per capita income. UAE’s improved demand for SUVs will prove substantial for the overall performance of the LeBanze Automotive Company.

Technological factors

The LeBanze Automotive Company may invest heavily in information communication technology as it aims at improving service delivery and customer satisfaction. The online purchase portal is as a result of the company’s initiative.

The Service Oriented Architecture is yet another technological initiative by the LeBanze Automotive Company which will enable the company management to monitor general trends in performance at a glance and spot out any existing bottlenecks that could be slowing down business.

The speed with which this happens helps the management to put corrective measures in place that eventually averts losses or negative growth. These technological advances will attract more customers to the company due to the improved efficiency with which clients are being attended to.

Legal factors

The LeBanze Automotive Company will be a registered business entity that is licensed to operate UAE.

The company will remit taxes to both governments as a legal requirement and the funds go a long way to finance activities such as building and improving infrastructure, financing public goods paying salaries and buying necessities such as medicines.

As a legal requirement, the company is expected by the regulatory authorities to be tax compliant. The fees are remitted directly to the government of Abu Dhabi.

In the UAE laws of commerce, certificate of compliance for taxes are issued to business that remits their returns accurately form which taxes are deducted (Arabian Gulf’s consumer spending boom par. 5).

Micro-environmental analysis

Industry competitiveness analysis using Porter’s five forces model

Threat to market entry It is difficult for any aspiring automotive company to enter into the industry in the UAE market and manage to break even more comfortable.

In UAE, the LeBanze Automotive Company’s business magnitude together with that of its main competitors such as Toyota and Nissan are well established and would easily enjoy economies of scale to the disadvantage of a new entrant.

It would require massive capital for an aspiring investor to outperform their business prowess.

The LeBanze Automotive Company is well-positioned to survive in the competitive market through gaining from economies of scale, competitive price tags, and reliable customer base in the UAE and other Gulf nations (Arabian Gulf’s consumer spending boom par. 5).

Threat of substitutes Toyota and Nissan automotive companies pose the greatest danger to LeBanze Automotive Company’s existence and business performance. These companies have been in the industry for a more extended period and are well established than the LeBanze Automotive Company.

The Toyota and Nissan companies have the same products as the LeBanze Automotive Company and sometimes offer significant discounts to customers. In the UAE automotive industry, loyalty to a brand plays a vital role in customer behaviour.

Therefore, Toyota and Nissan brands have the ability to offer an alternative perfect substitute to customers who may be unsatisfied with the SUVs offered at the LeBanze Automotive Company. Unsatisfied customers, therefore, have other alternatives from where they can get the SUVs.

However, in order to remain relevant, the LeBanze Automotive Company has established a unique market for its customer through customised optometry SUVs.

Power of suppliers Suppliers in the UAE automotive industry have more power owing to the existence of many SUV brands. As a matter of fact, suppliers may instigate market demand and supply variances.

This leaves the suppliers with the power to dictate on proceedings in the industry, such as the market prices and distribution logistics.

However, the LeBanze Automotive Company has endeavoured to use its deep reservoirs as a strategy for balancing the supply forces in the fragile SUV market of the UAE and other Gulf nations (Arabian Gulf’s consumer spending boom par. 7).

Power of buyers Reflectively, the amount of output in terms of turning over sales depends on the buyers’ purchasing power.

The higher the purchasing power, the better the turnover in total sales realised over a definite period. The LeBanze Automotive Company’s performance in the UAE depends highly on the ability of the SUV users.

On the other hand, unreliable and weak purchasing power translates into losses and underperformance of the company.

The management must, therefore, do everything within their means to ensure that service delivery and quality of the SUVs meets the expectations of customers (Barringer and Duane 34).

The purchasing power determines profitability and probability of survival of a business in the short and long term.

If buyers feel dissatisfied because of poor SUV product, they can easily opt to acquire the same SUVs from rival automotives, thus losing out on business opportunities for the LeBanze Automotive Company.

Rivalry There are several automotive companies operating in the same industry with virtually all of them dealing with a variety of the SUV products.

For instance, the Toyota Company provides the biggest competition to the LeBanze Automotive Company due to its most significant market share and expanded network standing at 30% (Barringer and Duane 34).

With many customers looking for good value for their money, the quality of the SUVs has remained the main basis upon which customers are making their final decision to purchase in the UAE and other Gulf nations.

All the players in the industry are putting measures in place to ensure they attract more customers and therefore expand their market share. In line with this, the LeBanze Automotive Company’s Abu Dhabi branch will be the most significant and busiest SUV retail store.

The LeBanze Automotive Company’s business strategy Cost Leadership Strategy

Cost leadership strategy is vital in business management especially in an industry with stiff competition. Reflectively, the concept, as proposed by Porter, is a mean of establishing a sustainable competitive advantage over other player in the industry.

The LeBanze Automotive Company has adopted the cost leadership strategy to improve its efficiency through streamlining operations.

As a result, this venture has developed a cumulative experience, optimal performance, quality assurance, and is in full control of their operational chains.

In order to cut down the cost of production and marketing, the company has embraced the modern technology in its online sales, human resource management, purchasing, and dispatch departments.

The company has entered into a partnership with dealerships rather than engaging its resources in obtaining raw materials and selling to its customers. As a result, the general overhead cost of operation has been reduced substantially.

Also, the company has opted for diversification and expansion of stores in order to gain from economies of scale as the overall turnover grows.

As a result, issues of underperformance have been minimized substantially. At present, this company produces the best quality packaging of its customized automotive products at the lowest possible price despite the high quality since production is done in mass.

Besides, the company has introduced a series of efficiency monitoring systems such as performance valuation, efficiency in production, target management, and electronic purchasing, which has greatly reduced labour cost.

These ventures aim at enabling the company to optimise profits through efficiency in production, sales, accountability, and use of company resources while maintaining quality (Barringer and Duane 34).

Benefits and Suitability of the Cost Leadership Strategy

Efficiency monitoring in distribution, sales, cash flow management, labour, and diversification as employed by the LeBanze Automotive Company is particularly suitable for the firm as it is more of a precautionary measure that shields the firm from effects of redundancy and underutilization of production variables.

Despite rivalry in the SUV industry, the LeBanze Automotive Company has been in a position to monitor all its operation chains and periodically evaluate the same as a means of reducing overhead cost due to underutilization, poor balancing, and unaccountability (Trassard par. 5).

As a result, the LeBanze Automotive Company has managed to transform its portfolio and capital structure by 18% since most of operation lines are optimally utilized.

Consumer Analysis The LeBanze Automotive Company products target male and female clients in the middle and high end of the economic ladder. This group is characterized by high disposable income and high demand for luxury vehicles that attest to their social status (Barringer and Duane 22).

Despite the fact that the market for the SUVs has been in existence for a long time, there are very few companies that offer the customized SUVs that satisfy the demands of this class of clients in the Gulf region.

This group is further divided into customers in the age group of late thirties who are the primary users of the SUVs and customers in the age group of twenties who are in the minority segment in terms of demands for the LeBanze Automotive Company.

Due to exposure to information sources such as newspapers, television, radio, and magazines, product announcement through these avenues and word of mouth does come in handy.

The decision on the best product, therefore, rely on the information on multiple exposures to different competing products.

In order to diversify market operations, the LeBanze Automotive Company has created multiple SUV products from the same product with different coloration, sizes, and customisation.

This has created an environment of their competition and blocks other competitors from invading into the company’s customized cycles market. These sub-products are differentiated by features, prices, and the difference in quality.

As forecasted in the market research, this strategy has been successful towards dominance as it offers a variety of options to consumers, while at the same time, maximizing benefits of economies of scale in the Europe market (Barringer and Duane 31).

The same should be adopted in the expansion strategy towards the Gulf region.

Market strategy and rationale From the above analysis, it is apparent that the company may gain in the Gulf market. Among the market strategies, the company should adopt include product proliferation, product development, and market foresight.

Reflectively, product proliferation as a strategy is the same as strategies that companies adopt to create opaque barriers for their competitors.

Through this approach, the market share leader will automatically have the discretion to reap maximum benefits ahead of its closest competitors.

For instance, this strategy will be beneficial for the company when it became the first company in the Gulf region to provide customized SUVs(Arabian Gulf’s consumer spending boom par. 7).

Product development entails the innovation process aimed at modelling the existing product or improving on it to balance with the changing preferences of the customers. As a result, the older version will be phased out of the market as preferences change.

The company should model itself as the leading company in the Gulf SUV industry in terms of design and innovation. The company will benefit from this strategy in terms of market expansion, especially among its early adopter customers.

The product development variables at the company are connected at the central point of strategic planning which encompasses cost, speed, quality, flexibility, and dependability create a smooth continuous operation tracking model that operates like a computer from one segment to another.

Therefore, the major part of the success puzzle for operations implementation management strategy delivery operates on the periphery of the soft skills involving the timeless vision of organizational principles, defining value of the business, determining requirements, clarifying the concept, building teams, mitigating task, resolving issues, and providing direction as incorporated in the operations management system of the company in the European market.

The company has developed a highly structured marketing distribution channel that operates independently.

Foresight is very crucial since it gives a company rough perspective and an overview of the future concerning the expected and unexpected changes and challenges (Barringer and Duane 41).

Therefore, the company should carefully examine and evaluate their past and endeavour to adopt relevant skills that will be relevant for future challenges and responsibilities in the Gulf market.

In the quest for internationalisation, the company should opt for the use of local labour as a strategy to include in the management team members from the countries of operation through training of young and talented managers who are skillful.

Besides, the company should embrace the need for the creation of an integrated structure to absorb company goals and those that favour business in the branches that will operate in the Gulf region (Arabian Gulf’s consumer spending boom par. 7).

Therefore this strategy was very crucial, especially in the forecast of future direction as the foreign markets are used for customisation and the introduction of unique aspects in the automotive industry.

As a strategy aimed at keeping customers, the process embraced corporate social responsibility in the foreign markets such as sponsorship of education products and partnership with the local medical societies.

Benchmarking Competition in relation to Toyota Company Situation at the LeBanze Automotive Company

Globalisation has created a serious impact on the automotive sector with an innovative and deviating period of organisational, economic activities including the development of technology, increasing market demand, production and workflow, investment and trade patterns, competition among the rival companies, as well as two facing the threats of global financial.

With lean production and outsourcing, the automotive parts industry is increasingly important for global production chains.

The LeBanze Automotive Company is going over to modular assembly in which the main components manufacturer coordinates the design manufacture and installation of the major parts or systems of the car or truck.

The value chain of the industry may suffer from declining wage rate due to competitive pressures in less developed countries with comparatively lower per-capita income. This is the situation that the company is facing.

Situation at the Toyota Company In the case of Toyota, globalisation flourished in the nineties through FDI flow, production in other countries rather than the home and through its internationalisation strategy during the seventies and eighties with a successful record of accomplishment.

Toyota introduced its overseas production in Australia in 1963, Thailand in 1964, New Zealand in 1966, Peru in 1969, and Indonesia in 1970 while the company engaged with 52 overseas production factories in 2006.

Toyota Motor views globalisation as a more efficient way to address a future aspect in advance, including spreading unpredicted risks and prospects. Thus, the Toyota Companyposes the highest threat towards the survival of the company in the Gulf region.

Solution to the above situational analysis As the international automotive market is getting more and more competitive in terms of producing environment-friendly products and capture the market as well, the LeBanze Automotive Company should recheck the strategy of the competitors to develop a product range.

It should develop an integrated marketing communication system in order to inform people about the positive side of Eco-friendly cars for the environment within the Gulf region.

Also, the LeBanze Automotive Company should increase expenditures for the R


Cambodia: Religion and Peacebuilding Case Study online essay help

Table of Contents The Discussion of the Conflicts and the Timelines

Key Actors in the Cambodian Conflicts

Religion, Peacebuilding, Conflict Resolution, and Politics

Works Cited

The history of Cambodia is closely associated with the intensive interaction of such important forces as the opposed political parties, influential external actors, and significant religious groups.

The development of the nation in Cambodia directly depends on the relations of religion and politics in the country.

From this point, it is important to focus on the effective peacebuilding activities and practices based on the religious principles and realized in Cambodia in order to regulate political conflicts in 1993 and 1998.

Referring to the historic events, it is possible to state that religion is closely connected with politics in Cambodia in spite of the followed principles of the religious neutrality.

Thus, Buddhism is the national religion in Cambodia, and the Buddhist monks played an important role in the political conflict regulation in 1993 and 1998 in spite of the stated ideas of neutrality and non-partisan roles.

The Discussion of the Conflicts and the Timelines Before 1993, Cambodia was divided into two political factions that were in a constant developing conflict during a long period of time, without proposing any possible solutions.

In addition, the Buddhist religious groups were inclined to preach peace and reconciliation as a way of diverting people’s attention from the political issues to the idea of the nation-building.

The important events occurred in 1993 when the political coalition was organized as a result of the UNTAC activities and the 1993 elections. Cambodia has gained the political stability.

However, the fragile coalition could not develop during a long period of time, and the year of 1997 was characterized by the examples of significant military violence.

The tense situation in the country’s politics found its resolution in the elections of 1998 which aimed to promote the political stability in the country, but they also led to the post-elections conflicts (Morris 193-194).

Thus, the timeline of the political conflicts in Cambodia includes several important dates which are the period of the elections in 1993, the military conflicts in 1997, the elections of 1998, and the post-elections conflicts.

In spite of the fact that these conflicts were rather similar in their ideas, they differ significantly in relation to the role of Buddhist clergy and monks in these conflicts.

Thus, if the Buddhist clergy focused on the peace walks as the main method to predict and resolve the conflicts in 1993, the Buddhist monks joined the opposition demonstrations in 1998, and they were actively involved in the post-election conflicts.

Key Actors in the Cambodian Conflicts It is possible to determine three key actors of the Cambodian conflicts in 1993 and 1998.

These actors as the opposite political forces struggling for the political dominance in the country, and the Buddhist clergy and monks who followed the principles of neutrality and non-violence proclaimed and developed by Maha Ghosananda (Morris 200).

The opposed political parties followed two opposite ideologies which were based on the principles similar to Communism and Liberalism. Some politicians were inclined to use the pre- and post-elections conflicts to advance their interests and to oppress the population in Cambodia.

The Buddhist clergy and monks represented the unique powerful actor in the social and political sphere of the country in spite of the fact that the ideals of Buddhism prohibited the active participation in the political activities.

According to the developed Buddhism principles, the Buddhist clergy and monks in Cambodia were focused on the political neutrality in its combination with the social engagement, different non-partisan and non-violent strategies which were actively used in the process of resolving the conflicts in 1993 and 1998 (Morris 198).

Religion, Peacebuilding, Conflict Resolution, and Politics Focusing on the events of 1993 and 1998, it is possible to state that religion in Cambodia is a very influential tool to convince people to change their minds and follow certain practices and social paths.

In spite of the shared ideology and principles of non-partisan participation and political neutrality, the approaches used by the Buddhist clergy and monks while participating the social and political events of 1993 and 1998 are rather different that is why the results of the conflicts and the role of the Buddhist monks in the processes are different.

In 1993, the Buddhist monks demonstrated their focus on the social engagement without participating directly in the political conflicts, and this approach led to the effective conflict resolution.

On the contrary, in 1998, the Buddhist monks were actively involved in the conflict, and they became the victims of the military violence as the other people. The conflict was not resolved appropriately (Morris, 200-201).

Referring to these two situations, it is possible to state that the Buddhist clergy and monks were oriented to finding the balance between two opposite approaches in order to adjust them to the proclaimed principles of the social engagement connected with the idea of neutrality and non-partisan position of the Buddhist clergy and monks in relation to the political powers in the country.

The Buddhist clergy and monks in Cambodia played an important role in relation to the peacebuilding in the country, especially with references to the events of 1993.

Thus, the peace walks organized before the elections were discussed as the powerful tool to cease the tensions in the society and to calm the population (Morris 200).

As a result, the ideals of the neutrality and non-violence were followed directly, and many contributions was made to the social peace before the significant political events.

Thus, the associated demonstrations were discussed as peaceful ones. From this point, the conflict resolution was achieved with references to the peaceful methods.

However, the events of 1998 demonstrated the results of the opposite approach used by the Buddhist clergy and monks to respond to the political and social situations.

The Buddhist clergy were effective in relation to handling the conflict before the elections because of focusing on the peace activities. Nevertheless, the Buddhist clergy and monks became involved in the demonstrations after the elections of 1998.

Thus, the Buddhist clergy and monks expressed their political position clearly instead of avoiding any partisan activities (Morris 202). As a result, the conflicts were not regulated effectively during a long period of time.

The role of the Buddhist clergy and monks in regulating the conflicts in 1993 and 1998 was significant to influence the voter turnout positively and to contribute to the development of the peaceful activities and behaviours within the Cambodian society.

However, it is important to pay attention to the fact that the Buddhist religion contributed to the peacebuilding in Cambodia with references to following the non-partisan roles and teaching the society how to handle the conflicts and stay peaceful in the context of problematic social and political situations.

Works Cited Morris, Catherine. “Case Studies in Religion and Peacebuilding”. Religion and Peacebuilding. Ed. Harold Coward and Gordon Smith. New York: State University of New York Press, 2004. 191-211. Print.


Company Analysis of Bi-lens Report (Assessment) cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Bi-Lens’ competitive strategies

Bi-Lens’ decisions to shift resources

Bi-Lens’ spending on corporate social responsibility

Works Cited

Introduction Glo-Bus achieved successful results at the end of the simulation exercise in Year 10. The company was rated the best among other players in the camera industry.

This paper explores factors and other dynamics that helped the company to succeed in the 5 years simulation exercise. The simulation started in Year 6 to 10.

Glo-Bus was an online, PC-based game. The sport involved manipulation of a digital camera at a head-to-head competition with rival companies. Groups of people coordinated the work of the camera.

The objective of the exercise was to operate a multi-product firm in the international environment successfully. The game involved drafting and executing a strategy that could give a business a competitive advantage over its rivals in the market.

The plan had to prove its capacity to deliver good bottom line results consistently and build shareholder value. For Glo-Bus, company managers jointly prepared a five-year business mission or a strategic plan to monitor and evaluate their performances and those of their competitors.

The directors reviewed objectives and goals and progressively interrogated their overall results whenever necessary. The management of the Bi-lens Company acquired a charter. The document helped the business to provide the best quality camera equipment for consumers.

This analysis focuses on the Bi-Lens Company. The research examines the performance of the business in terms of the simulation exercise under discussion and the team’s performance.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This study captures the competitive dimension that the Bi-Lens Company employed during the simulation. It explores ways that the organisation used to improve its market standing and financial performance.

The report evaluates the Bi-Lens Company and the various mechanisms it used to compete with other rivals within the context of appropriate social corporate responsibility.

Bi-Lens’ competitive strategies The Bi-Lens Company endeavored to be a worldwide leader in the digital camera sector with innovative products, fair value and superior services in the market. The business sought to provide its customers with a product that utilised the most innovative and competitive technology.

The organisation planned to offer excellent client services, fair pricing, and adopted best practices for customers.

The company outlined several methods of fulfilling its objectives. The organisation’s vision was to be the best-cost provider. It also aimed at increasing sales through offering quality products at fair and market values.

This aspect included the sustenance of a highly skilled workforce that related to the development and maintenance of preferred products. Engineers designed Bi-Lens’ products to incorporate a low-cost differentiation, and at the same time target broad and narrow market regions.

The organisation’s goal was to appeal to diverse clients and provide them with value for their money. The company’s mission also involved the use of cost-effective strategy approaches that could allow for the incorporation of competitive attributes.

We will write a custom Assessment on Company Analysis of Bi-lens specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The business maintained a competitive edge over its rivals by listening and adjusting to value-conscious shoppers. The Bi-Lens Company utilised five robust strategies in the simulation.

The first objective focused on maintaining a highly skilled and valuable workforce. This aspect increased productivity and quality of Bi-Lens’ services.

The second goal entailed the provision of exceptional customer services. This point enticed the clients to have a preference for Bi-Lens’ cameras.

The third goal underscored the sustenance of a fair market value. This fact was significant in offering clients with worthwhile services.

The fourth intervention of the Bi-Lens Company was to offer quality cost-effective products with specifications that fulfilled consumer needs and outdid its competitors’ products.

The Bi-Lens Company maintained consistency of its business initiatives. The management of the company linked its overall objectives to the training of its workforce with a view of attaining organisational objectives.

The development of the workforce ensured the processing of products that met customers’ tastes and preferences. Bi-lens’ offensive and defensive strategic options

The organisation adopted offensive and defensive approaches to increase its ratings and financial results. The business integrated defensive options to ensure that products offered in the market were equal or greater than those of its competitors.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Company Analysis of Bi-lens by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This open strategy focused on outperforming the business rivals of the Bi-Lens Company. The initiative also enhanced the organisation’s market position in relation to rivals. The offensive intervention offered many features that appealed to a broad consumer base.

This effort increased the client catchment population of the Bi-Lens Company and boosted its financial index. Another offensive alternative employed by the Bi-Lens Company entailed the development of instructional classes to assist buyers during their products’ selection.

This tool could be equated to an incentive for the customers because it presented them with rare shopping experiences and assistances. Another defensive method employed by the Bi-Lens Company involved the implementation of competitive staff remuneration structures.

Bi-Lens identified new players entering the industry and monitored their strategies in order to develop appropriate counter mechanisms.

For example, development of barriers or a counter strategy underscored building a competitive brand preference and sustenance of strong customer loyalty through consistent provision of quality products that fulfilled targeted needs.

Bi-Lens’ strategic approach to competing in a global camera market The Bi-Lens Company had to develop a foreign market entry strategy to compete with other business players. Foreign markets varied from the local ones based on political, legal, social and cultural considerations.

Foreign business investors had to survey the political environment of any state because changes in laws and regulations would have affected the performance and operations of businesses.

For instance, if the government in any of the European countries would have imposed a law that increased tax on imported goods, the company’s products would have been sold at a higher price.

Customers during the simulation period made decisions based on the prices and quality of products; therefore, the Bi-Lens Company evaluated these aspects first before producing goods or services.

This point meant that clients would have paid more than the company’s envisaged prices for the cameras. Based on the law of demand and supply, the cameras’ market demand would have digressed, and Bi-lens would have risked losing its customers to its competitors.

Other factors to be considered by the Bi-Lens Company comprised of cultural and social considerations. Culture defined the way people lived in a society. Human beings based their social activities on cultural dimensions like language and moral practices.

Products whose consumption would have caused moral conflicts among community members would not have made significant sales. The Bi-Lens Company understood the moral practices of a target market.

This aspect helped the business to produce goods and services that were friendly to the market’s general culture. A proposed foreign market entry plan for the Bi-lens Company entailed the application of the concept of assemblies.

In this strategy, Bi-lens initiated the local production of the parts of the digital camera and transported them to a foreign market for assembly. This intervention was suitable for the company because of its cost effectiveness in matters related to transportation and custom tariffs.

The fact also enabled the Bi-Lens Company to perform local employee recruitments. This approach facilitated easy penetration of the business into a foreign market. In addition, it helped the business to overcome potential cultural and social obstacles like a different language.

This design enhanced the domestic firm’s full concentration on research activities that focused on improvement of product development and related skills.

The assembling framework built the confidence of the domestic firm with the foreign company which in this paper is the Bi-Lens Company. This fact ensured that the responsibility of decision making lay entirely with the domestic firm and thus facilitated quick action on stipulated agenda.

This study confirms that the strategy of assembly brought successful results to the Bi-Lens Company. The intervention remained a cost-effective one and needed further improvement by the company. It gave room to the organisation to focus on product development.

The Bi-Lens Company recognized the fact that it faced stiff competition from five other businesses in the same industry. The company affirmed that the competition may have been a significant threat to the business if it had not been well addressed.

Competitors of the Bi-Lens Company created products similar to those of the organisation. The rival firms may have been a threat to Bi-Lens because they also laid down plans that may have countered its market strategies.

The Bi-Lens Company engaged various interventions to compete successfully against its rivals in 4 geographic regions of the world. The first strategy involved increment in the volume of its advertisements.

The business increased its advertising budget annually to continue to exploit opportunities and establish itself as a market leader (Thompson, 23). This program intended to build on the company’s market shares in Europe and Africa.

The region formed part of the biggest markets across the world. From Year 6, the Bi-Lens Company had an approximate market share of 37% and had to strive to attain 50% of market shares by year 8.

The company directed its attention to the warranty period and had to seek ways of adding multi-featured models to improve on its weaknesses. The company also increased its marketing recourses in North America.

The company had realized losses in North America where it had recorded the lowest regional market share of about 11%. On a broader scale, the increased advertising efforts and market budgetary allocation of the Bi-Lens Company improved the company’s competitive advantage.

The Bi-Lens Company provided on-site technical support for different geographical regions. This approach ensured that every operation ran without incurring problems for the company.

The other format integrated by the company was to provide extended warranty offers in the North American region.

In addition, the Bi-Lens Company also incorporated a method of using mitigation measures effectively to resolve consumer concerns. The organisation made consumer experiences memorable in areas where it penetrated markets.

Bi-Lens’ decisions to shift resources Bi-lens’ goal was to overcome market challenges mostly linked to stiff competition from other businesses in the digital camera industry.

Part of the process of achieving this goal was through increasing the organisation’s marketing efforts to improve product recognition, reputation and work to sustain a competitive edge over its rivals.

The Bi-Lens Company made crucial decisions by shifting resources from one area to another to support the execution its efforts.

The Bi-Lens’ sales improvement effort related to the transformation of resources from quarterly sales’ promotions offered to buyers to realizing monthly discount deals.

These deals would go up to 20% discount. This aspect would increase the number of sales for the company and its overall performance in the financial market.

The Bi-Lens Company strived to improve the number of multi-store chains, online retailers and local camera shops that sold Bi-Lens’ products by building a strong relationship with buyers so that they could earn their loyalty.

Bi-Lens worked with retailers by offering them its sales representatives. The company visited retailers and took feedback from them, and also offered advice. The organisation focused on a timely delivery of products to its clients.

The company had an efficient labor support approach with expansive resources to implement its strategies.

The labor and compensation objectives were comprehensive approaches that sought to align the workforce to meet the needs of the Bi-Lens Company and provide exceptional compensation packages. This point aimed at maintaining a highly skilled and valuable workforce.

The focus of the work strategy was to link the quarterly demands of consumers to the projected sales. The compensation structure focused on the provision of efficient means of boosting the returns of the PAT’s while ensuring quality products.

Company experts designed Bi-lens’ cameras with the help of high quality components sourced from foreign suppliers. The organisation manufactured two lines of cameras. These cameras comprised of the regular entry-level and professional multi-level digital cameras.

The company worked closely with suppliers in gathering excellent parts used to assemble both entry-level and multi-level cameras.

The business utilised diverse resources to manufacture its cameras. The main raw materials for manufacturing a camera included image resolution, LCD, and lens. These components were of high quality compared to the industry’s standards.

Bi-Lens’ suppliers in conjunction with the management of the company transformed the constituents. The business worked with the suppliers for constant improvement of the components. The organisation also purchased quality parts that enhanced its desired P/Q ratings.

The business used its money to brand diverse components. Bi-Lens developed a unique quality, brand of cameras that many customers appreciated. The organisation continued to work closely with suppliers to design strong and stylish camera bodies.

The company’s branding styles were a great attraction to digital camera customers. It continued to utilise its funds by working on new and better designs. Bi-Lens built cameras with high imaging device and control.

The company worked closely with the software developers to source high quality image handling software for both entry level and multi-level cameras. Bi-Lens’ cameras had types of accessories added to them. The Bi-Lens Company provided unique features in its cameras.

As an ambitious company, it endeavored to produce quality eye-catching cameras. The organisation’s cameras had unique applications that customers valued. The business continued to offer new and extra components in their camera lines.

Bi-Lens’ multi-featured cameras had 12 unique applications. The company increased the accessories to improve its market ratings.

The Bi-Lens Company used diverse models to manufacture quality cameras that made a huge commercial impact. The organisation used its funds to manufacture three models of entry-level and two models of multi-featured cameras.

Technological innovation was significant to the success and competitive advantage of Bi-Lens over its rivals in the digital camera sector. Bi-Lens manufactured new and more competitive cameras by investing in research and development.

The company’s research and development budgets continued to increase every year. The plans formed a critical part in the transformation of the organisation’s resources in order to support the execution of its business strategies.

Bi-Lens’ spending on corporate social responsibility As a company, Bi-Lens offered the best-cost value cameras to its clients. The business provided customers with guaranteed products in the contemporary digital camera market and sold them at the most reasonable prices across the globe.

Bi-Lens continued to improve product ratings to increase the numbers of retailers that sold its products. This paper suggests that good products in terms of quality usually move fast in the market.

The Bi-Lens Company’s entry level and multi-featured cameras were among the best-rated in the industry.

The organization was committed to corporate social responsibility. A number of the practices that were part of the company’s corporate social responsibilities included quarterly promotions.

Bi-Lens offered weekly and monthly promotions at discounts up to 20% and encouraged retailers to pass on the discounts to their customers.

The business also provided a warranty period or technical support for its products. Bi-Lens provided customers with the confidence to buy great products by offering a reasonable warranty period.

The company’s entry level-cameras carried 6 months to 1-year warranties depending on the purchased models. The business also built a strong technical support team, which assisted customers throughout the day and night.

Provision of employment opportunities to locals in foreign markets was part of the social corporate responsibility of the organization (Landsburg, 46).

The company would hire temporary PAT’s during the 3rd quarter of the season’s peak. It would also utilise overtime to compensate for product demand.

Where necessary, Bi-Lens outsourced to compensate for customer demand or financial resources. These approaches were part of the company’s social corporate responsibility.

The other functions included providing an annual base pay increase of at least 1% per year and camera incentive bonuses to ensure exceptional quality production.

The company would also provide an exceptional retirement or insurance benefits package and a thorough training program for its workers. In addition, it would also offer quarterly bonuses for attendance.

The rationale I would give to shareholders for these social corporate responsibilities is that they form part of the strategic plan to market the company and sell its brand.

The SCR strategy would enable the organisation to achieve its objectives of growing the global market share and increasing its retail network. It would also promote the acceptance and preference of the company among consumers. Bi-Lens’ internal operations

The Bi-Lens Company focused on providing consumers with leading products in the digital camera industry with markets all over the world. The company encountered diverse challenges in realizing its objectives. The managers of the Bi-Lens Company made decisions through consensus.

The team functioned coherently as a whole to contribute to the management of the company (Graf, 25). The disadvantage of this approach of internal operations and decision making was that it consumed a lot of time.

The team would take a significant amount of time to agree on basic approaches. The lost time would have otherwise been used to implement laid down strategies for the company’s growth and development. It was also difficult to achieve homogeneity among the team members.

The foundation of Bi-Lens’ strategic operations plan was to lay emphasis on the achievement of the organisation’s goals. The company provided quality products at fair market value while maintaining a competitive edge over its rivals.

Works Cited Graf, Mitche. Power Marketing, Selling, and Pricing: A business Guide for Wedding and Portrait Photographers, New York, USA: Amherst Media Inc., 2009. Print.

Landsburg, Steven. Fair Play: What Your Child Can Teach You About Economics, Values and the Meaning of Life, New York, USA: Free Press, 2010. Print.

Thompson, Arthur 2012, Strategy: Core concepts and analytical approaches (2nd Ed.). PDF file. Web.


Cryptography, Asymmetric and Symmetric algorithms Research Paper scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Abstract This paper presents a detailed study of asymmetric and symmetric encryption and decryption algorithms by focusing on the operations, the strengths, and weaknesses of the RSA and Data Encryption Standard (DES) algorithms.

The best characteristics of DES and RSA algorithms can be combined to form a hybrid encryption algorithm to provide the desired properties of message integrity, authentication, and non-repudiation.

Cryptography According to Curtin (2007), cryptography is the study of the mathematical methods used to develop algorithms which are used for secret writing to enforce message authentication, integrity, and confidentiality.

Cryptography enables the detection and prevention of cheating and malicious activities (Akl


Daoism and Its Influence in the Modern Chinese Culture Proposal college admission essay help

Introduction Daoist ideas expressed by Tao Yunaming have developed overtime and still have strong influence over the communist system in China. Specifically, this system of religious thought originated from Asia continent.

Several authors have developed a comprehensive table of events on the development of Daoism philosophy. In analyzing Daoism in China, Tao brings about the question of legitimacy of the different ideologies in the then free Chinese society1.

Tao asserts that issue legitimacy ensures stability of the society. Therefore, the religious power can only be fully exercised in accordance with the deities and beliefs endorsed in the light of principles and ideals acceptable to common human reason.

This deity framework tolerates as well as respects others of different opinions2. Hence, this provides a particular explanation for the diversity of traditions in the sundry China society and form the basis of the research.

The fundamental ideas from the public Chinese Daoism religious culture can be interpreted into social conception of the ideal sages that differentiate the dualist existence of hell and heaven3.

It was freestanding since its content was set out independently of the comprehensive doctrines that members of Daoism culture affirmed. This led to overlapping consensus in which each reasonable daoist affirmed the religious law from within own perspective4.

Thus, this reflective treatise attempts to explicitly review the development of Daoism philosophy in the present culture of Chinese and the concepts of sages, deities, hell and heaven, and Confucian discourse.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Hypothesis Null Hypothesis: Daoism culture has greatly impacted on the current sages, deities and Confucian discourse associated with the modern Chinese culture.

Alternative Hypothesis: Daoism culture has not impacted on the current sages, deities and Confucian discourse associated with the modern Chinese culture.

Methodology This research will utilize empirical research since a lot of literature on Daoism has been captured by many authors. The works of Jing, Kohn, Lai, and Zhuangzi on Daoism will provide the relevant secondary material for the empirical study.

Series of views and approaches adopted by these authors will be reviewed with the intention of providing a complete understanding of Daoism and its influence on sages, deities, hell and heaven, and Confucian discourse associated with the modern Chinese culture.

Since the orientations in the Daoist tradition balances the contrary extreme habits to maintain beneficial friendship despite assuming a compromising ground for religious actions, it is necessary to establish the link to modern Chinese culture.

There are specific deities and sages that define what is ideal and the contrary. These beliefs create a standard and uniform ground from which all members are in a position to accomplish morality in more or less the same approach.

Topics to be covered

The historical perspective of Daoism.

The boundary that exists between the Buddhist religion and Daoism thought in the unstable, tenuous, and difficult to identify Chinese culture.

The philosophical orientation of Daoism on semi divine and divine links within the traditional Chinese religion.

The development and transformation of Daoism that venerated different deities that climaxed with unique interactive hierarchies.

The ‘common religion’, literary aspects and mystery as components of Daoism.

Research Timeline

We will write a custom Proposal on Daoism and Its Influence in the Modern Chinese Culture specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Bibliography Jing, Daode, Tao Te Ching. Web.

Kohn, Livia. Daoist Dietetics: Food for Immortality. London: Three Pine Press, 2010.

Lai, Karyn. An Introduction to Chinese Philosophy. London: Cambridge University Press, 2008.

Zhuangzi, Tse. Chinese Cultural Studies: Zhuangzi Chuang-tse. Web.

Annotated Bibliography Jing, Daode, Tao Te Ching. Web.

In his comprehensive reflection, Jing (2013) adopts deontological approach which base wrongness and rightness on intrinsic characteristics, with consequences being a negligible influence on the same.

Jing notes that the legitimacy of Daoism beliefs has led to acceptability of the deities and religious roles that are internalized in the norms of the Chinese society.

Jing concludes that the moral standards of the Daoism tradition answer the questions on freedom and equality in the Chinese society.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Daoism and Its Influence in the Modern Chinese Culture by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Kohn, Livia. Daoist Dietetics: Food for Immortality. London: Three Pine Press, 2010.

Kohn (2010) strongly believes that highest morals rest on deity and sage systems which allowed mankind to undertake actions in the backdrop of peak morality or moral worth often based on origin priority of the Chinese culture.

For instance, when the underlying Daoism religious belief command plan originated from the opinionated inclination of a senior individual in the society, the results would basically be aligned towards self contempt.

Kohn further reviewed the categorical and hypothetical imperatives of the Daoism to understand its metamorphosis within the unique Chinese culture of the time.

Lai, Karyn. An Introduction to Chinese Philosophy. London: Cambridge University Press, 2008.

Lai is philosophical and very sophisticated in clarifying what the society might consider the ideal religious culture of the Daoists. Among his listed examples include experiencing pleasure, being honored, being healthy, and having beneficial friends.

However, he is much interested on foundation of each of these good actions. Therefore, excellence in this case is the average between duo extremes; deficiency and excess.

Lai presents a philosophical definition of virtue since there is not universal formula that can remain the same for interpretation of Daoist philosophers.

Zhuangzi, Tse. Chinese Cultural Studies: Zhuangzi Chuang-tse. 2013. Web.

Zhuangzi builds what is commonly referred to as ‘ethics of common sense’ and is actively functioning on self realization and naturalism.

Zhuangzi looks into the good will, proper motive, first and second categorical imperatives, and immorality as a component of irrationality in his philosophical reflection on Chinese philosophy.

Zhuangzi covers the aspect of good, happiness as part of moral significance, good character, practical wisdom, ontology and axiology, pleasure, and contemplative faculty as part of his ethical Chinese philosophy on Daoism.

Bibliography Carr, Michael. 1990. “Whence the Pronunciation of Taoism?” Dictionaries 12:55–74.

Cohen, Gerald. 1989. “Gung Ho Revisited, Part 1″. Comments on Etymology 29.3:1–42.

Gallagher (trans.), Louis J.; Trigault, Nicolas (1953), China in the Sixteenth Century: The Journals of Matteo Ricci, Random House, New York (Only snippet view on Google Books). Girardot, N. J., James Miller and Liu Xiaogan, eds. 2001. Daoism and Ecology: Ways within a Cosmic Landscape. Harvard University Press.

Hu, Jiajian. 1999. “Chinese Romanization in Library of Congress Cataloging”. Illinois Periodicals.

Jing, Daode, Tao Te Ching. 2013. Web.

Kohn, Livia. Daoist Dietetics: Food for Immortality. London: Three Pine Press, 2010.

Kratochvil, Paul. The Chinese Language Today. Hutchinson, 1968.

Lai, Karyn. An Introduction to Chinese Philosophy. London: Cambridge University Press, 2008.

Zhuangzi, Tse. Chinese Cultural Studies: Zhuangzi Chuang-tse. Web.

Footnotes 1 Livia Kohn, Daoist Dietetics: Food for Immortality (London: Three Pine Press, 2010), 67.

2 Zhuangzi, Tse. Chinese Cultural Studies: Zhuangzi Chuang-tse. Web.

3 Karyn Lai, An Introduction to Chinese Philosophy (London: Cambridge University Press, 2008), 45

4 Jing, Daode, Tao Te Ching. Web.


South Africa vs Venezuela Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

The essay explores the major concerns for a South African FDI planning to invest in Venezuela. Despite the exciting potential investment in Venezuela, some of the concerns evident include varying financial systems, potential agency problems, and political risks.

The essay will first compare South Africa’s and Venezuela’s corruption percentage index followed by an overall political risk of both countries.

In both the developed and the developing world, the most credible and appropriate tool used to measure the level of corruption in the public sector is the corruption perception index (CPI) (Aguilera 2009).

This tool is used to determine the corruption percentage index of an economy. In regards to the current CPI statistics, South Africa has a CPI of 4.9 while that of Venezuela is 1.9.

The diagram below compares the corruption index of both countries as provided by Transparency International (2011).

Figure 1: CPI comparison for South Africa and Venezuela

From the figure above, Venezuela is more corrupt country compared to South Africa. The current findings show a slight decrease in the ranking of CPI. For example, in 2007-08, South Africa had a CPI of 5.1 while Venezuela’s CPI was 2.0 (Radwan


Critical Analysis of Greece Report college essay help near me

Introduction Globalization is instrumental to the current economic trends in countries all over the world. These include the intra-industry trade, which brings together or connects the world through the sharing of ideas, technologies, and trade markets among other things.

According to Ricardo’s theory of comparative advantage, countries trading with each other benefit a lot from one another (Zhang


Technology and Leadership Analytical Essay essay help site:edu

Table of Contents Introduction

The Influence of Instructional Design Principles and Theory



Introduction Instructional design is the usage of a methodical style to provide a solution to an instructional challenge. It starts with the identification of the challenges facing learners and then establishes whether an instructional method provides the most efficient solution (Wagner, 2011).

Such solutions apply appropriate technology and theoretical approach to learning. This essay undertakes an evaluation of the role of instructional design principles and theory on the ability to make rational decisions regarding leadership and learning.

The Influence of Instructional Design Principles and Theory Leadership is geared towards the conception of ideas for the future, formation of calculated priorities and building an atmosphere of trust between and inside organizations.

Good leadership is a progressive development and requires inspirational influence and the ability to attract a loyal following. Implementation of technology in education, particularly the use of computers and related technology has witnessed rapid growth.

The use of such material penetrates all aspects of human life (Wagner


English Literacy Lessons for Australian Students. When Theory Meets Practice Analytical Essay essay help: essay help

Introduction: The Art of Teaching Literacy Teaching students the English language is one of the demands of the Australian curriculum, which is relatively hard to meet. The students should not only display keen abilities to read and write in English (Winch, 2002), but also to be able to make a conscious choice between their skills when solving a particular problem (Australian Curriculum, 2013a).

By combining both theory and practice, teachers can help their students develop the required skills, such as the skill of communicating their ideas clearly, as demanded by the Australian Curriculum (Australian Curriculum, 2013b).

However, to integrate reading and writing, teachers will have to solve a number of issues regarding phonetics, grammar and syntax, especially when it comes to the choice of the theory (Tompkins, Campbell


Developing and learning new information Exploratory Essay best college essay help

An individual’s personal skills are based on their determination to develop and learn new information. The close connection between the amount of knowledge and the way it is used brings about positive results.

There are several work habits that must be adapted and they relate to the personality type someone has. The technology has made it possible to learn from a distance. A person can familiarize themselves with a culture, people or economy of a country being in a different place altogether.

If it is a structured way of learning and someone is taking courses in a different country while staying in their native nation, they must develop a schedule and routine that will allow for effective learning.

Any distractions must be set aside and the learning time must be treated as a classroom where all the focus is directed towards the course. As people often work in groups and teams, an individual might have to adjust and organize themselves according to the individuality of others. They must pay close attention to the learning style and interests that other people have.

A key to being successful in a group is to be understanding of others and be ready to offer a helping hand in a way of explanation, cooperation and participation. The internet skills are connected to learning and especially, distance learning. The search for information is available and easy to conduct, but the filtering of the needed information will take time.

There are many websites that contain false or inexact information and so, credible sources are the key to a well informed information search. Social networks have made communication through internet much easier, but ethics and moral codes must be the guidelines in the said communication, being free of disrespectful and hurtful behavior.

University of Phoenix and other online libraries are a great resource for academic articles and books. The collection of all the needed scholarly articles and journals in one place make the information search practical and quick. When using online sources the copying of information must be extremely controlled (Davey, 2008).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Often, it is very tempting to use someone else’s work as your own and people will change the wording or structure of the information in the hope to pass it as their own. This must be avoided as it does not provide an individual with any knowledge and becomes impractical in the long run. Educational institutions have a strict policy towards plagiarism and suspension is not uncommon.

The vast amount of information in the libraries, online and books purchased outside of educational institutions create a helpful tool to determine the future career choices and goals of an individual. It is much easier to focus and structurize the work and information load when short term goals are specific and immediate. It is better to start with something that is attainable, so that the result can be seen almost immediately.

This will encourage the person to continue work as the success can be seen right away. When setting long term goals a plan of action must be outlined. Sometimes, it is difficult to foresee the circumstances that will lead to the future personality and skills development but a general outline and plan will be helpful. A schedule and the return to the original plan will determine the progression of work.

The recording of information and setting up a framework of practical usages will help guide an individual through the achievement of long term goals (Davey, 2008). Time management is one of the most important aspects of both short term and long term educational and career plans. As soon as a task is received a person must familiarize themselves with it.

The longer someone has to think over the tast, the better prepared they will be and the more thoughts they can develop. If everything is left to the last moment, the comprehension of concepts will be limited and the person will not be able to see the overall picture.

The perspective and conceptual thinking can only develop with the passage of time and so, any information that can be known about the task must be learned before the serious work begins. Plan of action and an outline of the future work will also help structurize the work and distribute the work load, so that there is no hasty and low quality work that in the end becomes unproductive or ineffective.

When familiarizing yourself with the information, a person has to sometimes go through a large amount of information. Often, the information presented is unrelated to the matter that is being studied or must be grasped in a short amount of time.

We will write a custom Essay on Developing and learning new information specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More A scanning reading technique where a person can go through great amount of reading in a shortest period of time must be used. The search for key words and focus on the first sentences of a paragraph can prove helpful, since the most important points are focus of the primary information search and the details are learned later (Hasserbroek, 2009).

One of the most interesting discoveries about learning was through communication between brain cells, axons, through their synapses. It was thought that there is a physical connection between each axon that was needed for the transfer of information. In reality, there is a gap between the end of the axon, its tip and the dendrites of the next axon. Chemicals are being released by one axon and they float to the receptors of the next axon.

All the chemicals that are produced, neurotransmitters, are a sort of boats that carry their own information. Those chemicals that were not absorbed by the receiving axon, return to the source, the sending axon and are recycled. The amount of repetitions of the chemicals being sent, determines the strength of the signal.

If a person wants something in a minor way, the signal is sent once or twice and the receiving axon does not respond in a major way. But, in case the signal is repeated constantly, the axon is bombarded with chemicals, thus causing a conscious response from a person. This is what determines the cognition of a person. It is still unclear how a person’s mind or brain can hold so much information.

It has been supposed that a person has unlimited potential. An amazing fact is that such a small entity as a cell can hold so much information and have significant energy to send impulses that affect the whole body.

All the systems and different parts of the brain are connected and studies have shown that trauma to a certain area will compensate the lost part. There are also cases when the loss of a connection between the brain divisions has led to loss of speech, cognition, memory and senses.

Reference List Davey, G 2008, The International Student’s Survival Guide, SAGE, Thousand Oaks, CA.

Hasserbroek, C 2009, Communication Sciences Student Survival Guide, Cengage Learning, Clifton Park, NY.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Developing and learning new information by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More


The film Kramer vs. Kramer directed by Robert Benton Report (Assessment) essay help online free: essay help online free

This paper is aimed at discussing the film Kramer vs. Kramer directed by Robert Benton. In particular, it is necessary to examine the way in which the concept of family is portrayed in this movie. Much attention should be paid to such issues as gender roles, the responsibilities of parents, and other questions that are of great interest to sociologists.

This analysis will be based on books and scholarly articles which can throw light on the contemporary understanding of family. One can say that this film is aimed at challenging many of the stereotypes about the roles that men and women are supposed to play. Moreover, this cinematographic work reflects some of the main changes that took place in post-industrial societies.

For instance, one can refer to the growing economic independence of women. Certainly, this movie can be viewed as the only source of information on the transformation of family. However, the questions explored by film-makers are of great importance to sociologists. This is why it can be examined more closely.

On the whole, the film highlights the idea that modern families are not governed by specific gender rules according to which partners have to stick to some specific tasks or responsibilities that can be imposed on them by the society.

For instance, the conflicts between Ted Kramer and his wife Joanna indicate that both spouses should take equal parts in the education of children. The film-makers present a dramatic and emotional portrayal of a modern family. However, they also attempt to question many of the traditional perceptions of this notion. Overall, this notion can be described as a group of people who feel attached to one another.

However, they do not want to disregard their ambitions and self-interests. This is the meaning of family that can be derived from this cinematographic work. The film-makers want to show that the conventional stereotypes are not applicable to the contemporary families. For instance, the authors show that males are able to act as effective parents.

Additionally, this movie demonstrates that the members of a family are not necessarily oriented toward some common goal. In most cases, they are driven by the need to fulfill their talents and ambitions.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More These are some of main messages about families are made explicit in Kramer vs. Kramer. Currently, these messages are examined in many empirical or theoretical studies that are supposed to examine the effects of social or economic changes on the experiences of individuals or households.

It is possible to discuss several important scenes which can throw light on the roles and responsibilities within families. At the beginning, it seems to the viewer that this movie will portray a conventional nuclear family. One should bear in mind that Ted Kramer is an advertising executive, while Joanna is primarily responsible for the upbringing of their child Billy (Benton 1979).

Ted is concerned with an important task to which he is assigned. In turn, he is utterly astonished by the news that Joanna leaves him. This scene is an important element of this movie because at this point, the viewers can see that this family is no longer a nuclear one. To a great extent, Joanna’s decision can be explained by her discontent with the idea that her life can be reduced to the role of a housewife.

This is one of the details that can be identified. One can say that this situation illustrates the changes that began to take place in the post-industrial world. As a rule, researchers focus on the conflict between family well-being and equality (Gerson 2009a: 226).

In turn, the idea of equality includes the ability to achieve personal fulfillment. Joanna does not want to be deprived of this opportunity. This is one of the motives that affect her behavior and her perceptions of family.

Moreover, scholars argue that women are much more concerned about the psychological and economic risks depending on their spouses (Gerson 2009b: 160). These are some of the issues that are frequently overlooked by men many of whom do not want to reject conventional stereotypes about gender roles (Gerson 2009b: 160). This is why Ted fails to understand why Joanna chooses to leave him.

The main characters can be described as ‘the children of the gender revolution’ or people who were born during the period when many gender roles were re-evaluated (Gerson 2009d:103). Many of these people aspired for equality, but their expectations were often disappointed (Gerson 2009c: 189). Thus, family members should be able to place themselves in the position of their relatives in order to help them and resolve conflicts.

We will write a custom Assessment on The film Kramer vs. Kramer directed by Robert Benton specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Additionally, one can look at the scenes that depict Billy’s relations with his parents. It should be kept in mind that Ted has to assume the role of a single parent, while Billy does not understand why his parents are no longer able to live together (Benton 1979). This is the question that he asks his father. This boy believes that he is the underlying cause of their divorce (Benton 1979).

This scene is also important for the discussion of this movie because it can show how children can be affected by divorce. Very often, they blame themselves for the quarrel of their parents. In the long term, these self-accusations can result in significant psychological problems. Thus, this movie shows that parents must make sure that their ambitions do not produce adverse effects on their children.

This is one of the responsibilities that should parents should be aware of. If they overlook this issue, they will face various problems in the future, especially at the time, when children or adolescents begin to think more critically. This is the main pitfall that should be avoided by parents who consider the possibility of divorce.

This film can also throw some light on such an issue as parenting responsibilities of men and women. Much attention should be paid to the courtroom scenes during which lawyers of Ted and Joanna attempt to show that one of them is more suitable for the role of a parent. These scenes can represent some of the arguments related to the functions that both parents have to perform.

To a great extent, this movie shows that both men and women can be suitable for the role of parents. In many cases, the degree of their success depends on their ability to sacrifice their self-interests. For instance, Ted has to search for a different job because he cannot reconcile his role of parent and his role of a senior advertising executive. Yet, one should bear in mind that at the beginning, Ted feels very enthusiastic about his work.

In fact, he can be described as a workaholic. So, the parenting success of a person depends on his/her attitudes, values, and knowledge. This argument is supported by empirical studies which can show that the gender of a parent does not affect the psychological wellbeing of a child (Biblarz and Stacey 2010: 3). At present, this issue is also closely examined by sociologists and psychologists.

Additionally, this film shows that many individuals find it difficult to establish the work–life balance. For example, one can mention Ted’s conversation with one of the senior executives who forces him to choose between his son Billy and his career (Benton 1979).

These difficulties are encountered by a great number of people nowadays. By focusing on this conversation, the authors show that people should attain the equilibrium between their need for professional growth and the need of their children. However, this goal cannot be easily attained. This is one of the challenges should be taken into account.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The film Kramer vs. Kramer directed by Robert Benton by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The conflicts described in this movie can be viewed as indicators of significant social and cultural changes in the community. For instance, for a long time, it has been argued that a family has to include two heterosexual spouses and a child. However, this conception began to be questioned when spouses became economically independent of one another.

Moreover, the relations between characters show that equal educational opportunities can also change the attitudes and values of family members. One should keep in mind that Joanna is a college graduate (Benton 1979). Yet, her knowledge and skills are not applied in any way. So, the improvement in the quality of education can affect many families. This trend is also examined by modern sociologists.

Moreover, one should focus on the transformation of conventional gender roles. This process can be attributed to the growing importance of the feminist movement in the United States. As it has been said before, Joanna is dissatisfied with the role of a person whose activities are related only to household chores and the upbringing of children.

Her attitudes can also be explained by the influence of feminism which implies that women’s roles cannot be reduced only to one particular domain. Additionally opportunities became available to women. As it has been said before, the main characters of this movie can be regarded as “children of the gender revolution” (Gerson 2009c: 189).

These people do not believe in the conventional stereotypes about family. Yet, they do not know what kind of rules or patterns they need to follow. This is one of the details that should be taken into consideration by the viewers.

Overall, Kramer vs. Kramer can be regarded as an excellent dramatic representation of the problems that modern family can encounter. This film shows that the roles and responsibilities are not allocated according specific standards such as gender roles. More likely, the movie shows partners should share their burdens or responsibilities with one another.

For instance, they should take equal part in the education of children; otherwise they will find themselves in conflict with one another. Additionally, this cinematographic works shows that personal or professional fulfillment should be reconciled with the needs of the family. So, this film demonstrates how social changes affect the experiences of individuals. This is why this film is interesting from a sociological viewpoint.

References Benton, Robert.1979. Kramer vs. Kramer. Columbia Pictures. DVD. New York: Columbia Pictures.

Biblarz, Timothy and Stacey, Judith. 2010. “How Does the Gender of Parents Matter?“ Journal of Marriage and Family 72: 3-22.

Gerson, Kathleen. 2009a. “Finishing the Gender Revolution.” Pp. 214-226 in The Unfinished Revolution: Coming of Age in a New Era of Gender, Work, and Family. Oxford, England: Oxford University Press.

——. 2009b. “Men’s Resistance to Equal Sharing.” Pp. 159-88 in The Unfinished Revolution: Coming of Age in a New Era of Gender, Work, and Family. Oxford, England: Oxford University Press.

——. 2009c. “Reaching across the Gender Divide.” Pp. 189-212 in The Unfinished Revolution: Coming of Age in a New Era of Gender, Work, and Family. Oxford, England: Oxford University Press.

——. 2009d. “High Hopes, Lurking Fears.” Pp. 103-23 in The Unfinished Revolution: Coming of Age in a New Era of Gender, Work, and Family. Oxford, England: Oxford University Press.


Ethical Analysis of the Eight Mile Road Hearsay Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Restatement of the Facts

Analysis of the Situation

Overall Analysis of the Solution

Works Cited

Restatement of the Facts I work as a nuclear engineer in the thermal-hydraulic analysis department of a company that builds reactors. During my analysis of a power plant, I had a telephone conversation with an engineer at the Eight Mile Road nuclear power plant about an incident that had occurred at Toledo. The power plant at Toledo had experienced a small over-pressurization.

Consequently, the pressure relief valve opened in order to release steam and to reduce pressure. Unfortunately, the valve did not close, despite giving the indication that it was closed. As a result, the plant’s operator stopped high-pressure injection because of an apparent recovery of the system. However, this action was supposed to be taken only after the primary system had achieved a sub-cooled state.

Based on the data obtained from the power plant, the system was in a two-phase state. Consequently, it lacked adequate capacity to accommodate the termination of high-pressure injection. During the non-injection flow period, significant amount of fluid was lost. Nonetheless, the pressurizer continued to indicate high-pressure level.

According to the operator, the core could have uncovered with the fuel being damaged if the incident had occurred in a reactor operating at full power and significant burn-up. Having spoken to the engineer, I wrote a memo describing the situation to my boss. The boss promised to forward the memo to his superior in order to warn similar plants.

However, the memo was not forwarded since the information was not obtained through an official channel. I was advised to obtain an official memo describing the problem from the engineer at Toledo in order to continue pursuing the issue. Unfortunately, the engineer said that he could not write the memo immediately due to lack of time.

Analysis of the Situation In this situation, my actions had potential effects on several stakeholders. These include me as an engineer, the company that I work for, the employees of the plant, the community living around the plant, and the nuclear industry. I have various types of duties to each of these stakeholders.

As an engineer in charge of thermal-hydraulic analysis, I have a duty to myself to perform my duties to the best of my abilities, as well as, to prioritize the health, safety, and welfare of the public. To the company that I work for, I have a duty to provide information that helps in improving the design and safety standards of all nuclear reactors.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More I also have a duty to the employees working at the plant at Toledo, as well as, the community living around it. In this regard, my duty is to identify potential causes of accidents and to ensure that appropriate actions are taken to address them. To the nuclear industry, I have a duty to serve the interest of the public in order to improve the image of the industry.

Given the sensitivity of the incident at Toledo, I consulted a follow engineer in my department who emphasized the importance of using official communication channels to report imminent accident cases. My colleague stated that I needed to present an official document that describes the situation at Toledo in an objective and truthful manner in order to convince my boss to act immediately.

Since I did not have an official document, I began to explore alternative courses of action, which included the following. First, I could persuade my boss to pass on the memo and to warn other plants of similar designs. In this case, I would highlight the seriousness of the problem in order to convince the boss to act immediately.

Secondly, I could persuade the engineer at Toledo to create time and write the memo immediately since averting an accident is more important than other assignments. This would enable my boss to take immediate action to prevent any accidents. Third, I could ignore my boss and forward the memo directly to other plants in order to warn them of an imminent accident.

This would enable operators of similar plants to take preventive measures in time and avoid nuclear accidents. Fourth, I could go to the plant and investigate the problem. Consequently, I would be able to prepare and submit an official report to my boss to address the situation. Finally, I could write to the industry regulator about the incident and ask for immediate action to be taken to address the problem.

The first course of action is based on the assumption that the boss would change his mind and pass on the memo by considering the seriousness of the problem. However, this might not have been the case if the boss disputed the facts about the incident. In option three, the memo would be rejected due to lack of factual material about the Toledo incident.

Besides, ignoring my boss would strain our work relationship. The fourth option would not work since investigating the incident requires a lot of time. The fifth course of action would be inappropriate since I had not exhausted all internal means of addressing the problem. Thus, I would choose option two to address the situation.

We will write a custom Essay on Ethical Analysis of the Eight Mile Road Hearsay specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Overall Analysis of the Solution The second course of action would be appropriate since the engineer at Toledo would provide facts about the problem to enable my boss to make the right decision. This option fulfills the ethical values of responsibility and integrity. In particular, convincing the engineer to write the memo would enable us to access facts that would enable my boss to exercise good judgment.

Additionally, the facts would enhance accountability, truthfulness, and reliability in my work as I pursue the issue. In this regard, option two would enable me to fulfill my duties to various stakeholders.

For instance, I would be able to provide my company with the correct information to facilitate improvement of safety in nuclear plants. Moreover, it would enable me to fulfill my duty of ensuring the safety of the community living around the Toledo power plant. Thus, I would convince the engineer at Toledo to write the memo immediately. If he refused, I would ask him to request one of his colleagues at the plant to write the memo.

After receiving the memo, I would make recommendations for a change in the design of nuclear plants such as the one at Toledo. The changes would ensure that faulty pressure relief valves are replaced with functioning ones (USNRC). Additionally, I would ensure that all plants have functioning indicators for pressure level and pressure relief valves.

Works Cited Harris, Charles, Michael Pritchard and Michael Robins. Engineering Ethics: Concepts and Cases. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2013. Print.

Robinson, Simon, Ross Dixon and Christopher Preece. Engineering, Business and Professional Ethics. Oxford: Butterworth-Heinemann, 2008. Print.

USNRC. Backgrounder on the Three Mile Island Accident. United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission, 28 Mar. 1979. Web.


Analysis of nuclear engineering topics: Eight Mile Road Hearsay Reflective Essay college essay help near me

Table of Contents Facts

Situation analysis

Generation of alternatives and analysis

Solution and implementation

Works Cited

Facts I work as an engineer at the Thermo Hydraulics Analysis Department of a nuclear power plant. During an analysis of the power plant, I receive a phone call from an engineer at the Eight Mile Road Nuclear Power Plant and he expresses his concern over the current design of the reactor in relation to the pressure valves and indicators.

He describes an incident at a plant in Toledo whereby a pressure relief valve opened to relieve steam and decrease pressure due to over pressurization, but failed to close despite the fact that the indicator stated successful closure. The operator at the plant stopped high-pressure injection owing to an apparent recovery in the system.

The plant was in a two-phase state, thus leading to a lack of capacity to accommodate termination of high-pressure injection. During a twenty to thirty-minute non-injection flow period, the plant recorded significant loss in fluid inventory.

Information relayed in the phone call about the design flow of the nuclear reactor made me uneasy, and thus I wrote a memo to my boss describing the situation and the need to inform other power plants of the possible design flaws. He promised to present the memo to her boss to address the concerns.

Two weeks later, after asking my boss on the progress of the memo, he informs me that her boss saw no need to forward the information to other plants due to the unofficial nature of the information.

He also states that if I desired to pursue the matter, I should obtain official documentation from my colleague stating the facts of the entire incident. I inform the engineer at the Eight Mile Road power plant of the development and request official documentation and he agrees on condition that I provide a two-month window within which he can send the documentation.

Situation analysis In this scenario, my decision is likely to affect several stakeholders. The stakeholders include me, the plant’s employees, the plant’s management, the company, members of the public living within the plant’s vicinity, the environment, colleagues in other power plants, and the nuclear industry.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For instance, the decision may lead to the loss or maintenance of my job, have implications on the safety of employees, indicate the management’s competence in dealing with issues, and affect the company’s expenditure and profits available for stockholders.

My duties play an important role in the consideration of alternatives. I have a duty to myself as an engineer to ensure that I perform my duties to the best of my abilities. The preamble of the National Society of Professional Engineers (NSPE) Code of Ethics for Engineers, 1979, states that as an engineer, I should strive to increase competence and use my knowledge and skill adequately.

I also have a duty to the employees to ensure that reactors at the plant are safe for use through proper analysis and recommendations. It is my duty to the plant’s management to ensure that I notify them of possible faults in the plant’s machinery and give appropriate recommendations as per Section 1(C) of the NSPE Code of Ethics.

The code, under Section 2, states that it is my duty as an engineer to ensure, “proper regard for the safety, health and welfare of the public” (NSPE Para.2). I have a duty to the company to ensure that I safeguard its economic interests and follow the company regulations including avoiding unnecessary lawsuits that may affect the company’s integrity.

My duty to the stockholders involves making decisions that support the making of profits and safeguard their financial interests in the company. Due to the seriousness of the situation’s impact on the operations at the plant, I found it necessary to consult an engineer in my department regarding the appropriate course of action.

Martin (34) expresses the opinion that I should apply a solution that works in the best interest of everyone involved. The right course of action is one that exhibits objectivity and complies with the company’s regulations and code of conduct (Robinson et al. 52). I should convince my friend to spare a bit of time to prepare the official documentation or strive to change the boss’s decision by stating the severity of the situation.

Generation of alternatives and analysis According to the situation, I have several alternatives to work with. First, I may try to convince my boss to reconsider his decision and forward the information to other plants warning them of imminent occurrence of accidents in case the reactors are faulty.

We will write a custom Essay on Analysis of nuclear engineering topics: Eight Mile Road Hearsay specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Secondly, I may try convincing my colleague at the Eight Mile Rod plant to prepare the documentation and send the same immediately as a safety concern to prevent avoidable accidents. My third alternative involves waiting for the colleague to send the letter in two months for further action.

Lastly, I may choose to visit the plant at Toledo and obtain a full report personally, in fulfillment of Section 5 of NSPE code of ethics, which requires opinions founded on adequate knowledge and honest conviction. The first option supports the concept of public safety and safety of employees and would effectively avert accidents in other plants in advance.

However, the option requires the boss to act unethically by going against company regulations and creating possible liabilities from lawsuits if the information is false. The second option complies with the company’s regulations and it would effectively avert accidents in other plants, but it is dependent on the response of the colleague at the Eight Mile Road power plant.

The third option is compliant with the company’s regulations and convenient for the engineer at the Eight Mile Road plant. However, the time delay may have serious implications on the health and safety of workers in other plants and populations living near the plant.

The last option complies with all regulations and it is convenient for the colleague at the Eight Mile Road plant and the company. However, it would require me to sacrifice my time and travel to Toledo and create a report on the alleged incident.

Solution and implementation The last option is the most appropriate in this situation. The solution caters for timely reporting and solution generation. Visiting the Toledo plant would allow me access to first-hand information and provide the opportunity to inspect the faulty reactor.

This move would enable me to write a report based on facts as well as proper analysis with appropriate recommendations for my plant and others using reactors with the same design. In case the information happens to be a rumor, the company would save face and avoid any changes in operations at the plant.

Section 15 of the NSPE Code of Ethics provides that engineers should “cooperate in extending the effectiveness of the profession by exchanging information and experience with other engineers” (NSPE Para.4). This aspect means that visiting the Toledo plant would be ethical and thus would not jeopardize the integrity of any other engineer involved in the process.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Analysis of nuclear engineering topics: Eight Mile Road Hearsay by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The solution requires me to visit the Toledo plant personally, collect information on the incident, conduct inspection of the faulty reactor, and create a detailed report of the overall situation including possible solutions. I would then have to present the same to my boss, who would present the same to his boss, thus giving him a reason to act and forward information to other plants.

Works Cited Martin, Mike. Ethics in Engineering, New York: McGraw Hill, 2006. Print.

NSPE 2007, Code of Ethics for Engineers. PDF File. Web.

Robinson, Simon, Ross Dixon, Christopher Preece, and Kris Moodley. Engineering, Business and Professional Ethics, London: Routledge, 2007. Print.


Food in Mexico Report best college essay help: best college essay help

Food Cultures and Science in Mexico Mexico is a country located south of North America. It is bordered on the north by the United States, on the south and west by the Pacific Ocean, and on the east by the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Sea. The country has a moderate climate characterized by low-lying coastal areas and has pleasant summers and mild winters.

The country’s rainy season falls between May and September while the hurricane seasons occur between May and November. The country has 113 million inhabitants and was originally under the reign of Spain.

Food availability in Mexico According to GAIN (2010), we can only talk about food security when every single individual has access to food. Although research generally indicates that food availability in Mexico does not present a serious danger, there are places in Mexico where food access has been a real concern.

In 2008 for example, close to 20% of the Mexican people could not access food due to lack of sufficient income and this greatly affected productivity (GAIN, 2010). Despite food being available to feed all, access has always been dependent on an individual’s purchasing power.

As noted by Gilman (2011), some of the best foods in Mexico are accessed from stalls along the streets and in the market places. Although eating food obtained from the streets may appear strange to some visitors, it is quite normal for an average Mexican. This notwithstanding, Mexicans are content with food obtained from the streets and the market. They are, therefore, not about to stop getting food from these locations (Ochoa, 2001).

For many citizens, these foods are fresh and dealers are equally considered healthy and very neat. Restaurant owners are known to conduct their food businesses with so much care and integrity to the delight their customers. In addition, most people prefer eating processed foods though they still go after fresh food as has been the tradition from the early days.

Locally produced foods include peas, dry beans, walnut, sunflower, sweet pepper, and tomatoes. Mexicans import foods such as honey, dried herbs and mushrooms, roasted coffee, and cheese, to name but a few.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Staple food, how it is served and what are the common food sources? According to Gilman (2011), the most common food source in Mexico is corn or what is commonly known as maize. It is normally prepared either as flat bread also known as tortilla or as corn stew, usually referred to as pozole. Also available are fruits and vegetables such as green tomatoes, mangoes, papaya, and avocado.

These are eaten alongside the main meals. Meat is also obtained from chicken and pigs as well as from breeds of cattle including Corrientes and French Charolais.

In their cooking, Mexicans use garlic, chili, almond, clove, and cumin to add flavor to their cookery. This is further improved using various natural ingredients. Other familiar foods are seafood, frijoles or beans, and frijoles refritos or refried beans, and spiced coffee which is made using a mixture of spices.

What are the common food preparation methods? In preparing their food, Mexicans tend to use a combination of methods. Deep and stir frying are the most common. Deep frying involves placing the food in a deep pot filled with cooking oil. Among fried foods are dessert puffs and chicken cheese crisp.

What spice is commonly used in food preparation? Mexican food is made using spices such as almond, cumin, and chili. As has been mentioned elsewhere in this paper, Mexican food is traditionally made out of maize or corn and beans and is mainly prepared by deep or stir frying. Although many other types of food are available and can be accessed at will, the limitation is usually the purchasing power (Tucker and Buranapin, 2001).

What are the main macro and micronutrients and what sources? Different foods contain different nutrients. Macronutrients such as protein and carbohydrates are obtained from corn, pigs, and meat from Corrientes or French Charolais breeds of cattle. Micronutrients on the other hand are obtained through fruits and vegetables such as verdolaga and huazontle. Common fruits include guava, mango, and guanabana.

Although most Mexicans have stuck with traditional foods for so long, many people also enjoy eating fast foods which mostly supply carbohydrates and fats. Other foods such as chicken soup are prepared specifically for those the sick. Some people have, however, argued that the preparation of Mexican food depends on what one wants to prepare. The preparation is also tied to the historical origins of the Mexican people.

We will write a custom Report on Food in Mexico specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More What is their food culture and health implication? According to Geddes and Paloma (2000), Mexicans suffer from a number of ailments as a result of their food culture and traditional beliefs that have been carried forward from generation to generation. It is common to come by people dying from illnesses such as cancer, diabetes, and obesity caused by poor eating habits. It is absolutely necessary for people to change their eating habits and drop some of the unhealthy eating practices.

Apparently, poverty is also to blame for the bad food culture in Mexico (Long


Written Communication and Critical Analysis Marion Enterprise Proposal best college essay help

Problem Statement Data is important to manufacturing companies like Marion Enterprise. It is necessary in critical areas of the business such as human resource, production and the organization’s inventory. Data is useless without consistent updates.

The research problem is to investigate office ergonomics of the data entry center in this organization. The other issues that will be examined are the establishment of an anthropometric database and possible hazards employees overlook in the data entry center. The study will however major on the first issue.

Justification Ergonomics is the science that examines how capable people are taking into account their physical and mental limits in relation to the tools, machines and equipment used in the course of their work. Office ergonomic is a specialty that focuses on the environment of the office worker.

There has been an increase in interest by people towards the specialty because of an upsurge in the use of computers and disorders associated with them (Wisha Services Division (WSD), 2002). The specialty is critical since some of the signs associated with poor ergonomics such as fatigue and pain reduces the productivity of workers (CBS, n.d).

Treatment of disorders occasioned by poor ergonomics in an office environment is costly in terms of finance and time lost whenever an employee takes leave (Health and Safety Executive (HSE), 2013). The worst part is a reduction in the normal pace of work in a department where an employee is based. For this organization, the entry of data will be slowed which may affect the ability of the organization to get real-time data.

Topics for investigation The workstation

Data entry operators spend many hours during the working days in their workstation. The workstation will be the first area to be investigated for any ergonomic flaws. It consists of the office furniture such as the chairs, tables and computers that the data entry operators use directly as they carry out their work. All these aspects will be examined (Workers Compensation Board (WCB), (2007).

The computers used by the data entry operators

Computers are the key equipment used by data entry operators (Occupational Health Clinics for Ontario Workers Inc, 2008). They will be investigated to ascertain how ergonomic they are to their users. In the investigation, computer parts such as mouse, keyboard and the monitor will be assessed on ergonomic adjustability.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Anthropometric data

The research will also determine the feasibility of establishing a database for anthropometric data. The data will be useful for management when purchasing equipment for the data entry operators after recruitment. Problems related to ergonomics in computer equipment will reduce significantly in the data entry center that will be expanded (National Occupational Health and Safety Commission, 1991).

Hazards with sharp edges

All the furniture in the data entry center will be examined to establish whether they have any sharp edges that the employees often lean. This action by the data entry operators only appears harmless initially but leads to certain disorders such as slow blood circulation and damaged nerves (Texas Department of Insurance, n.d).

Repetitive motions

The operational nature of data entry operators will be looked at to assess the possible effect they have on the workers developing disorders. All repetitive motions will be noted so that a possible intervention can be formulated.

The intervention will be a scientific one, and its impact in improving the office ergonomics of the data center has to be monitored after periods specified to ensure effectiveness Health and Safety Authority (HSE), n.d).

Working space

The available working space in the data entry center as compared to the staff who works there will be examined. The examination will seek to reveal the sufficiency of the available space. Appropriate recommendations will then be made (Environmental Health and Safety (EHS), n.d).

Preliminary methodology and potential resources The research will gather data about all the areas mentioned earlier using the following methods. Interviews will be conducted to the data entry operators on specific areas on different areas of their workstations.

Structured written questionnaires will follow the interviews as a way of verifying most of what has been given orally in the interviews conducted. Observations will be made on the workstations and computers and information obtained compared to recommended office ergonomics (University of Wisconsin Eau Claire, n.d).

We will write a custom Proposal on Written Communication and Critical Analysis Marion Enterprise specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The anthropometric data will be sought for reputable databases available online. The results of a feasibility study for setting a company anthropometric database will be determined by the diversity of the staff in the organization.

Work schedule The research will be conducted for a period of two weeks. During the first week, data will be collected from the data entry center. The collection through interviews will be done in the first hour of each office day in order for a period of three days to minimize disruptions to normal work.

The remaining two days of the week will be used by the research team to gather data with written structured questionnaires. The second week the first working day, the team will observe the workstations of the data entry operators. The other two days will be for analyzing the data, and the last two will be utilized in preparing the report.

References CBS. The advantages of ergonomics. Web.

Enviromental Health and Safety (EHS). Ergonomic workstations guidelines. Web.

Health And Safety Authority (HAS). Ergonomics in the Workplace. Web.

Health and Safety Executive (HSE). (2013). Ergonomics and human factors at work. Web.

National Occupational Health and Safety Commission. (1991). Ergonomic principles and checklists for the selection of office furniture and equipment. Web.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Written Communication and Critical Analysis Marion Enterprise by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Occupational Health Clinics for Ontanrio Workers Inc. (2008). Office ergonomics handbook. Web.

Texas Department of Insurance. Office Ergonomics. Web.

University of Wisconsin Eau Claire. Data Collection Methods. Web.

Wisha Services Division (WSD). (2002). Office ergonomics. Practical solutions for a safer workplace. Web.

Workers Compensation Board (WCB). (2007). Office Ergonomics: think detection:think prevention: think activity. Web.


Demoralizing Tobacco Case Study college application essay help

Introduction The federal government of Canada has been very aggressive in dealing with the challenge of tobacco smoking in the country. Tobacco use and nicotine addiction have been a major challenge in healthcare management and public administration in Canada.

A section of Canadian citizens are opposed to smoking and feel that the government needs to take stern action on tobacco industry for its role in high nicotine smoking and addiction rates. According to Health Canada, tobacco and nicotine addiction are some of the preventable factors that predispose people to diseases, yet the public administration is doing very little to improve the situation.

Anti-smoking groups in Canada have suggested that the federal government needs to roll out a campaign to demoralize the tobacco industry, as there is an urgent need to reduce the rate at which people are smoking tobacco. However, the biggest challenge lies on the government’s readiness to roll out such a campaign, whether it will be successful, and the necessary legislation for effective implementation.

To achieve success in such a campaign, it is important for the federal government to ensure that both its communication systems and social marketing strategies are effective enough. I believe that the Canada’s federal government is ready to roll out a demoralization campaign, for its tobacco industry.

Discussion According to Health Canada, reducing the use of tobacco in Canada will lead to healthier people, who will enjoy better quality of life. Tobacco and nicotine addiction is a challenge in Canada, but Health Canada officials believe that the situation is reversible, as quitting the habit does not have a timeline.

The demoralization campaign on the tobacco industry is a good idea, and its success elsewhere provides enough motivation to the government. Demoralization of the tobacco industry has successfully worked in the states of Florida and California in America.

This is not the first attempt that the federal government of Canada intends to make in reducing the prevalence of smoking in the country. Over the last four decades, the government has implemented numerous legislations that have greatly reduced smoking rates. The timing of the demoralization campaign is right, as there is need to improve the health status of people, and empower them economically.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More According to government statistics on smoking in Canada, a big percentage of the population belongs to low social and economic classes, and has the highest smoking rates. There is an opposite relationship between education and income, in that people with low education levels are likely to have little income. This has direct impact on the social behaviors they pick, and their ability to manage the effects of those habits.

Therefore, most health complications related to tobacco smoking apply among low-income earners. Economic empowerment would greatly help in reducing the rise in rates of tobacco smoking. A demoralization campaign by the government would help in public education and awareness creation about tobacco, and the effects of nicotine addiction.

Public education and awareness creation will definitely make a difference in smoking rates, as people will become more conscious of both their health and economic prospects. A demoralization campaign will also motivate people to seek more responsibilities in an effort to attain the common good.

Everyone has an ethical duty to ensure the attainment of the common good, by looking out for the welfare of others. Tobacco smoking has effects on both active smokers and the passive smokers. Tobacco smoke contains dangerous chemicals that easily initiate cancer in active and passive smokers.

Effective public administration entails coordination between various government agencies and the private sector. Running a high profile campaign to demoralize tobacco in Canada can result to both legal and public complications. The Canadian federal government says that high rates of smoking in Canada are negatively affecting the national economy and welfare of citizens.

Running a demoralization campaign will lead to complications because of conflicting interests. There is the need to uphold the rule of law, and the economic aspect of having the tobacco industry.

From one perspective, the tobacco industry is boosting the national economy of Canada through tax revenue and job creation for its people, while on the other hand the tobacco industry is affecting the economic potency of most citizens who are slowly getting addicted to the habit of smoking tobacco.

We will write a custom Case Study on Demoralizing Tobacco specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Smoking in public is not a very sociable thing for someone to do, thus the need to improve people relations when in public places or gatherings. The positive aspect of a demoralization campaign on the tobacco industry is that it will make people feel guilty and socially unlikable when they smoke, especially in public.

A demoralization campaign on the tobacco industry in Canada needs to focus on youths aged between 18 years and 35 years. According to statistics by Health Canada, this age group is the most affected in terms of nicotine addiction and health complications. The reason why the campaign needs to focus on this group is that they are at their active stage in life, when they need to use their energy and time to achieve economic empowerment.

Most nicotine addicts in Canada belong to the low economic class, as they tend to miss crucial opportunities in life because of their habit. Although this could be the main target group for the demoralization campaign, it is important for the government also to consider the group that starts smoking at early teenage, albeit the number being very small.

Managing the challenge starting with this group can be an effective long-term strategy, as their peers will have no one to influence them into smoking tobacco. The demoralization campaign would also be very effective if it focused on the role of parents, caregivers, and learning institutions in the fight against increasing rates of tobacco smoking.

The demoralization campaign ought to pass educative messages that create awareness about tobacco and nicotine addiction, as well as messages that discourage people from envying the disastrous habit. People need to learn about various components of nicotine, how they affect the human body and effective ways of detoxification.

Canadian population needs to develop the right attitude about tobacco and nicotine addiction, by understanding the nature of operations in the industry and its products. Campaign messages also need to focus on ways that passive smokers can positively influence their friends into quitting the habit.

Secondary smokers have a crucial role to play in the success of the demoralization campaign. The best time to air, the campaign is during prime time when there are more viewers, as well as during school holidays when most young people spend a lot of free time on various media.

It is important for the federal government to engage other partners in this campaign, as the challenge of nicotine smoking goes beyond public administration.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Demoralizing Tobacco by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The government needs to engage the services and resource capacity of non-governmental organizations, community-based organizations, and faith-based organizations. Other essential partners in this campaign are civil society organizations, and peer counselors. These partners would complement the efforts of the government in the campaign, which is mainly policy formulation and implementation.

Conclusion The demoralization campaign on the tobacco industry is a very good idea by the Canadian federal government. Owing to the fast-rising rates of smoking and nicotine addiction in the country, it is necessary to educate people about the health and legal consequences of engaging in the habit. In addition, it is important to create an impression on people that smoking is not a socially acceptable behavior, especially when done in public.

Demoralization campaigns help in reducing smoking rates by generating guilt among smokers for what they do, especially in public places. Demoralization campaigns ought to be manipulative in nature, and hard-hitting to influence people into reflecting about their habit and making considerations about quitting.

The federal government needs to develop legislations that will regulate the use of nicotine in the country in terms of the age limit for possession of tobacco, and the right places for smoking.

People need to develop an attitude for promoting ethics and the will to attain the common good through their social life. It is the responsibility of everyone in Canada to stop the problem of tobacco and nicotine addiction, by supporting the government in the demoralization campaign.


Advertisement «Refresh on the Coca-Cola side of life» Report (Assessment) college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Nowadays, it became a commonplace practice among advertisers to go about increasing the commercial appeal of the advertised products by the mean of emphasizing the pathos and ethos related subtleties of these products’ discursive positioning.

The reason for this is simple – by taking advantage of this specific advertisement-strategy, advertisers are able to ensure that the conveyed commercial message is fully consistent with the targeted audience’s unconscious anxieties, in relation to the promoted product/service. In this paper, I will explore the validity of the above-suggestion, in regards to the poster ‘Refresh on the Coca-Cola side of life’, chosen for the analysis.

The poster in question features the opened bottle of Coca-Cola with a drinking straw inserted in it. The straw itself is shown extended beyond the poster’s spatial boundaries in the direction of one of the windows on the wall – hence, creating a visual illusion, as if the apartment’s resident is in fact able to take sips out of the bottle.

This, of course, creates objective preconditions for onlookers to spend more time, while observing the poster, because when exposed to it, they get to experience the sensation of a cognitive dissonance.

One of the poster’s most striking features is the fact that it organically incorporates the appeals to logos, ethos and pathos.

Its appeal to logos is concerned with the textual message ‘Refresh on the Coca-Cola side of life’, which establishes discursive parallels between the advertised product, on the one hand, and the notion of ‘refreshment, on the other. Nevertheless, it is specifically the poster’s strongly defined appeals to ethos and pathos, which make it memorable.

The first of these appeals is concerned with the fact that, while observing the poster, potential consumers are able to confirm the validity of the idea that Coca-Cola is indeed a high-quality product. After all, if it was not the case, people would not go as far as trying to drink the promoted beverage by the mean of inserting a straw into the product’s one-dimensional depiction.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In other words, the discussed element of the poster’s design serves the function of convincing people that doubting the advertised product’s high quality, on their part, would prove highly unreasonable. Consequently, this is expected to provide them with yet additional stimulus to consider purchasing it.

What also adds to the poster’s ethos-related appeal is that the featured image is culturally relevant, within the context of the affiliated socio-cultural settings. After all, it subtly hints at the sheer industriousness of the individual, which supposedly succeeded in taking advantage of the poster’s proximity to his or her apartment.

Yet, as we are well aware of, in America one’s endowment with the sense of industriousness is considered reflective of the concerned individual’s existential worth. Therefore, there can only be a few doubts that the discussed poster is indeed adjusted with what happened to be the essence of main existential drives, on the part of the majority of Americans.

The poster’s appeal to pathos is concerned with its ability to trigger a variety of emotional responses in onlookers. In its turn, this has been accomplished by the following:

The poster prompts people to experience the earlier mentioned sensation of a cognitive dissonance – when observing it; they do spend some time assessing the de facto possibility of what is being depicted. As a result, the image ends up being ‘engraved’ in their minds.

This, of course, points out to the fact that the poster’s designers we well aware that, in order for a particular advertisement-message to be memorable, it must necessarily be emotionally charged.

The poster conveys the message of ‘realness’, in regards to the advertised beverage. In its turn, this is supposed to lessen the acuteness of onlookers’ awareness that, while exposed to the advertisement in question, they are being psychologically manipulated.

We will write a custom Assessment on Advertisement «Refresh on the Coca-Cola side of life» specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This, of course, implies that while designing this particular advertisement-poster, its creators remained thoroughly aware that the process of ‘seeing’, which takes place in people’s minds, is highly subjective.

The poster addresses one of main unconscious anxieties, on the part of potential consumers – specifically, their deep-seated desire to perceive the surrounding reality, as such that can be transformed by the sheer strength of their willpower. In this respect, a certain parallel can be drawn between what accounts for the power of the poster’s appeal, on the one hand, and the power of just about any organized religion’s appeal, on the other.

In both cases, the advertisement/religious message’s recipients are encouraged to consider the possibility that there is indeed a good reason to believe in the possibility of ‘miracles’. This once again substantiates the legitimacy of the earlier suggestion that the design of the concerned advertisement-poster is culturally appropriate.

After all, it appears discursively consistent with the fact that, as of today, the so-called ‘moral majority’ (consisting of bible-thumpers) continues to exert a considerable influence on the societal dynamics in America.

Because there is an undeniable element of ‘silliness’ to the poster in question, the conveyed advertisement-message helps onlookers to suppress their fear of aging. The rationale behind this suggestion is quite apparent – by finding the earlier mentioned ‘silliness’ amusing, people do realize themselves being cognitively related to the qualitative characteristics of a youthful living.

Consequently, the induced workings of their unconscious psyche convince these people that the very fact that the discussed poster appeals to them, signifies that they are rather ‘young at heart’ – regardless of what happened to be their actual age.

There are also cultural connotations to the above-suggestion – the poster in question appears thoroughly consistent with the discourse of ‘youthfulness’ in America, which causes many elderly citizens in this country to mimic the act of young people.

In light of the earlier provided analysis, it will be fully appropriate, on our part, to suggest that the poster at stake will indeed prove an effective tool for increasing the promoted beverage’s commercial appeal. This simply could not be otherwise, because it does not simply feature the appeals to logos, ethos and pathos, but combines them organically – hence, creating a powerful cognitive effect.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Advertisement «Refresh on the Coca-Cola side of life» by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Moreover, this poster also exploits a number of culturally relevant anxieties, on the part of the targeted audience members, which in turn causes the promoted message to be particularly memorable in both: cognitive and perceptual senses of this word.

I believe that the deployed line of argumentation, in regards to the discussed subject matter, is fully agreeable with the paper’s initial thesis. Apparently, there is indeed a good reason to expect the poster ‘Refresh on the Coca-Cola side of life’ to never cease attracting people’s attention, as an imaginative and psychologically sound advertisement-piece.


Deepwater Horizon Oil Spill Research Paper writing essay help

Table of Contents Abstract






Abstract The Deepwater Horizon oil spill started in 20 April 2010. It resulted in the death of 11 people. In addition, it damaged the marine ecosystem. BP owned the off-shore oil drilling facility.

The Deepwater Horizon oil spill resulted in the release of approximately 5 million barrels of oil into the sea. There was unrestricted flow of oil into the sea for almost 3 months. A massive explosion caused the oil to spill into the sea. BP capped the oil rig on 15 July 2010.

Thousands of workers were involved in various activities to remove the oil from the environment. This exposed the workers to various toxic chemicals found in oil. Benzene is one of the major toxic compounds found in oil (Freudenburg


The Challenges of Women Veterans of Nevada Essay college essay help: college essay help

The war leads not only to the death casualties but also to the huge number of physical and moral invalids. The moral trauma is one of the main problems of the war veterans. However, we should pay closer attention to the challenges which women veterans face when they come home. The community should recognize the responsibility of providing help to these women and of creating the conditions favoring their reintegration.

This essay is devoted to the challenges of women veterans of Nevada which have been discussed on the radio program “State of Nevada” recently.

The topic of the “State of Nevada” program broadcasted on the radio on 17 October 2013 was “Nevada’s Women Veterans Face Challenges”. The situation in the state shows that the society pays insufficient attention to the problems of women veterans.

According to the statistical data, “between 2008 and 2010 alone, 14 female veterans committed suicide in Nevada” (“Nevada’s Women Veterans” n.pag.). These figures make us thinking that the women who come back home from the army face difficult moral problems which many cannot cope with by themselves.

The participants of the program were Michelle Wilmot, army veteran, artist and writer; Yvonne Betron, marine veteran and coordinator of women veterans’ programs for Nevada Depart. of Veteran Services; Ray Scurfield, psychotherapist, fellow of Combat Stress Board of American Institute of Stress, and founding director of VA National Center for PTSD (“Nevada’s Women Veterans” n.pag.).

The participants discussed the problems which women veterans faced when they left military as well as the roots of these problems. All of them emphasized the mental problem and crisis which women went through when they returned home.

It was mentioned that a large number of women veterans had high rate of homeless and suffered from the economic distress and this rate was significantly higher than the rate of the male veterans (“Nevada’s Women Veterans”). In addition, women suffered from the domestic violence (“Nevada’s Women Veterans”).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Explaining the reasons for this differences, Yvonne Betron stated that the female veterans faced with much more challenges when they came home than the male veterans (“Nevada’s Women Veterans”). In particular, women coming home from military had to return to their home duties immediately.

“They cannot wait for a couple of months to become a mother again or to become a wife”, Yvonne said (“Nevada’s Women Veterans”). This put moral pressure on them. Essentially, the majority of people were not able to adapt to such harsh changes soon.

Furthermore, the angry and overexcitetion which they experienced in the army needed time to be overcame. Yvonne said that the women had to, so to say, “jump into life” after servicing in the military forces. However, the life posed even more obstacles to them.

Michelle Wilmot, telling about her own experience, said that the severe injustice she faced while being in Iraq was so ridiculous for her that she did not have a resolution as a result (“Nevada’s Women Veterans”). Michelle mentioned the racial discrimination and sexual abuses in her combat. She said that “people came to power they could not control” (“Nevada’s Women Veterans”).

The reintegration of the female veterans with the community was a difficult process. Yvonne said that the problem was that some women veterans did not seem themselves as the veterans when they came from army. This was a serious problem because they did not recognize the fact that they needed help and often did not obtain it.

Ray Scurfield gave his own view on the situation stressing that the mental problem which female veterans faced was that they felt no purpose, they did not know for what they lived.

He added that they suffered from trauma from both enemies and comrades and when they came home, they saw that the society did not care of what they had been through; they felt forgotten, unrecognized, and did not felt accepted (“Nevada’s Women Veterans”). These factors explained the significant rise in the suicide acts which had been already called the epidemic of suicide.

We will write a custom Essay on The Challenges of Women Veterans of Nevada specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Ray also told about the challenge which women faced while being in horizon. He said that they suffered from abuse very often and they had to cope with the negative and sometimes disdainful attitude of male soldiers to women in the army. The lack of support the women felt was hard to be overcame easily by them.

However, the common efforts of the social organizations are necessary to the solving of the female veterans problems. As Michelle emphasized, “the reintegration is the community issue” (“Nevada’s Women Veterans”).

In order to summarize all above mentioned, it should be said that the program “State of Nevada” touched upon a rather serious social problem of the women veterans’ adaptation to the ordinary life after servicing in army. The participants of the program gave their views on the situation and explained the challenges which women veterans faced when they came home.

They stressed that these challenges should not be seen as their own problems, they were the problems of the community as a whole and the community was responsible to provide aid to the female veterans.

Works Cited “Nevada’s Women Veterans Face Challenges”. 17 October 2013. Web.

“Nevada’s Women Veterans Face Challenges”. State of Nevada., KNPR, Las Vegas, 17 October 2013. Radio.


Investigative Report on Health IT Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Health IT and Patient Health Issues

Dealing with Patient Safety Issues

Australian Literature and Health IT Problems



Introduction Over the years, the recognition of health IT as an essential requirement for improved delivery of health care services has continued to grow quite hysterically. Also referred to as health information systems, health IT has so much to offer as far as patient health care provision is considered (IOM, 2012).

It is thus imperative to completely do away with the traditional approach to medical problems so as to realize a radical transformation in the medical sector. Embracing the use of technology will boost the performance of the health sector in terms of research, production of medicine, diagnosis, treatment, and follow up.

This paper considers various aspects of health IT as well as patient safety concerns in relation to the use of information technology.

Health IT and Patient Health Issues Patient safety is a subset of medical study that looks at the use of safe techniques by health care providers in the course of delivering health care services to patients (Reason, 2000). The goal of patient safety in heath care delivery is usually to win the confidence of patients regarding the use of health IT.

An assumption by many health care providers is that health IT improves the effectiveness of medical diagnosis as well as treatment and consequently the safety of patients (Savage


Competitive Advantage of Universal Weather and Aviation Asia Pacific Company Report cheap essay help

Introduction Overview

Universal Weather and Aviation Company was founded in 1959 by the late Tom Evans. The founder was often commended for his visionary foresight to establish an all- inclusive service provider in the flourishing aviation industry. Universal Weather and Aviation Company is the first company to offer support services for businesses and private flight operations.

Initially, the company started by updating pilots on weather reports. However, the company later expanded to include a range of other vital services considered necessary by business aircraft operators. These services include: provision of over flight permits, flight paths, cargo handling services, cookery and hotel and accommodation (Universal weather, 2013, p. 1).

As part of the company’s global strategy, Universal Weather and Aviation Company began to expand globally by opening regional offices in Asia, Europe, Latin America and Africa. Global expansion was a holistic approach to the needs of the clients across the borders. Regional offices outlined the company’s strategy and programs in the competitive market.

The strategy included: localization of services; global expansion; high touch to local clients; formulating and matching products and services with the needs of each market segment; and decentralization of services (Universal weather, 2013, p. 1).

With the modest growth in the international market as well as the increasing number of new entrants in the market, the company is currently facing stiff competition. The product line offered are based on the segments from which revenues are generated.

The company is divided into four segments offering distinct services. These segments include: Trip Support Services (TSS), Fuel Reselling (UVair), Fixed Base Operations (FBO) and Trip tools (Universal weather, 2013, p. 1).

Report Purpose

The purpose of this report is to explore Universal Weather and Aviation Company’s competitive advantage in the Aviation industry. The report will identify some of the challenges affecting the company’s competitive advantage and devise solutions based on the principle and practices of operations management. The most commonly used tool for assessing companies’ competitive advantage is SWOT Analysis.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More SWOT Analysis of Universal Weather and Asian Pacific, Inc. SWOT analysis is an instrument that is often used to assess an organization and the environment. SWOT is an abbreviation for Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities and Threats. SWOT analysis is commonly used in business studies to explore the existing conditions in order to come up with possible solutions or strategies of addressing both internal and external challenges.

The main objective of SWOT analysis is to have firsthand experience of the problems facing the company and gain knowledge concerning probable developments and potentials.


Universal Weather and Aviation Company is one of the top providers of flight service and operates an extensive network of ground support facilities found across the globe. With over 5 decades of experience, widespread quality control systems for monitoring clients, and the global network, the company has been able to provide the best ground support services to its clients.

The company also has advanced software which is incorporated into the aircraft to facilitate communication between the pilot and the control room (Universal weather, 2013, p. 2). Universal Weather and Aviation Company also boast of their own software development.

With an Asia centric office, Universal Asia Pacific usually provides a higher level of technical and customer support for Asian clients. On the development of navigation software, Universal Asia Pacific can also act as an extension arm to gather the latest and complete flight path allowed and open by each Asia countries’ respective civil aviation regulatory boards (Universalsalvation, 2013, p. 1).

In addition, the company has a UV air Fuel Management System and devoted team of global based fuel experts to ensure that customers gain from the UVair card in handling ensuing fuel expenses.

The card is valid in over 4000 destinations across the globe and offers reasonable prices for the card holder. Additionally, the company has an operational headquarter in Singapore to take care of the needs of the Asia Pacific market (Universal weather, 2013, p. 2; Collier


The Role of Animality in Constructing Frederick Douglass’s Identity and the Issues of Liminality in best college essay help: best college essay help

During the era of slavery, the white slave owners living in the Southern states of the USA were inclined to discuss black slaves as the beings taking the transitional or liminal level of development between animals and humans.

However, in his work Narrative of the Life of Frederick Douglass, an American Slave, Frederick Douglass represents the contradictory vision of the issue, supporting the idea that the white slave owners acted as animals in relation to the black people in many cases because of being ruled by the natural instincts which were not associated with the principles of humanity.

From this point, Douglass provides the discussion of evidences to state that white slave owners can be discussed as more animalized humans than black slaves with references to the point that slave owners can also combine animal instincts with hypocrisy typical only for humans.

Thus, Douglass states that slaves in relation to their identity are more human than slave owners despite the idea that the black people are animalized in their nature because of their origin and race, and that slaves take the specific liminal stage between humans and animals; moreover, Douglass refers to his own experience, human attributes, spirituality, and intellectual qualities to support the argument.

The significant role of discourses on the issues of animality and liminality is emphasized by Douglass on the first pages of his narrative because the author describes the challenges of the constant thinking over this problem. Thus, Douglass states, “I have often wished myself a beast. I preferred the condition of the meanest reptile to my own. Any thing, no matter what, to get rid of thinking!

It was this everlasting thinking of my condition that tormented me” (Douglass 35). Douglass concentrates on the problem of being a slave and on the conditions associated with the slave owners’ perceptions of the blacks as animals because these conditions prevent the blacks from perceiving themselves as humans equal to the whites.

Douglass compares himself and his life conditions with the life of a beast not because of identifying himself as the inferior being, but because of opposing to the life of slaves discussed as animalized humans.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Douglass pays attention to the fact that the black slaves are perceived as brute animalized humans not because of their actions and rule of instincts. The white slave owners, who are in a lot of cases can be compared with a ‘snake’, are more animalized in their behaviors towards slaves (Douglass 53). The slave owners expect that the blacks can act as animals ruled by instincts while demonstrating violence and their brutal nature.

Although slaves can focus more on their instincts and not to use their intellectual abilities actively, they are not animalized. Being afraid of the blacks’ animal nature, the white slave owners demonstrate the absence of humanity in their actions and the use of physical violence, tortures, and the power of pain against slaves.

Douglass claims that slave owners “had much rather see us [slaves] engaged in … degrading sports, than to see us [slaves] behaving like intellectual, moral, and accountable beings” (Douglass 70).

From this point, the fear rules the white slave owners in their actions against the blacks. That is why, following Douglass’s narrative, it is possible to state that the ability of people to demonstrate brutality and the fact of being at the liminal stage does not depend on the race or status.

Referring to Douglass’s identity, it is possible to note that the author emphasizes his being at a rather high stage of the intellectual development as the argument to refuse the ideas of animality or liminality in relation to his personality. Thus, Douglass accentuates his “intellectual nature” and intentions to escape from slavery because of the “injustice of … enslavement” (Douglass 88).

This enslavement is the result of the white people’s unjust discussions of the problem of animality and the role of the blacks in the process.

Nevertheless, Douglass’s descriptions of the white slave owners’ attitudes to the blacks and his discussions of such personalities as Mr. Covey only support the controversial idea that the problem of liminality is characteristic more for the whites who lost their dignity and qualities as humans (Douglass 53).

We will write a custom Essay on The Role of Animality in Constructing Frederick Douglass’s Identity and the Issues of Liminality in “Narrative of the Life of Frederick Douglass, an American Slave” by Frederick Douglass specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Following the evidences and facts presented in Frederick Douglass’s Narrative of the Life of Frederick Douglass, an American Slave, the reader can state that people can degenerate because of experiencing the constant tortures, but the persons who realize these tortures are more inhumane in their nature.

If the animalized persons can be determined with references to their behaviors ruled by instincts and their violence, the concept of race is not the important factor to discuss the idea of animality.

From this perspective, brutal and impulsive white slave owners who rape and torture the blacks and who cannot control their instincts and desires can be discussed as more animalized in their nature in comparison with the black slaves because slaves have to demonstrate their violence only as the reaction to the experienced pressure.

Works Cited Douglass, Frederick. Narrative of the Life of Frederick Douglass, an American Slave. USA: Wilder Publications, 2008. Print.


A Journey to the Disneyland: From Oswald to Cinderella. Walt Disney and His Personal Demons Analytical Essay a level english language essay help

Walter Disney and his life have always been a mystery even to the contemporaries, not to mention the researchers of the XXI century.

A creator, innovator, and genius, on the one hand, and a panic-stricken perfectionist, on the other hand, Disney had a number of issues, which were predisposed by the cringe inducting factors that Disney was exposed to throughout his entire life, which such theories as the Five-Factor Model of Personality, Intrapsychic Factors (Interpersonal Theory) and Neurobehavioral Dimensional Model may help define.

By taking a closer look at some of the peculiarities of the environment in which Disney lived at different stages of his life in, one can possibly define the source of the major disorders that Disney had, as well as spot the manifestations of these disorders in some of the works of the great animator.

As it has been stressed above, the research is going to be carried out with the help of such theories as the Neurobehavioral Dimensional Model, Intrapsychic Factors, which belong to the Interpersonal Theory realm, and to Five-Factor Model, which can be described as one of the subcategories of the Theory of Personality Disorder.

Granted that the theories listed above have been tested a number of times and are considered full-fledged basis for conducting significant researches nowadays, it is important to keep in mind that, according to Lenzenweger and Clarkin, first, a number of factors affecting the psychological development of an individual have not been defined, and, second, due to the unique reactions that an individual may display when coming into contact with certain factors (Lenzenweger


Apple Inc Decision Making Process Report essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Apple’s SWOT Analysis



Introduction Apple Computers was founded by Steve Wosniak and Steve Jobs in 1976. In 1996, the Company was transformed to Apple Inc. under Steve Jobs. Its products were highly sophisticated non-PC electronics. By 2010, it became a competitive mobile and PC devices vender.

In 2009, its PC market share was 8% in the United States. In 2010, Apple’s market share was $220 billion. Apple’s success is rooted over its constant innovation and wide marketing.

Its quality products, such as the computers and tablets, have enabled the company to expand fast, despite the stiff competition in the industry. Apple conducts thorough promotions under its slogans, such as “think different” and “the greenest lincups of notebooks”.

Apple has a wide target market. It includes education sector, home users, industrial and business sector, creative groups and young people. Apple has its stores all over the world trying to enhance customers’ accessibility in such a way.

Apple shops are staffed by skilled individuals who help customers get and enjoy Apple’s experience. Apple shops also provide their customers with opportunity to choose between different products and services (Janko, 2012).

Apple’s high innovativeness has made the company stand a stiff competition in the industry. It faces a lot of competitive pressure concerning its differentiated products. Some of the major competitors are shown in the table below.

Apple’s major competitors

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Apple’s SWOT Analysis Like any other company, Apple has its own strengths and weaknesses. This paper analyses each and every capacity of the company to invest in decision making process.

Apple’s strengths are based on several factors. Innovativeness is Apple’s core strength. The company’s wide researches in technological field make it stand out from the other companies in the market as the pioneer in the industry.

Apple’s Mac, iPhone, iPad and iPod are produced with a lot of high technology innovation. Apple has also created a good brand name in the market. Apple brands are known and easily recognized across the world (Lashinsky, 2012).

Due to the strong brand image, ‘Apple culture’ has been created and promoted among loyal customers. The company is always involved in active research and implementation of new developments. Its researches are carried out by highly skilled workforce.

Apple offers its employees continuous education and constant organization improvement. Consequently, Apple stores across the world are aesthetically designed to appeal to the customers. Lastly, Steve Jobs was a genius, which made the company rise to such a height (Lashinsky, 2012).

Apple Inc. still enjoys a lot of opportunities in the field. The company has good relationship with most players. This allows joint ventures and sharing some ideas. Consequently, the company plays in gradually growing industry.

Mobile and PC industry is growing fast because there is an ever-rising demand for its products. Apple also has the capacity to meet the ever-changing demands in the market. Subsequently, Apple has a strong basis for expansion in Asia, Europe and Africa.

We will write a custom Report on Apple Inc Decision Making Process specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Apple production of energy is efficient because it is cloud based, moreover, its music products keep it a head among competitors in meeting customers’ demand (Schneiders, 2012).

On contrary, Apple has some weakness in its production. Apple TV and Mac Mini seriously suffered a blow in the market. The products sent a bad picture of Apple that is why the company lost many customers.

Compared to the competitors, the company’s products are highly priced, which lowers its competitive advantage. Consequently, The Apple has a small market share as compared to its competitors’ ones.

Finally, there are many risks facing the company, that’s why it should not rely too much on the innovative and management power of one person (Yukl, 2010).

Despite its tactics, Apple is threatened by high competitors in the market. Giant players like Nokia, Dell, Samsung, HP, Toshiba and Lenovo offer stiff competition in the industry. The company also suffers from high pricing against its competitors.

Consequently, Mobile and PC industry is very dynamic that calls for constant innovation. As result, cost of maintaining market demand is very high. Some of Apple products become less competitive in the market due to their incompatibility with Windows platform (Janko, 2012).

Apple has many stakeholders. Some of the stakeholders, such as shareholders and employees, operate directly within organization. Apple also has its manufactures and subsidiary companies with their subsequent employees.

It has the music industry, which enables it to develop music products. The company has various software developers who assist in its production.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Apple Inc Decision Making Process by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Apple Inc. attracts customers from all over the world. Other stakeholders include their lenders and suppliers. Apple enjoys good relationship with its stakeholders due to its well-structured operating system (Robbins


HRM Strategies Description Analytical Essay best college essay help: best college essay help

Introduction Human resources managers are continuously encountering heightening challenges in managing people while working as HR practitioners in multinational or transnational companies in the wake of globalisation.

Srivastava and Agarwal (2012) assert that HR “managers are facing many changes in the present business scenario like globalisation workforce diversity, technological advances, and changes in political and legal environments coupled with the need to embrace information technology” (p.46).

These challenges exert immense pressure on the HR functions of seeking effective strategies of recruitment, training, developing, and retaining the most talented personnel within a global organisation characterised by tremendous workforce diversities.

This paper explores two main challenges encountered by HR managers operating in multinational or multi-transnational companies. These challenges are associated with globalisation coupled with challenges and opportunities of communication and information technology affecting HR functions.

Challenges of HR in of the age of globalisation Overview

From political and economic perspectives, globalisation refers to the markets, legal, and political denationalisation. It leads to the integration of financial systems coupled with trade markets.

Globalisation exposes HR to various challenges including the establishment of unfamiliar laws affecting HR functions, differing work ethics, attitudes, communication challenges due to language barriers, competition, and differing managerial styles in the quest to have people work effectively in a bid to attain the goals of a transnational or multinational organisation.

In the light of this realisation, Srivastava and Agarwal (2012) assert, “HR managers have a challenge in dealing with more functions, more heterogeneous functions, and more involvement in the employees’ personal life” (p.46).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Among the different challenges encountered by HR, while working in globalising transnational or multinational organisation, is integrating people from different cultural backgrounds, which presents the leadership challenge in global organisations’ HR functions.

Globalisation and management of workforce diversities

As organisations globalise, the HR department recruits, trains, and seeks to retain people from diverse cultural and ethical backgrounds.

Effective management of people from diverse cultural backgrounds calls for HR managers to put extra effort and look for strategies of mitigating cultural conflicts within a global organisation.

Dessler (2004) argues, “The importance of diversity management has been communicated by academics and professionals alike, citing the many benefits of having a heterogeneous organisation as opposed to a homogeneous organisation” (p.43).

A homogenous organisation is a non-diversified organisation while a heterogeneous is diversified organisation, which means that it employs people of varying backgrounds in terms of race, age, physical abilities, and geographical regions among other factors.

Inferring from this argument, a globalised or transnational organisation is an independent organisation.

Globalisation poses a significant challenge the HR, which is the challenge of effective management of diverse employees.

We will write a custom Essay on HRM Strategies Description specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Scholars note that a good management of workforce diversity should have the ability to improve workforce productivity, improve workforce engagement, and foster reduction of staff absenteeism coupled with a decrease of workforce turn over (Dessler 2004).

For instance, at Google Company, workforce diversity management is critical in the endeavour to increase the ability to address the various needs of more diverse Google customer base.

Particularly, Google gains from the valid viewpoints of its diverse workforce for such a workforce provides increased problem-solving capacities coupled with enhanced creativity levels, something that is critical for the success of the organisation in the future of the unknown changing business environment.

This aspect exemplifies the increasing challenges of HR to deploy diversity as a source of competitive advantage as opposed to a cause of organisational failure due to diversity conflicts.

A growing body of literature reveals that a direct correlation exists amongst employees, attendance, job performance, dedication, and perception of being valuable resources of an organisation.

According to Pope, “if management and team members fail to value women and minorities, company productivity will likely suffer as a consequence” (2004, p.63). This assertion infers that mismanagement of workforce diversity translates to affecting an organisation’s costs.

In this context, organisations that do not support diversity existing in their workplaces are likely to plunge into expensive lawsuits and out of court settlement cases, which are contributed mainly by poor management of various talent pools.

Additionally, globalised organisations are susceptible to costs linked to replacement of employees (Jayne


The Instructional Power of Game-Based Learning and Simulation in Education Essay (Article) best college essay help

Abstract Psychologists have often emphasised the need to incorporate games in school curriculum as a way of giving learners opportunity to develop in all aspects of the curriculum.

According to them, these games offer learners an avenue to release their mental tension resulting from rigorous academic engagement. Previous studies have also indicated that the learning process can be made more enjoyable to learners when games are incorporated in the learning process.

This dissertation examined the instructional power of game-based learning and simulation in education and sought to provide insight as to whether game-based learning would be an emphatic method that could be used for teaching and learning.

Many scholars have argued that game-based learning stirs up a sense of motivation on the side of learners regarding their learning process. Therefore, this study explored the distinct features of game-based learning which learners consider to be interesting / absorbing.

The findings of this study showed that the use of game-based learning as an instruction method is very effective in the teaching / learning process. It has the ability to relieve learners of their boredom since it is engaging and provokes learners’ interests.

Besides, its experimental nature allows learners to participate fully in the class work. This means that teachers need to design teaching content that incorporates games since the latter provide a practical learning approach which helps learners to memorise most of the content learnt.

The study also recommends that educators tasked with the design of the curriculum should give great emphasis on instructional methods that allow teachers to incorporate games into the teaching content.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Introduction With the increasing use of technology in the classroom, many educators are exploring the use of instructional methods that would enhance their teaching and students’ learning.

Educators acknowledge the fact that pedagogical practices need to embrace the learning opportunities available in the modern learning environment where learning tools such as computers, the internet, graphics, fantasy tools, and so on are available.

They also acknowledge that learners’ learning behavior has changed and therefore more learning materials have to be used in the learning process so as to boost their learning motivations and learning experiences.

Consequently, many educators have embraced game-based learning with the aim of motivating learners in their learning process. A number of games have been incorporated in a range of instructional approaches for educational purposes.

Psychologists argue that there is a positive relation between students’ learning and having fun (Glasser 1998). Fun is regarded as a fundamental determinant of human behaviour.

According to Glasser (1998), students are delighted in what their educators ask them to do since it allows them to have fun during the learning process. Game-based learning enables students to learn by practice; hence, they get engaged in the entire learning process.

Similarly, games reinforce learner motivation. The main reason why games are considered to be motivating is the fact that participants in the game are obliged to source for the relevant information that can enable them meet the challenges presented by the game (Chiong 2010).

We will write a custom Article on The Instructional Power of Game-Based Learning and Simulation in Education specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In addition, some brain researchers have noted that the inclusion of fun in the learning process boosts the memory ability of the students as the contents that they are taught stick for long in their memory (Strauss 2010).

Games are seen to complement the role of the teacher in the classroom; making learning fun and enjoyable. For example, video and computer games allow students to simulate situations such as experiments, scientific, and historical events for themselves.

Similarly, they motivate students, who otherwise are weak in some subject areas by allowing them to encounter ‘real problem’ and devising ways of how to solve it. Besides, the increased use of games in classrooms has contributed to students’ development in other aspects of their personal life.

Hence, skills such as patience, discipline, critical thinking skills, problem solving among others, are learned with the use of games.

The study therefore sought to determine the effectiveness of game-based learning in schools, its influence on students’ motivation, and other factors of motivation associated with game-based learning.

Methodology In order to achieve the objective of the study, the researcher adopted a mixed methodology by incorporating both qualitative and quantitative research methodology.

Quantitative methodology is relevant for categorising the observations or variables, examining the variables and generating statistical representations to analyze the observations. Qualitative approach on the other hand helps generate information that applies to the designated case study.

The researcher therefore sampled 450 students and teachers and sent them questionnaires to gather quantitative data.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Instructional Power of Game-Based Learning and Simulation in Education by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The questionnaire items comprised two major categories including the demographic part and the Likert-scale items and closed-ended items seeking to gather views of the respondents on the study topic.

The Likert-scale questionnaire contained 10 items and the other part also contained 5 closed ended items.

237 respondents (52.6%) of the expected 450 respondents completed the questionnaires. Female respondents were 142 and male respondents were 95. Many respondents were from the age group 40-49 years (43%, n=101).

This was followed by respondents in the age group 30-39 years (24%, n=57). The third largest age group was 50-59 years which had 55 respondents (23%).

The age group under 30 years had the lowest number of respondents (10%, n=24). These results were analysed using SPSS and correlation analysis.

At the same time, the researcher sampled 20 students who were engaged in 13 weeks of game-based learning. Each game-based lesson lasted 30 minutes. At the end of the intervention period, the researcher engaged the participants in an interview.

The interview questions sought to answer the questions ‘why?’, ‘how?’, and ‘what?’ as regards the subject of the research.

Results Survey results

Respondents were issued with questionnaires in order to give their responses regarding the instructional power of game-based learning and simulations in education.

The results showed that the mean for the effectiveness of game-based learning was 113.20, with a standard deviation of 14.30. From this computation, it can be deduced that many students and teachers believed that game-based learning is incredibly effective.

This is indicated by the high value of the standard deviation. The mean and standard deviation for the other relationships:

the influence of game-based learning on motivation;

the impacts of game-based learning on students’ learning;

other motivating factors connected to game-based learning and instructional power, are also shown in table 3.1 below.

Table 3.1 Summary of descriptive statistics

Study question Mean Standard deviation Effectiveness of game-based learning 113.20 14.30 Influence of game-based learning on motivation 102.12 11.30 Impacts of game-based learning on students’ learning 103.10 10.80 Other motivating factors connected to game- based learning and instructional power 127.20 15.30 Inferential statistics were also calculated and the results showed

strong correlations between the influence of game-based learning on motivation and instructional power (r = 0.598, p < 0.01),

other motivating factors connected to game-based learning and instructional power (r = 0.585, p < 0.01),

effectiveness of game-based learning and its instructional power (r = 0.386, p < 0.01),

between impacts of game-based learning and instructional power (r = 0.268, p < 0.05).

Table 3.2 Summary of the inferential statistics

Study question Pearson Correlation Sig (2-tailed) Effectiveness of game-based learning 0.273 0.044* Influence of game-based learning on motivation 0.598 0.000** Impacts of game-based learning on students’ learning 0.268 0.042* Other motivating factors connected to game- based learning and instructional power 0.585 0.000** Note:

*= p<0.05, **= p < 0.01

Interview Results

The results of the interview also provided some valuable insights.

First, a large majority (n=16) of the students who were interviewed responded that they really enjoyed their learning when it was game-based.

The students liked the idea of sourcing information on their own as well as corresponding to their peers as they engaged in problem solving situations.

However, the remaining four students responded that their learning motivation did not change even with the introduction of game-based learning. They were mainly motivated by the need to attain excellent grades.

Two, it was noted that game-based learning was quite engaging especially with respects to aspects of team work, competition between teams, and the feedback received from the instructor.

Game-based learning provided an enjoyable ambience to them as it promoted strong social connection among the students.

Three, the use of game-based learning helped the students to gain interest in their learning as it enabled them to search for information by themselves instead of relying mainly on the notes provided by the teachers in the classroom.

Besides, it allowed them to actively participate during the learning process. Fourth, factors such as the aims, desires, and goals of the students were found to be the other motivating factors for the students to work hard in their class work.

Discussion Psychologists emphasise the integration of games in the school curriculum as a way of helping students develop in all their faculties. Besides, games provide students with an avenue to release their mental tension resulting from rigorous academic engagement.

The research has shown that the learning process can be made more enjoyable by using games as part of the learning activities. They also add value to learning as they encourages conceptualising imagined phenomenon to real life experiences.

In addition, when effectively used, games can facilitate learning because they enable students to learn important life skills such as problem solving skills, patience, critical thinking skills and discipline among others.

As opposed to traditional learning methods which mainly involve lecture, game-based learning reinforces learning motivation.

The main reason why games are considered to be motivating is the fact that the participants in the game get the opportunity to source for relevant information that can enable them to meet the challenges presented by the game.

Traditional learning method is very much different from game-based learning due to the fact that students do not have to think or be creative as they are given the necessary figures or facts to comprehend the essential ones.

In the future, researchers should look into the various aspects of game-based learning that offer motivation to the students. In addition, the researchers need to come up with the various measures of learning gains as well as the degrees of learning.

Reference List Chiong, R 2010, Programming with games: special issue on game-based learning. Learning Technology Publication of IEEE Computer Society, 12(1). Web.

Glasser, W 1998, Choice theory: a new psychology of personal freedom, Harper Collins Publishers, New York.

Strauss, V 2010, ‘TV, games, iPods vs. school’, Washington Post, 21 January, p. 10.


Dichotomy of the Body and Mind Essay essay help free: essay help free

Table of Contents Introduction




Introduction The dichotomy of the mind is a concept of dualism. The mind exists as a separate entity from the body, thus both can work separately. The mind and body have different effects on each other.

Thus, one tries to gain control over the other. The stronger one eventually overpowers the weaker one and gains control. Both the mind and body are a danger to each other. Despite this, the mind is considered to be positive, while the body is considered to be negative in nature.

Similarities The strength of the two is dependent on which one is stronger. In that case, one overpowers the other. Wong is characterized by dualism. This is the same case with Mr. Yee. Thus, both have two personalities that interact with each other at the same time.

The first mutually exclusive character within Wong is comprised of her spying personality. This is the personality that is able to interact with Mr. Yee’s personality. In Mong’s case, the mind is the privileged aspect of her. It takes precedence of her activities and determines what she does.

Her inferior character is her physical self. Thus, the mind is in control of her physical self. It is the mind that has determined the activities that she is doing. On the other hand, her body represents her physical aspect. It is the negative part that the mind has been able to overcome.

Despite the dangers, Wang has established herself as a spy. It takes many years for her to be trusted by Mr. Yee and be considered as his mistress. Thus, the mind ensured her safety as it controlled the body. The body will be a danger to Wong if it is allowed to gain control over her.

Thus, the mind has been able to sustain her in a dangerous position for a long time and maintained her secret identity.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Mr. Yee is controlled by his physical aspect during his interactions with Wong. It is the dangerous part because it can lead to his assassination. The assassination attempt involves riddance of the physical aspect of Mr. Yee.

It is seen as an effective method as the collaborator will no longer be able to conduct the wishes of his mind. Thus, Wong’s mind has been able to control both her physical aspect and Mr. Yee’s physical aspect.

Thus, the actor and spy have been able to be defined by dualism. There is a dichotomy of the mind because it is able to control both characters

There also exists a similarity at the end when both characters are able to switch their body and mind, a process that can be termed as refiguring. Both characters change the basic aspects of the body so that control is determined by either the body or the mind.

In the actor’s case, her body was able to take control of her mind. This led her to make rush decisions, thus becoming more exposed to dangerous circumstances. It is for this reason that led to the death of her comrades and loss of her life. Thus, the body is a danger to the mind.

It is the mind that ensures control of the body, thus the mind is able to survive within the body. In some cases, the body begins or tries to regain control, leading to dangers and harm to the body.

Women’s bodies are considered as their weakness. Their bodies will easily take over control of their minds, thus their negative part will have power. In Mr. Yee’s case, his mind was able to take precedence over his body later on.

We will write a custom Essay on Dichotomy of the Body and Mind specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This is where he was able to realize that there was an assassination plot against him. Grosz has been able to detail that when a comparison is done between the body and mind, it is the mind that will easily win.

The mind has control over nature, and the ability to reason makes it the primary between the mind and the body.

Differences The spy and the actor have various differences that can be seen because the final occurrence defines whether the body or mind is stronger in both characters. Initially, it can be seen that Wong’s mind is stronger, but the body is able to become stronger.

In comparison, Mr. Yee’s body had precedence over the mind during the beginning of the film. It was later that refiguring occurred. Thereafter, Mr. Yee’s mind overcame his body and he was able to recognize the dangers surrounding it.

Wong’s faults begin when she goes into the domain of sexuality. Thus, the principles guiding her mind receded and she was faced with ambiguity. This realization does not happen in an instant; instead, it arises from a feedback loop occurring between perception and actions.

Personal body actions result from perception and the environmental attributes that occur encourage more actions. Constant sexual encounters within the film result in better understanding of the environment and how the characters are influenced.

Wong fails to remember more details of her initial mission due to the duration of her assignment. She is attracted to Mr. Yee and is tired of her initial task. Thus, she has grown tired of her deceptive ways as the body begins to overcome her mind.

Wong once lived in Shanghai where access to basic needs was difficult. Thereafter, she was able to enjoy a better lifestyle once she moved to Hong Kong. She is wealthy, a consequence of her interactions with Mr. Yee.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Dichotomy of the Body and Mind by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More She has been in her fake position for many years and it has become a ritual to her. Thus, cognition becomes available through these interactions. Reasoning it is not achieved through thought, but through how the environment has influenced the person.

Wong does not think about her past in order to inform her current decisions. Thus, she is not able to play the original duties expected of her. Wong’s changed reasoning results in the application of a modified response. She adapts into her new environment, leading to her demise.

In the scenario above, the mind and body can be related to the human and environment. Thus, Wong is a human who takes over her environment. She is able to control it, but refiguring occurs after a period of time within the environment.

She was controlled by her environment and her decisions were determined by her environment. There are various factors that can result in reconfiguring. According to Grosz, the body is influenced by such factors. In the film, Wong was influenced by sexual desires.

The body acts like a system of meaning and it derives its importance from the environment. Thus, meaning is only achieved through the actions of the body.

Conclusion In conclusion, the general aspects of lust and caution within the movie can be compared to the mind and the body. Caution results from the mind, while lust results from the body.

The body is considered as a negative aspect amongst the two and leads to dangers. In “Lust, Caution”, the spy’s body had greater control over her than the mind, leading to her execution.


The development in Abu Dhabi and Dubai Research Paper college essay help online: college essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Issues and Concerns

Research Ideas and Aims

Research Strategies

Data Collection


Reference List

Introduction Historically, the UAE used to have a variety of issues concerning housing projects. Othman (2008) stresses that numerous projects were unsustainable and inefficient. At present, the governments of Abu Dhabi and Dubai have announced that a number of initiatives will commence (Sheikh Zayed housing programme 2013).

For instance, the government is committed to provide each Emirati family with a proper house (Emirati housing programmes 2013). Eligible Emirati citizens will be able to get more than Dh3bn in loans (Malek 2013). It is also necessary to note that the construction will be held in terms of social, cultural and environmental sustainability (Cityscape Abu Dhabi 2013).

Admittedly, this is a positive initiative that will lead to development and sustainability in the society. For instance, a member of the FNC (Federal National Council), Dr Qubaisi claimed that the housing programme could provide “the society and people of the UAE and Abu Dhabi with stability” (Malek 2013).

It is also necessary to add that such projects as artificial islands reveal the existing trend, i.e. the desire to astonish and attract people. Of course, Emirati people welcome the new initiatives. However, there are certain concerns.

Issues and Concerns For instance, Dubai and Abu Dhabi have been changed considerably. The two emirates have become more modern and efficient. For instance, the city of Masdar can be regarded as an illustration of the government’s commitment. The city is the first carbon-free urban area and it is an example of sustainable development (Stilwell


Water Quality Exploratory Essay cheap essay help

Table of Contents Coagulation and Flocculation





Coagulation and Flocculation These are the initial procedures during treatment of water. Chemical substances possessing a positive charge are added to water in this compartment. The positive charge neutralizes the negative charge from dirt leading to the formation of huge fragments known as floc.

Sedimentation Floc is heavier than other particles present in water. Therefore, this process allows floc to remain at the base of the tank.

Filtration After the sedimentation process, the transparent water at the top of the tank moves across filters consisting of assorted components such as sand, charcoal or gravel. These components have different pore sizes that facilitate the removal of dissolved particles such as dust, microorganisms, and chemicals.

Disinfection Disinfectants such as chlorine are then added to the filtered water in the disinfection compartment to eliminate any remaining contaminant. The chemicals also safeguard the water from germs during storage and transportation to homes.

Storage Clean water is then stored in reservoir tanks from where it is piped to consumers.

In the U.S.A., chlorine is generally preferred as a disinfectant over ozone because it has a residual. The presence of a residual is important because it shows that water contains an adequate quantity of chlorine to kill all microorganisms. It also provides defense against recontamination in the course of storage.

The existence of free residual in treated water is associated with the absence of harmful microorganisms. Consequently, it is an important factor that gauges the potability of water.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In recent years, ozone has been replacing chlorine as the primary disinfectant in the U.S.A. One key advantage of using ozone to treat water is that there are few byproducts released into the water from the process. The release of many byproducts into treated water usually puts such water at risk. During chlorination of water, additional steps are usually required to get rid of these byproducts.

However, ozone treatment of water evades these additional procedures. One other benefit of ozone water purification is that there are no added chemicals that interfere with the natural taste of water. Therefore, the resultant water does not have the characteristic taste of chlorine.

However, ozone treatment of water also has disadvantages. It is thought that this procedure releases little quantities of bromate, which is thought to be a carcinogen. In addition, ozone treatment does not offer any residual effect. Therefore, any harmful organism that endures the oxidation procedure evades the entire treatment process.


Water Quality cheap essay help: cheap essay help

This reflective report analyses New York City’s drinking water quality and the treatment process. The paper identifies the contaminants in New York City water and analyzes these contaminants through a broad spectrum approach.

The New York City Water Report The fluoride contaminant violated the maximum requirement level in the New York drinking water. The fluoride content of 2.2 mg/L in this water is almost double the concentration level of 1.0mg/L as situated by the New York City Health Code.

The calcium contaminant was very close to violating the maximum contaminant levels in the New York City drinking water. The concentration of calcium contaminant was recorded at 5.3 mg/L against an average of between 4.4 and 6.7 mg/L.

Contaminant detected: Nitrate

Name of the Contaminant MCL Physical properties Sources of contamination Health effects Treatment methods Nitrate 0.12mg/L Molecular formula is NO3−. The weight is 62.0049 g/molecule. It is soluble in water. Overspill from used fertilizer. Leakage from water treatment tanks. Sewage runoff. Natural erosion from deposits. Toxicosis: may lead to methemoglobinemia (blue baby) condition characterized by lack of enough oxygen in the vital body organs. May lead to death of animals when the concentration in drinking water over 70%. Oxidation of excess nitrate is necessary in water treatment. The oxidizing agent that can be used is the ozone. The ozone will oxidize all the nitrites in into the less toxic nitrates. Water Treatment Plant Configuration Water in its natural source is often subject to fecal contamination, primarily derived from processes of decomposition of organic nitrogenous material present in water.

While ammonia (ammonium) and nitrites indicate an organic contamination, there are several harmless contaminants present in water such iron and calcium among others. The diagram below represents a typical water treatment plant summarizing the processes involved in water treatment.

Schematic water treatment diagram

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Steps involved in the water treatment Step 1: Screening

The raw water is passed through a sieving screen to eliminate relatively large pieces of foreign material such as rocks, leaves, and sticks. At this stage, Potassium permanganate chemical may be used when the raw water has traces of algal bloom.

Step 2: Coagulation

This involves passing the raw water into a coagulation tank where visible particles that remained after the screening stage are separated and channeled to an ejection tank for farm use.

Step 3: Sedimentation

The water is then moved to a special tank that is designed to allow for any remaining particle in the water to patch up at the base of the sediment tank.

Step 4: Filtration

The dual media in the filtration tank consisting of anthracite and sand ensures that all the visible pollutants are eliminated.

Step 5: Disinfection

Regulated amount of chlorine is passed into the water to inactivate any pathogens that might have passed through the previous steps. At this stage, controlled quantity of fluoride ingredient is added to the disinfected water to reduce incidences of tooth discoloration and decay upon use of this water.

Step 6: Storage and distribution

The fully treated water is then channel to storage tanks for a while before being distributed to the final user.

Conclusion Water treatment is carried out by using special purification equipments that measured the 4 parameters of contamination (nitrates, phosphates, chlorides and sulfur). However, the concentration of each parameter detected varies due to the conditions and flow of water from its source. There are significant differences between the parameters, pH, temperature and dissolved oxygen in different water sources.

We will write a custom Essay on Water Quality


Solving ethical dilemmas in public relations Research Paper best essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Ethical dilemmas in public relations: case study

Possible solutions for case study


Works Cited

Introduction The profession of public relations involves the control and dissemination of information in a corporate setting. It also involves control of information to the public from individuals or a company. The main objective behind this profession is to ensure that the public maintains a certain image of an individual or company’s products, governance, or policies through persuasion (Smith 62).

However, during the process of persuasion, it is important for professional communicators in the public relations field to maintain some level of ethics to prevent tarnishing the very image they hope to create through the dissemination of certain information to the public. Ethics are rules that comprise notions on individuals, corporate morality, and best practices, which are usually dependent on societal views (Seitel 88).

Although most laws do not govern business ethics directly, they provide for the creation of codes of conduct specific to a company or an individual with which the corporate relationship should comply. Ratification of codes of conduct enables a party to have justifiable cause to seek legal redress in case there is a breach of the code of conduct by the involved parties.

Ethical dilemmas in public relations: case study In the case study, the main problem arises from the client’s deceit concerning the independent nature of the scientist testing the products in a bid to ensure a favorable public image of the products to the distributor’s stakeholders. Although the problem is clear, some dilemmas rise in how to deal with the issue appropriately in a bid to obtain the best solution for all parties involved.

Patricia J. Parson, in her book, Ethics in Public Relations: A Guide to Best Practice, identifies the issue of morality as one of the reasons such dilemmas occur.

In chapter two of the book, Parson analyzes the concept of truth and the role it plays in the decision-making process (15). She explains that in order for a public relations communicator or firm to maintain integrity, the communicator should develop the habit of telling the truth starting from an individual level.

Article 1 of the International Association of Business Communicators (IABC) reinforces this concept by stating, “Professional communicators should uphold the credibility and dignity of their profession by practicing honest, candid and timely communication and by fostering the free flow of essential information in accord with public interest” (IABC Para. 4).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Article 12 further states, “Professional communicators are honest not only with others but also, and most importantly, with themselves as individuals; for a professional communicator speaks the truth first to the self” (IABC Para. 6). Although the concept is straight forward, establishing what truth is often leads to a dilemma, as truth is a subjective concept dependent on individuals and circumstances.

Truth also changes when factors such as additional information come into play. For instance, in the case study, the PR firm conducted the press conference according to the information that the distributor gave and this aspect formed the truth at the time.

However, circumstances changed when the firm received additional information indicating that the alleged independent scientist was actually an employee for the distributor working under its manufacturing section. In addressing the issue, the firm should investigate the matter and establish all the facts before making a determination on the truth.

Various possibilities arise including the fact that the alleged scientist may actually be an independent scientist hired by the distributor for a specific period or he may not even be a scientist, but just a mere employee at the company.

Another dilemma that Parson identifies is the conflict between personal perceptions of morality and corporate perceptions codified in codes of conduct. The different levels of morality exist amongst different individuals depending on their social background, prevailing circumstances, and their interpretations of the codes of conduct.

Utilitarianism is one of the theories that individuals apply in their interpretation of actions that comply with the concept of morality. Parson refers to utilitarianism as the “Robin hood ethic” (44). In essence, the theory suggests that moral behavior constitutes acts that result in the greater happiness for the largest number.

John Stuart Mill, the main proponent of the theory, states that individuals should do what results in the greatest happiness and the least pain for people living in a community (Mill 31). For instance, if a person decides to burn his or her own house, the act is moral if it does not harm the rest of the people neighboring the house.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Solving ethical dilemmas in public relations specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It is noteworthy that the theory bases its premise on the outcome of an act instead of the intention. Therefore, application of the theory to the case study involves an evaluation of the outcome rather than the intention of the action available to remedy the situation. According to the theory, the firm should choose a course of action that results in the greatest happiness for everyone involved, including the public, the firm, and the client.

For instance, the favorable results on the products might be authentic even though the distributors lied on the independent nature of the scientist. In addition, Code 4 of the Canadian Public Relations Society (CPRS) states, “a member shall deal fairly with past and present clients, fellow practitioners and members of other professions (CPRS Para.4). Therefore, it is imperative that the firm seeks redress that is fair to the distributor regardless of its deceit.

Parson (67) also mentions the theory of moral relativism and explains the dilemma it creates for individuals who subscribe to the theory in consideration to rules. Article 5 of the IABC holds, “Professional communicators should refrain from taking any undertaking which the communicator considers to be unethical” (IABC Para.4).

While rules make it easy for some people to make decisions, they create dilemmas for others, especially in relation to morality. Parson states, “The trouble with rules is their specificity to situations and people’s relative views on which circumstances certain rules should apply” (38).

The theory of moral relativism, as proponents such as William Sumner explain, suggests that there is no universal right or wrong as such concepts depend on individual circumstances and factors such as culture (Lukes 32).

For instance, some cultures take legalizing prostitution as a moral act, while others view the same as immoral. In the same way, some individuals in the firm may view the distributor’s actions as moral, thus negating the need for any further action.

Parson refers to the act of withholding bits of information in order to create a favorable outcome as a ‘spin’ and she adds that the morality and subsequent legality of ‘spinning’ information is relative to individual perceptions (Parson 163). Others may view the situation as immoral, thus leading to a need for remedial action through the application of the codes of conduct.

For instance, a person who chooses to view the entire scene from the point of view of the distributor and its need to increase sales through the legal use of a PR firm may view the company’s need to retain information on the independence of the scientist as moral.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Solving ethical dilemmas in public relations by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More On the other hand, a person who chooses to focus on the introduction of new information concerning the alleged scientist and its effect on the firm may regard the same situation as immoral.

Application of a code of conduct is voluntary. Oliver (56) suggests that individuals should seek objectivity by exploring all available factors and looking at the entire situation as opposed to specific scenes when forming a decision coupled with seeking advice from independent sources with no stake in the matter.

Thirdly, determination of codes of conduct that apply to specific situations may result in dilemmas, especially when a PR practitioner subscribes to different codes. Cohen (138) points out that sometimes, ethical dilemmas develop out of technicalities in situations.

For instance, if the practitioner subscribes to the IABC rules and a client to the CPRS rules, sometimes provisions in the rules create a conflict that presents difficulties in resolving, especially if the two parties have conflicting views on the ethicality of a situation.

For instance, in the case study, if the firm and the client turn out to have conflicting views on the morality of withholding information or the course of action appropriate to the situation, they may need to seek legal assistance to resolve the stalemate.

However, the move would require an analysis of the relevant code of conduct. In case both parties happen to use different codes of conduct, it would be necessary to find a way of establishing which one applies, usually by choosing the one that best favors either sides or the application of an international code of conduct neutral to both sides.

The same dilemma may also occur if the firm subscribes to more than one code of conduct. Choosing the appropriate code may require the application of the one that is most favorable to the client.

Parson (120) suggests an analysis of each case on an individual basis when making decisions as each case thrives on different merits, involves different individuals, and different circumstances. Although cases regarding ethics sometimes bear certain similarities, some details in the cases vary and in the same case, circumstances differ, often requiring a change in approach.

For instance, in the case study, the PR firm finds out about the client omitting information, which may have a significant impact on the public’s view of the distributor’s products. Under similar circumstances, had the firm discovered the information before the press conference, it would have taken a different approach.

Even with cases bearing identical facts, a PR practitioner should look at the entire situation, including external circumstances such as the political atmosphere. Trevino and Nelson (104) suggest that weighing the costs and benefits of disseminating information to the public assist practitioners in making objective decisions in chaotic situations.

For instance, while revealing the truth about the scientist may clear the firm from future blame in case the products exhibit harmful effects on the population, the same information may cause panic to members of the public, especially considering the sensitivity of drug-related issues attracts.

It may also cause a rise in fraudulent claims against the distributor, thus ruining the reputation of the company and future business opportunities for the PR firm.

Possible solutions for case study The appropriate solution for the case study depends on several elements, including the PR firm’s objectives and priorities. Proper consideration of the outcome of every possible option is dire. One of the firm’s possible solutions is to hold another press conference and correct the era. The firm would need to do it in a sensitive way that does not attack the client, viz. the drug distribution company, for omission of information.

The main reason behind this decision is compliance with codes of conduct such as Article 2 of the IABC, which urges professional communicators to, “disseminate accurate information and promptly correct any erroneous communication for which they may be responsible” (IABC Para. 3).

Further, Article 6 of the same Act calls for professional communicators to “obey laws and public policies governing their professional activities and, should any law or public policy be violated, [they] should act promptly to correct the situation” (IABC Para. 4).

In addition, Code 5 of the CPRS states, “members shall be prepared to disclose the names of their employers or clients, on whose behalf public communication is made. Members shall not associate themselves with anyone claiming to represent one interest or professing to be independent or unbiased, but who actually serves another or an undisclosed interest” (CPRS Para.5).

In the case study, the distributor presented the scientist to the public, through the press conference, as an independent scientist with full knowledge that he was not what he claimed. It is the firm’s duty to present the truth to the public as a matter of public interest in order to ensure that the public makes an informed decision.

Presenting the truth to the public would also exonerate the PR firm from blame and a possible ruin of its reputation in the instance that the drugs present harmful effects on uses in the future.

The second possible solution involves the use of another form of media announcement other than a press conference by the firm. The benefit of this move is that it allows the firm to present the truth in an appropriate manner that does not result in an attack on its efficiency in carrying out its responsibility.

Some of the questions that may arise in a press conference situation involve matters of due diligence, which require the firm to investigate the truth of information before sharing the same with the public. Preparing a well-thought announcement would allow the firm to explain its viewpoint without distortion of information famous with press conferences.

Thirdly, the firm may choose to settle the matter with the client and request its management to make the announcement to the public as a damage control measure that allows the client to defend its credibility. Although presenting the information may result in an attack on some of the drug company’s policies, it also gives the company the opportunity to explain its position to the public.

In addition, this option exonerates the PR Company from blame and situations that cause dilemmas in deciding which information is appropriate for the public to know.

Lastly, the firm may choose to institute legal proceedings against the client for misrepresentation. However, this decision should be the last resort as court cases sometimes drag on for years, thus costing the client and the firm valuable time and money. It may also cause negative or dark PR for the firm.

Conclusion Choosing a decision depends on various elements and sometimes it results in dilemmas that make decision-making strenuous. However, it is advisable for PR practitioners to look at situations in their entirety when forming decisions and make decisions that appear most favorable for all parties without compromising the practitioner’s credibility, dignity, and goals for the firm.

Works Cited Cohen, Martin. 101 Ethical Dilemmas, New York: Routledge, 2007. Print.

CPRS: Code of Ethics 2013. Web.

IABC: IABC Code of Ethics for Professional Communicators 2013. Web.

Lukes, Steven. Moral Relativism (Big Ideas/ Small Books), London: Picador Publisher, 2008. Print.

Mill, John. Utilitarianism, New York: Dover Publications Inc., 2007. Print.

Oliver, Sandra. Public Relations Strategy, London: Kogan Page, 2009. Print.

Parson, Patricia. Ethics in Public Relations: A Guide to Best Practice, London: Kogan Page, 2004. Print.

Seitel, Fraser. The Practice of Public Relations, Upper Saddle River: Prentice Hall, 2010. Print.

Smith, Ronald. Strategic Planning for Public Relations, New York, Routledge, 2009. Print.

Trevino, Linda, and Katherine Nelson. Managing Business Ethics: Straight talk on how to do it right, Hoboken: Wiley, 2011. Print.


The Story of Viet Nam: From Prehistory to the Present written by Shelton Woods Critical Essay writing essay help

The history of Vietnam is one of the most controversial subjects for historians and researchers interested in the Asian Studies because of a lot of associated political and social events, religious and cultural aspects which are interdependent.

The historians’ task is to provide a comprehensive narrative about the history of the country in order to reflect and discuss all the historical events which are characteristic for the development of Vietnam during the centuries.

The book The Story of Viet Nam: From Prehistory to the Present written by Shelton Woods is an attempt to represent the prolonged history of the nation in a concise edition where the Vietnamese history is discussed not only from the perspective of the country’s political and social development but also from the point of Viet Nam’s cultural and religious progress which influenced the Vietnamese people’s vision of the nation’s identity significantly.

Thus, the main issues which are examined by Woods in the book are the particular features of the Vietnamese people’s identity, the role of the nation’s character in the country’s economic and political progress, and the impact of the colonial rule on the identity with references to the current development of the country as the reflection of the Viet Nam’s history.

The book The Story of Viet Nam: From Prehistory to the Present can contribute significantly to the readers’ knowledge in relation to the history of the country because Woods describes the historical events from his point and relying on the social and religious contexts while explaining the causes and consequences of certain events.

The book is useful to provide the audience with the opportunity to evaluate the historical events through the lens of the country’s cultural and religious progress and with references to the Vietnamese people as the critical point to understand the history of the country (Woods 23-24).

Many political situations and discussed economic events are presented as the background for describing the unique nation and the role of the Vietnamese identity informing the country’s rule.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Thus, Woods operates specific theoretical and topical approaches to represent the history of Viet Nam. Woods discusses all the main political, military, and social events associated with the history of the country while demonstrating the Vietnamese people’s reaction to the circumstances and their role for the development of this or that scenario.

From this point, Woods is inclined to discuss the prolonged history of the country which is divided by the author into significant periods with references to the critical social, cultural, and religious structures which influenced the country’s progress.

In spite of the fact that the author uses the traditional chronological method to organize the narrative about history of Viet Nam, the history of the country should be discussed as the history of the nation because the theoretical approach of Woods is based on using one aspect such as the Vietnamese people’s identity to analyze all the historical events.

To provide the complex picture of the country’s historical progress and the analysis of the presented events, the author uses a range of empirical and theoretical concepts which are necessary to represent the history of Viet Nam with the required details.

Thus, the main concepts are ‘identity’ as the complex of specific cultural, ethnic, and religious attributes and qualities which can be used to differentiate the Vietnamese people among the other nations; ‘social patterns’ as the set of rules or specific behaviours used predominantly within the Vietnamese society as the reaction to definite situations and events caused by the Vietnamese people’s cultural peculiarities and features; ‘domination’ as the statement of the other countries’ power over Viet Nam as a result of the wars and other military and political conflicts; and ‘colonial rule’ as the characteristic for the periods when Viet Nam was dominated by such countries as Japan and France because of impossibility to oppose the imperialist states’ forces (Woods 20-38).

Woods develops the argument that in spite of the prolonged periods of the other countries’ domination in Viet Nam, the Vietnamese’s people preserved the particular features characteristic for their identity and did not change the approaches to the social, cultural, and religious aspects of the life. Thus, the main changes were associated only with the political, military, and economic spheres of the country’s growth.

The book describes the history of Viet Nam in the chronological order, and the author divides the story into nine chapters while providing the country’s history from the legendary and ancient times to the modern history in about one hundred pages. From this point, the narrative is rather concise, and it is focused only on the key points which are essential to understand the nation’s development from the Prehistory to the modern times.

We will write a custom Book Review on The Story of Viet Nam: From Prehistory to the Present written by Shelton Woods specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The first section of the book provides the fascinating Prehistory of Viet Nam to state the origin of the nation. The early outside influences are discussed in the second chapter (Woods 5-24). However, the author pays more attention to describing the Viet Nam’s independent dynasties, which are associated with the period of stating the nation’s identity and principles of its development.

The impacts of Colonialism and Imperialism for Viet Nam are discussed in the next chapters with references to the role of the colonial rule for the Vietnamese society. The author states that the colonial government could not contribute to replacing the people’s visions and morals with the new Western patterns because of the string traditions.

Woods also claims that the two Viet Nam wars influenced the development of the nation significantly because of accentuating the central values for the country.

The next chapters present the details of the historical development in the twentieth century, and the author focuses on such important aspects as the attempts to regulate the military conflicts in the country and the role of the population in the process, the role of the Vietnamese women in the society in relation to providing education and job opportunities, and the contemporary progress of the Vietnam’s economy in relation to the impact on the community and people’s status (Woods 58).

While summarizing the content of the book’s chapters, it is possible to note that the narrative of Woods is rather logical and detailed to support the author’s central claim and demonstrate the historical development of the country from the point of the nation’s cultural and social progress.

Woods builds his argument with references to the evidences found in a lot of historical documents and primary sources used for writing the book. The author examined and analyzed a range of the historical documents, statistics, and data along with the historical researches on the book’s main topics in order to provide the detailed discussion of the Vietnamese people’s history.

It is possible to state that the argument claimed by the author along with the supportive evidence is somewhat credible and convincing because it is the result of analyzing a lot of materials on the issues presented in the book.

Moreover, the author’s vision of the main events in the history of the country is convincing because it is based on examining the issues with references to the Vietnamese people’s identity as the key concept to discuss the progress of the country.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Story of Viet Nam: From Prehistory to the Present written by Shelton Woods by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Although the text of the narrative lacks many details to describe thoroughly this or that point mentioned in the book, the story is somewhat practical to explain and develop the argument because the author is focused on the chosen approach, and this method helps the readers in following the main ideas of the book.

Following the facts mentioned above, it is necessary to determine the strengths and limitations in relation to The Story of Viet Nam: From Prehistory to the Present written by Shelton Woods. Thus, the strong feature of the book is the concrete and limited context in which the history of the whole country is discussed.

Thus, to present the whole history of Viet Nam, the limit of one hundred pages is not enough, but Woods focuses on the main events and significant points in the history of the country in order to analyze them with references to the concept of the Vietnamese nation, the identity of the Vietnamese people, and specifics of the society’s development.

That is why the weaknesses of the book are in attempts to represent the history of the country developed during the centuries in short chapters given as summaries. However, the book can be interesting and useful for the audience because of its concise format when it is necessary to make some glimpses in the history of Viet Nam and its nation.

Works Cited Woods, Shelton. The Story of Viet Nam: From Prehistory to the Present. Ann Arbor, MI: Association for Asian Studies, 2013. Print.


The Migration of the Jews: Problems, Significance and Benefits Proposal writing essay help: writing essay help

Introduction Massive persecution of the Jews in the 19th century marked the genesis of the Middle East conflicts. Since the persecution became a world issue, world leaders agreed to establish a Jewish state in the Middle East. Tabarani argues that, since the British Empire had a mandate over Palestine from 1920 to 1947, it was convenient to impose the Jewish people on the Palestinians who had peace and tranquility for several years (42).

Hence, the central argument of the proposal is that the migration of the Jews contributed to the instability in the Middle East between. As a preview of the main points, the proposal will examine the problem, significance of the study, research plan, limitations, benefits, and eventually provide a conclusion.

The Body Problem Statement

Western countries, particularly the Britain and Germany, created the instabilities in the Middle East just after colonialism. According to Tabarani, while Germany through Ottoman Empire supported the creation of new states such as Palestine, the British foreign minister, Lord Balfour, supported the creation of the Jewish state through the Balfour Declaration (43).

On this basis, colonial legacies, increased poverty, conflicts over resources, and the imposition of Jews on the Arabs are the major causes of conflicts in the Middle East.

Many historians and scholars of international relations confirm that the conflicts in the region are associated with resource allocation and division of the Arab land. In this view, the major objective of the paper is to prove through research that problems, which humans experience in the Middle East, require leaders to resolve because they are the cause.

Rationale and Significance

The paper presents some of the causes of conflicts in the Middle East that have continuously affected the performance of states in the region. The study is very important as it sheds some light on one of the global problems that is associated with terrorism.

Although many people believe that terrorism is part of the Islamic ideals, the reality is that “the frustrations compel Palestinians to engage in acts of extremism and suicide bombing” in the Middle East (Penslar 21). Therefore, the study presents a new perspective of understanding conflict system in the Middle East.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Research Plan

In the research plan, the study will employ the reasoning of Toulmin, which respects the views of all people. Based on the reasoning, the study will explain the underlying assumptions that define general argument of conflicts in the Middle East. The paper will support the argument using primary and secondary sources from other scholars.


Lack of sufficient data and adequate studies on the topic are the major limitations of the study. The insufficiency of the primary and secondary sources is a limitation of the study because studies regarding conflicts in the Middle East are limited.

Additionally, given that many people have linked Islam with extremism and terrorism, there is a tendency that scholars have some biases when performing and presenting their research findings. Hence, biases limit the validity and reliability of primary and secondary information.

Benefits of the Study

The research findings have significant benefits as they enhance understanding of the conflicts in the Middle East and formulation of effective solutions. With the enhanced understanding of the causes of conflicts, policy makers can formulate effective solutions to end and prevent conflicts.

Moreover, the study is of great benefit as it disputes the common assumptions that Muslims are to blame for the conflicts that happen between Jews and Palestinians in the Middle East.

Conclusion The conflicts in the Middle East center on the migration of the Jews from Europe and other parts of the world into Israel. The migration of Jews coupled with the interests of western countries fueled the conflicts between Palestinians and Jews in the Middle East.

As sources of conflicts range from conflict over resources to religious differences, misconceptions depict Muslims as extremists and terrorists. Hence, the study aims to enhance the understanding of the conflicts and demystify misconceptions with the objective of defining effective solutions.

We will write a custom Proposal on The Migration of the Jews: Problems, Significance and Benefits specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Penslar, Derek. Israel in History: The Jewish State in Comparative Perspective. New York, 2007. Print.

Tabarani, Gabriel. Israeli-Palestinian Conflict: From Balfour Promise to Bush Declaration: The Complications and the Road for Lasting Peace. London: AuthorHouse, 2008. Print.


Modern Architecture In China Exploratory Essay essay help site:edu

Table of Contents Introduction

Modern Architecture In China


Works Cited

Introduction Nowadays the level of technology and the achievements in the design practice allows creating the real masterpieces both in the design of the exterior and interior. It goes without saying that the modern techniques facilitate the realization of even the most bold and creative ideas which seemed to be impossible in the past.

The aim of this paper is to describe two examples of the modern design.

Modern Architecture In China The first example of the modern design progress which I am going to present to you is the Wuzhen Theatre created by the Chinese designers headed by Kris Yao. The construction has been built in Zhejiang in China. The project represents a bright example of the modern architecture. It is an amazing building embodying in itself both the contemporary architecture style and the elements of the traditional Chinese architecture.

The structure of the building is the reinforced concrete and steel framing (“Wuzhen Theatre” n.pag.). It has two floors above ground and one floor below ground (“Wuzhen Theatre” n.pag.). The façade of the theatre is zig-zag fan-shaped (“Wuzhen Theatre” n.pag.).

The panorama windows, although framed into the sash decorated with the creative bars, contribute to the substantial transparency of the building admitting the sun rays through the glass of the old gold color. As a whole the windows are associated with the traditional Chinese design which assumes the use of the gold and black color. In my view, the bars represent the bamboo which takes an important place in the Asian culture.

The theatre has been built nearby the river. If you take a look at the theatre from the side of the street with the traditional Chinese houses, you can see the contrast between the old Chinese architecture and the contemporary one. It is worthy to mention the beautiful illumination of the theatre at night when the golden lights are reflected in the river water.

The interior of the theatre also attracts the attention. It is made in the beautiful deep blue color which creates a calm atmosphere inside. A ceiling is also made in the blue color with white decoration elements. The walls inside the theatre are decorated with screens which are traditional in the Chinese culture.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The design of the interior can be described as the successful mix of the innovative surrealistic design and the Chinese authentic traditions of decoration.

“Using the culturally auspicious “twin lotus” as its metaphor, which functions perfectly with two theatres sharing one stage area, the design is composed of two oval shapes interlocking one another, one of them transparent and the opaque in form” (“Wuzhen Theatre/Artech Architects” n.pag.).

In my opinion, the design of the new theatre is useful as it represents one more place of interest in China. Besides, the new theatre is aimed to host the international theatre festival. Besides, it is planned that the fashion shows and even the wedding ceremonies will take place at the theatre.

Conclusion In order to sum up all above mentioned, it should be said that the contemporary design embodies the high level of the design techniques and construction technologies development. Furthermore, it encompasses the creativity and mastery of the designers and architects. The examples of the contemporary design described in the essay are the bright examples of the achievements in the sphere of design and architecture.

Works Cited “Wuzhen Theatre by Artech Architects Rises out of the Water” 16 October 2013. Web.

“Wuzhen Theatre/Artech Architects” 23 May 2013. Web.


Frank Conroy’s Memoir: Life Experiments Essay essay help: essay help

The life events and situations which can be discussed by some persons as minor or insignificant often influence the people’s life more obviously than any other important and serious event because minor details can provoke people’s thinking of their life, personality, intentions, goals, and visions of the world.

Frank Conroy’s memoir Stop-Time (1967) includes a lot of descriptions of events and situations which influenced the process of Conroy’s growing and development as an individual. The author focuses on definite stops in describing the time of his childhood and adolescence.

To emphasize the stop and to draw the readers’ attention to it, Conroy uses the present tense, and the readers become involved in the situation because of observing it through the eyes of a boy whose considerations and emotions are presented and described in detail.

In spite of the fact that there are many significant events and incidents presented in the memoir, it is important to refer to the minor events which are preserved in the author’s memory because of their impact on the writer’s personality.

From this point, the chapter “A Yo-Yo Going Down, a Mad Squirrel Coming Up” provides a description of an important stop when Conroy perceives the principles of life and his role in the world and society focusing on yo-yoing.

Conroy uses the whole chapter to describe his experience in relation to yo-yoing and observed tricks with yo-yo. Thus, this situation can be discussed as minor and insignificant by many persons, but the boy at the age of thirteen can notice the significant principles of the life in the world with references to yo-yoing, and this knowledge can change his cognition and vision of the world and his own personality.

While noticing two yo-yo tricksters, the boy “stared open-mouthed as a yo-yo was thrown down and stayed down” (Conroy 112-113). As a result, the boy decided to perform yo-yo tricks which could be lovely and rather difficult because Conroy was sure in relation to his success.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Although all the yo-yos are the same, Conroy states, “My yo-yo … was a perfectly balanced construction of hard wood, slightly weighted, flat, with only a sixteenth of an inch between the halves” (Conroy 113). Using such a perfect yo-yo, the boy focuses only on the success while performing some tricks.

Following the boy’s considerations and thoughts on yo-yoing, it is possible to state that the successes of Conroy in yo-yoing as well as his observations of yo-yo’s movements made the boy think about the rules of the world and people’s reactions to the world strings.

Conroy explains the importance of this stop in memory claiming, “the yo-yo represented my first organized attempt to control the outside world” (Conroy 115). Thus, such important things were learnt by the writer not through the dramatic experiences of his childhood, but because of playing with the yo-yo.

Referring to the example of Conroy’s use of stops in life, I can rely on such a stop as the moment of understanding the impact of the people’s opinion on the other persons’ life and the role of envy in this process. Conroy’s attempts to perform yo-yo tricks can be discussed as a kind of envy in relation to the other boys’ skills while performing different yo-yo tricks because this fact is associated with the rule in the situation.

The similar situation occurred when I was at the age of twelve. The desire to prove the fact that I could be better than the other children in the classroom made me agree to participate in a lot of extracurricular activities and orient to the best results.

I can make the stop in my memory and recollect my emotions in relation to the situation when my classmate told me that he could achieve the best results in the swimming competition than I could achieve.

Today, I understand that those words were rather provocative and demonstrated the classmate’s envy. Furthermore, I could not predict the results of the competition. However, I remember that during the conversation I decided to win in spite of any barriers because I was sure in my successes and skills.

We will write a custom Essay on Frank Conroy’s Memoir: Life Experiments specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The importance of that experience is stop in my life in the fact that I can return to that stop every time when I feel helpless in a difficult situation. Recollecting the situation of being a consistent child with the strong will and desire to win, I can focus on achieving the higher goals today and in the future.

The importance of such stops is in opportunities to refer to the intrinsic motivation and true desires hidden under the mask of everyday considerations.

The above-mentioned experience and the example of Conroy’s stop are also important in the context of my culture and aspects of the social development because the concentration on the inner power is highly valued in our society.

The ability to focus on stops in the life time is necessary to evaluate the results and investigate the particular features of the personal psyche. Thus, stops made by Conroy are important to look at the author from the new perspective.

Works Cited Conroy, Frank. Stop-Time: A Memoir. USA: Viking Press, 1967. Print.


Canadian Radio-Television and Telecommunications Commissions Term Paper writing essay help: writing essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Establishment of CRTC

Purpose of CRTC

CRTC Stakeholders


Scope of CRTC Operations

Impact and the Future of CRTC



Introduction The 20th century is characterised by a lot of political activities that led to democratization of many societies. People have gained significant access to certain rights and privileges. One of the most important rights that people enjoy today is the access to information, which is essential because it enables people to identify and demand for other rights.

Although the advocates of the right to information insist that everyone should be well informed, some people have claimed that such rights can cause serious challenges if not regulated (Edwardson, 2008). For this reason, several governments have put in place measures to ensure that rights are enjoyed in a manner that protects other aspects of life.

This paper discusses the functions, composition, scope of operation, financing and source of authority of the Canadian Radio-television and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) (Edwardson, 2008).

Establishment of CRTC CRTC was created in 1976 after the parliament of Canada enacted the Canadian Radio-television and Telecommunications Commission Act (1976).

Before CRTC came into being, its functions were performed by the Canadian Radio-Television Commission established in 1968 to take over from the Board of Broadcast Governors. CRTC is answerable to the Minister for Heritage who in turn reports to parliament (Dunbar


Singapore Airline Research Paper a level english language essay help

Introduction Overview of the Company

Singapore Airline (SIA) is a widely recognized and celebrated brand name in the air transport industry for over 50 years. This is attributable to its route network that covers over 90 cities in more than forty countries and up to date air transport system.

In addition, SIA is a member of the Star Alliance which has increased its global presence to roughly 140 countries. All in all, the company’s strong brand name is mainly attributed to its excellent customer service (, 2013).

For nearly four decades since SIA was detached from Malaysian Airway Limited it has continued to grow rapidly to become a world class airline. Experts attribute this to the company’s values and culture. Singapore Airline has impressed many people due to its creativity, diversity and constant growth.

In addition, the company has been able to meet customers demand as well as gaining competitive advantage in both local and international market (, 2013; Ayob, 2004, P. 2).

However, the journey has never been smooth throughout. The company has experienced numerous challenges both internal and external. The most notable predicament was the Asian economic crisis created by the outbreak of the SARS virus in 2003.

The crisis forced the company to cut down wages and lay-off nearly 500 workers. As a matter of fact, this was considered as the largest number of employees to be ever laid-off in the company’s history. As a result, the relationship between the top management and the labor union started to worsen (UK, 2012).

So as to attain a world class status SIA went through the following chronology: SIA was established in 1947 under the name Malayan Airways; in 1963, SIA was rebranded to Malaysian Airways owing to the formation of the Malaysian Federation.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The name was later changed to Malaysian-Singapore Airline when Singapore became independent; in 1972, the company acquired the current name when it splits up from Malaysian Airways. In 1986, the girl wearing sarong kebaya (the company’s famous logo) was born.

The young elegant, friendly and kindhearted girl on the SIA’s famous logo represents the culture that the company forever wants to devote to its customers (, 2013).

From 1990 to 2001, the company purchased 178 aircrafts and expanded its route networks extensively. In 2004, Singapore Airline broke a world record by launching the longest ever commercial flight from Singapore to Los Angeles and New York. In 2007, SIA broke another world record by purchasing the largest passenger plane-A380.

At the moment, SIA’s route networks spans more than 90 destinations and nearly forty countries. In addition, the company has the most modern fleet in the industry and dominates the South East Asian market (UK, 2012).

SWOT Analysis of the SIA SWOT analysis is an instrument that is often used to assess an organization and the environment. SWOT is an abbreviation for Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities and Threats. SWOT analysis is commonly used in business studies to explore the existing conditions in order to come up with possible solutions or strategies of addressing both internal and external challenges (OCBC Investment Research, 2011, p. 11).

In this case, SWOT analysis will focus on Singapore Airline. The main objective of the analysis is to have firsthand experience of the problems facing the company and gain knowledge concerning probable developments and potentials.

Strength and Weakness

The main foundation of any company is their staff (Kotler, 2001, p. 6). SAI boasts of highly trained and disciplined personnel whose main focus is passengers comfort and satisfaction. Service quality and customer satisfaction have always been the core of SAI as enshrined in its vision and mission statement. The company has managed to achieve all these because of its highly competent staff, which includes the pilots and mechanics.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Singapore Airline specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This has benefited both the company and the customers. For instance, SIA’s service quality has attracted other users like institutions, tourism sector, VIPs among others. In addition, the company also has state of the art training facility for its human resource (OCBC Investment Research, 2011, p. 11).

SIA is a well established airline with a very sound background. The company has always remained profitable despite of numerous challenges both internally and externally. Most of the company’s profits have always been invested back to expand the business. In addition to the strong financial base, SIA also has numerous other resources that have given it an edge over its rivals.

For example, SIA has one of the leading freight handling facilities in the region. The company also has over 95 aircrafts and communication systems which are replaced after every five years.

In addition, SIA’s flight kitchen based in Changi is one of the largest in the world. Last but not least, the company’s brand quality is in all probability the most potent resource. The brand has been nurtured for over three decades to be the most acknowledged and distinguished in the aviation industry (Ayob, 2004, p. 3).

Singapore airline is devoted to the idea of open skies where consumer demand determines the flight destination. However, the company has been unable to access certain countries and airports due to their protectionist policies.

For instance, it took the company a lot of years to access Heathrow and Manchester airports. At the moment, it is still struggling to access transatlantic routes from the United Kingdom. Other weaknesses include lack of growth opportunities for the Flagship Singapore Airline and agility to deal with global crisis (OCBC Investment Research, 2011, p. 11).

Threats and opportunities

The main opportunity for Singapore Airline is the growth of passenger and cargo transport in South-East Asia and the world at large. At the moment, much smaller and remote places are becoming open to the globe. This provides an opportunity for SIA to expand its services. The introduction of lost-cost carrier (LCC) is aimed at capturing this new market segment (UK, 2012).

The major threat facing SIA is the increased competition from the Middle East airlines, for example, Tiger Airways and Jestar Airlines. The airline also faces restrictive regulations in certain countries, for instance, the United Kingdom. Another threat is the probable economic depression and pressure on fuel prices (OCBC Investment Research, 2011, p. 11).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Singapore Airline by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Porter’s five forces analysis of the SIA This model is based on the comprehensive outlook on the company’s strategies that meets the opportunities and threats within and without the industry.

The five forces as identified by porters include: threats of new entrants, bargaining power of suppliers and customers, threat of substitutes, and the rivalry within the industry. Porter’s five forces analysis not only offers a significant foundation for strategic analysis but also examines the viability of the industry to come up possible course of actions (Porter 1980, p. 3).

Singapore Airline is regarded as a distinct industry in Singapore market. As a result, the Porter’s five forces and other externalities have considerable impact on the airline. Regionally, the airline is regarded as the market leader because of its outstanding service delivery and distinguished brand.

However, over the recent past, Singapore Airline has been faced with stiff competition from the Middle East airlines and other news entrants. For that reason, industry analysis is very crucial for the company in order to cope with the current and prospective challenges (, 2013).

The ease of entry into a market dictates the level of competition. The threat of entry significantly depends on the barriers put in place to ward off the new entrants (Kotler, 2001, p. 33). SIA controls the largest share of the South East Asian market to a near monopoly.

Despite of the fact that Singapore has not restricted access to its route networks, smaller airlines have always found it very difficult to access this market. Nevertheless, the rapid development of the region’s economy and the tourism sector has attracted global airlines into the market (UK, 2012).

Customer’s bargaining power in the airline industry are very high. This is due to the fact that buyers have numerous options to choose from. Therefore, Singapore Airline needs to focus most of its attention on consumer satisfaction and provision of exceptional services.

The power of the supplier in the airline industry is also important and has significant impact on the company’s competitive capacity. For this reason, Singapore Airline has established strong ties with its suppliers and other airline companies (UK, 2012).

The airline industry has highest threat of substitutes, particularly Singapore where the sole means of international movement is air transport. The threat increased with the introduction of the low-cost carriers. Therefore, SIA must take notice of the threats in different market segments (UK, 2012).

Lately the company has been experiencing stiff competition not only from the Middle East airlines but also from major global players, for instance, Cathay Pacific Airways, British Airways and Fly Emirates among others.

However, Singapore Airline has been able to maintain a competitive edge over its rivals by improving its apparatus, increasing fleet network, offering exceptional services and promoting its brand (, 2013).

Conclusion Industrial analysis of the Singapore Aviation industry provides an empirical overview of how external factor impacts the operations of the Singapore Airline. The main purpose of this analysis is to explain the external business environment, its dynamics and forces that propel the changes.

The fundamental idea behind the two tools of analysis is that businesses have to adjust to the externalities. This reflects the idea that business strategies and goals have to fit in between the capabilities and externalities and therefore it is necessary for an industry/ entity to adjust to the changes.

References Aaker, D.A. (2005). Strategic Market Management. Hobeken, New Jersey: John Wiley and Sons.

Ayob, A.M. (2004). Singapore Airlines Limited: Building a Culture of Service Excellence. Web.

Kotler, P. (2001). Kotler on Marketing: How to Create, Win and Dominate Markets. New York: Free Press.

OCBC Investment Research. (2011). Singapore Airlines Limited. Company Report (MITA No. 022/06/2011). Singapore: OCBC.

Porter, M.E. (1980). Competitive strategy: Techniques for analyzing industries and competitors. New York: Free Press. (2013). Singapore Airline: Our History. Web.

UK (2012). Pestel and Five-Force Analysis of Singapore Airline. Web.


“Winning” by Jack Welch Evaluation Essay college essay help online: college essay help online

Strengths, weaknesses and assumptions in Jack Welch’s framework for differentiating employees In his book “Winning”, Jack Welch (2005) provides a well-developed framework for managing people in an organization through employee differentiation. The ‘20/70/10 Differentiation’ framework is primarily a way of breaking down employees into three groups based on their performance (Welch, 2005).

The purpose of the framework is to determine a good of way of rewarding and treating employees. The framework has a number of strengths, but it has some negative aspects because it is based on some assumptions.


Welch believes that every company has only three groups of employees. The first the 20/70/10 framework is effective because it provides managers with a simple but effective way of dealing with employees. It ensures that the company retains its best performers in the first 20% group, which allows it to reduce costs and enhance management (Welch, 2005).

In fact, this group is made up of top managers who have experience and positive attitude towards the company and their work. If not treated well, they are likely to leave the company or work below standards, thus affecting corporate performance. Secondly, this framework allows managers to increase performance by encouraging and motivating employees to rise to the top 20% group.

As employees strive to join the group, they improve their performance, thus improving the corporate performance. Thirdly, it ensures that managers reduce cost by eliminating majority of employees in the bottom 10% group.

Since most of these employees are the individuals with records of poor performance and negative attitudes, they are likely to reduce performance while increasing cost. They must leave the company. Using this framework, the company is able to reduce employee redundancy.


Welch’s framework assumes that all employees, regardless of the nature of a company, industry or economy, can fit into one of the three categories.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Secondly, it assumes that employee performance can only be increased by rewarding and motivation, leaving out other factors such as talents and personal interests. In addition, it assumes that forcing out poor performing employees from a company is the best way of dealing with poor performance.


Welch’s ideas seem to assume that employees in the top 20% group are perfect and must be maintained in the company. This is a bad assumption because this group could include employees who are interested in personal gains rather than corporate gains. Heavy rewards and recognitions given to these employees could create resentment among the lower groups, which could destroy employee-employee relationships.

In addition, it can affect employee-employee and employee-manager communication. In addition, the 10% group might feel threatened because they are not provided with enough time to rectify their mistakes and learn to perform.

Workforce Differentiation Welch’s framework seems to be an effective way of differentiating employees. In fact, I would suggest that companies use employee performance as one of the main criteria for employee categorization.

For instance, companies should analyse employees based on individual performance within a given time such as one year. Employees who perform poorly and do not strive to improve should leave the company. Those who perform well or improve their performance need rewards and appraisal.

Mission, Vision and Values Using Welch’s ideas, it is evident that missions define the future of a company. To develop mission, the company needs values. Values define the required or appropriate behaviours or set of behaviours that must be followed in order to reach the desired destination.

For instance, positive attitudes, teamwork, proper and effective communication and focus on goals are good examples of behaviours that employees and their leaders should consider (Becker, Huselid


Project Management for Small to Medium Enterprises Evaluation Essay argumentative essay help

Work breakdown structure, critical path and costed time strategy The chart below illustrates the project’s work breakdown structure. This goal has been achieved by identifying the task, the duration, and the resource requirement in order to execute the task effectively and within the set time.

Chart 1: WBS

Task name Duration [days] Start time Finish time Resource Analysing the green fashion market in Australia 12 4thOct. 2013 1 5thOct.2013 Marketing manager Selection of store location 12 4thOct. 2013 1 5thOct. 2013 Entrepreneur Developing the project business plan 15 4thOct. 2013 19thOct. 2013 Entrepreneur Compliance with legal and environmental 3 17thOct. 2013 19thOct. 2013 Entrepreneur Seeking sponsorship from charity organisations 18 4thOct. 2013 19thOct. 2013 Entrepreneur Furnishing and decorating the store 15 17thOct. 2013 31stOct. 2013 Project team Attracting consigner 12 20thOct. 2013 15thNov. 2013 Entrepreneur Finalising the shops self-owned system 26 15thNov. 2013 26thNov. 2013 Project team Implementing the green fashion concept will play a critical role in minimising the rate of environmental pollution. In a bid to establish the Green Fashion Store, effective time management is essential. Approximately, the store will take 70 days to be completed. It is projected that this duration is sufficient to complete the project.

However, taking 70 days will lead to increase in the resource requirements, which are scarce. Thus, effective time scheduling is paramount. The project manager will reduce the project duration with 20%, which means that the project will take 56 days to be implemented. Crashing strategy will be used in order to arrive at the critical path as illustrated by chart 2 below.

By crashing the time, the Green Fashion Store will be completed within 56 days and the likelihood of the entrepreneur conforming to the time constraint will increase. The areas shaded in black illustrate the critical path that will result in optimal resource utilisation.

Chart 2: the critical path

The Project Manager estimates that the project will require $19,200 in order to be successfully implemented.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Budget and resource allocation In establishing the new business, the entrepreneur is focused towards ensuring that resources are effectively utilised. In this project, the resource that the Project Manager is mostly focused on relates to time. The green fashion project is time constrained. The Project Manager intends to complete the green fashion project in 56 days. Thus, the entrepreneur will ensure that time is effectively utilised.

Levelling resource allocation technique will be used. This will aid in effective utilisation of slack time by delaying non-critical activities. Moreover, the levelling technique will aid in reduction resource demand, peak resource demand in addition to minimising the amount of resource fluctuation. Some activities will be undertaken concurrently in order to eliminate slack time.

Chart 3: Estimated budget before crashing the amount of time by 20%

Work package 1stOct.- 15thOct 17thOct-19thOct. 20thOct.-31stOct. 1stNov. -15thNov. 16thNov- 26thNov. Total by activity Market research $2,000 $2,000 Developing the store’s blue print. $500 $200 $700 legal and environmental analysis $1,000 $1,000 Seeking sponsorship $600 $400 $1,000 Furnishing the store $8,000 $4,000 $12,000 Attracting consigner 1,000 1,000 Finalising the self-owned store system 1,500 1,500 Cumulative 19,200 However, reducing the amount of time required to complete the project with 20% is expected to increase the amount of financial capital required. Thus, it is estimated that the project budget will increase by 20%. Thus, the green fashion project will require $ 23,040 in order to be completed.

Quality management and control

A number of elements quality management elements as illustrated the chart below will be taken into account in the green fashion store. The project will be implemented as a one-off expense hence eliminating the need to revisit the project upon its completion. The chart below illustrates the variables that will be taken into account in ensuring effective quality management.

Figure 1: quality control

A comprehensive cost-benefit analysis will be undertaken in order to maintain the project within the desired quality. This will be achieved by controlling the prevention cost, external and internal failure, control, and appraisal cost. This will improve the quality of the project.

We will write a custom Essay on Project Management for Small to Medium Enterprises specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The Project Manager will ensure that the green fashion store addresses the customer’s needs adequately. To achieve this, a substantial amount of appraisal cost will be incurred. The appraisal cost will entail product audits, product inspections, and reviews.

Some of the elements that will be integrated in assessing the appraisal cost include evaluating whether the process of implementing the store takes into account the desired conditions. For example, an appealing store ambience will be ensured in order to develop unique customer experience.

Moreover, the Project Manager will conduct a comprehensive evaluation of the green fashion products collected from the sponsors to ensure that they are aligned with the specified environmental requirements.

One of the ways through which quality of the products collected will be ensured is by conducting an intensive training on the parties charged with the responsibility of collecting the second hand products. Moreover, the appraisal cost will also entail assessing whether the green fashion store is effectively designed.

The Green Fashion Store entrepreneur is cognisant of the fact that the project may be affected by to lack of sufficient support from the sponsors. For example, customers might not adopt the concept of green fashion as expected. A comprehensive project quality plan will be developed to minimise the adverse effects of quality costs.

The quality plan will outline the standards that the project manager will be required to adhere to in order to satisfactorily fulfil the quality requirement. Regular meetings involving all the team members will be conducted to generate ideas on how to deal with contingencies that arise in the process of implementing the project. The above quality control chart will be used.

Project team performance

The entrepreneur is aware that the Green Fashion Store will depend on the input of all the team members. Consequently, it is imperative for the project manager to ensure that effective team performance is attained.

Optimal team performance can be achieved by incorporating the principles of team management such as organising, leading, controlling, and planning. In a bid to attain optimal team performance, the project manager will take into account a number of issues as illustrated in the table below.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Project Management for Small to Medium Enterprises by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Chart 4; project team performance

Approach Strategy Significance to team performance Leadership Transformational leadership style will be adopted The style will provide team members an opportunity to share ideas on how to improve the project. -Transformational leadership will lead to development of a sense of inclusion amongst the team members. Communication Horizontal, vertical, upward, lateral diagonal and downward channels of communication will be adopted. Formulating an effective feedback mechanism Communication will ensure that the team members are adequately informed about the project and their roles. Establishment of an effective working relationship Optimal conflict resolution The feedback mechanism will lead to development of optimal understanding of the project. Decision making Inclusive team meetings Team meetings will give the manager insight on the team members’ perception and attitude regarding the project. Including employees in the decision, making process will provide the manager insight on how to minimise employee resistance. Including the team members will lead to development of a sense of project ownership amongst team members. Developing a strong project team Effective selection of project team members and integration of volunteer part-time team members Effective volunteer management Formulation of an optimal volunteer training programme The manager is cognisant of the fact that unforeseen forces may affect completion of the project. For example, multitasking amongst the project team members may limit their effectiveness. In a bid to deal with this challenge, the Project Manager is focused towards attracting volunteer part-time team members. This goal will be achieved by designing an effective volunteering programme. Currently, individuals are embracing the concept of volunteering in different organisations in an effort to develop a wide range of knowledge and skills. Sufficient awareness on the contribution of the green fashion project to environmental conservation will be undertaken. The training will be aimed at ensuring that the volunteers are acquainted with the project objectives and goals. The Project Manager will educate the volunteers the contribution of the Green Fashion Store in minimising climate change. Reward management Comprehensive and continuous appraisal of the team members’ performance Recognising project team members with optimal performance The appraisal will aid in the determination of the team members effectiveness in executing the duties assigned Reward management will lead to increased level of motivation towards achievement of the set project milestones. By implementing the above strategies, the project manager will be able to improve the outcome of the project.

Project team meetings

In a bid to ensure that the project is successful defined, planned, and executed, a number of project team meetings will be conducted. A number of issues will be discussed during the project team meetings as illustrated by the figure below.

Figure 2

Project team identity

In a bid to ensure that the project team members are committed to the green fashion store, the project manager will ensure that adequate team identity is established. Developing team identity will contribute towards development of a high level of commitment amongst the team members. The team members will identify with the green fashion store.

Thus, their efforts will be focused at achieving the project’s goals. The project manager intends to create team identity by conducting frequent meetings. The meetings will lead to improvement of the team members’ attitude and opinion towards the project. Consequently, the likelihood of developing team behaviour will be increased.

Team identity will also be developed by nurturing a high degree of interaction and information sharing amongst the team members. This goal will be achieved by utilising the co-location technique. Virtual teams will not be used in the project. Thus, the project team members will have an opportunity to interact with another thus developing a strong working relationship.

The phrase ‘green fashion’ will be used as the project team name. This name will make the project team more tangible. Moreover, an appealing team logo will be designed. The logos will be designed on T-shirts and caps that will be worn by the project team members. As a result, the project team members will love being associated with the project.

In addition to the above strategies, the project manager will ensure that effective team rituals are developed. The rituals will lead to establishment of strong and unique team identity. One of the rituals that will be developed entails giving the team members a T-shirt inscribed with the milestones achieved.

Monitoring and evaluation

This process improves the project outcome by identifying areas that require adjustments. Furthermore, monitoring and evaluation allows the project manager to evaluate the achievements that have been accomplished.

The process of monitoring and evaluating the Green Store Project will take into account a number of issues, which include the project costs, resources, project sponsors, and the entire project management team. Participatory monitoring and evaluation strategy will be adopted and this strategy will entail taking into account all the project stakeholders.

The project sponsors will be evaluated in order to determine whether they are providing the necessary project guidance. On the other hand, the project team members will be monitored in order to determine whether their actions are positively influencing the completion of the project. Monitoring and evaluating resources will play a critical role in ensuring that the project resources, which are scarce, are optimally being utilised.

By integrating effective project monitoring and evaluation, the project manager will be in a position to promote the development of positive behaviours amongst the team members. The entrepreneur intends to complete the Green Fashion Store within 56 days. Consequently, optimal monitoring and evaluation with regard to how time is utilised in implementing the project will be undertaken.

The project will monitor the project’s progress by tracking the Gantt chart by incorporating a baseline Gantt chart. The respective activities in the Gantt chart will be tracked. Periodic reports regarding the project process will be formulated by developing a control chart.

Consequently, the project manager will be in a position to determine the project’s trend. For example, the project manager will assess whether the project progress is ahead or behind schedule, and hence report to the stakeholders more effectively.

In addition to the above types of evaluation, the project manager will also evaluate the customers’ opinion regarding the green fashion store. One of the elements that will be taken into account entails assessing whether the target customers have integrated the concept of green fashion in their consumption processes.

Consequently, the project manager will be able to determine the likelihood of obtaining support from the customers. To evaluate the performance of project amongst potential customers, the entrepreneur will conduct a market survey through the green fashion website that will be established. Moreover, emerging social media platforms will also be used.

Project closure

Projects have a definite timeframe and must be completed within the set deadline and transferred to the owners. Consequently, it is imperative for project managers to ensure effective project closure. The project manager is of the opinion that the project will be successfully completed. Consequently, normal project closure technique will be undertaken. The closure will comprise a number of activities, which include,

Conducting a post project audit to determine the degree of project success

Undertaking wrap-up closure activities [which include paying out the bills and closing the project accounts]

Conducting individual and team evaluation

Preparing a final report that summarises the entire project. The final report will be comprised of a number of elements which include;

Project performance review- This will be achieved by reviewing whether the project is in conformity with the set standards.

Project analysis

Lessons learnt and recommendations on how to improve future projects

The project team members and the volunteers will be acknowledged and thanked for their effort. The acknowledgement will be undertaken by identifying each of the team members’ contribution to the establishment of the green fashion store.

Potential obstacles

The project life cycle will be comprised of three main stages, which include the start, project life, and finish. A number of activities, which include project definition, planning, execution, and project delivery, will be undertaken during the project life cycle.

However, various obstacles might affect project implementation and success adversely. Consequently, it is imperative for project managers to adopt effective preventive measures. Some of the risks potential obstacles that might be experienced in this project are discussed herein.

Implementation challenges– One of the major obstacles that might affect the project relates to lack of commitment amongst the team members. Such occurrences may limit the likelihood of the project being completed within the set timeframe. The project team members may lose momentum, hence drifting from the set project goals.

Development delays- The entrepreneur intends to cut the amount of time required to complete the Green Fashion Store project with 20% and to achieve this goal, the project manager will adopt the crashing strategy. Considering that the Green Fashion Store is a new entity, the firm does not have adequate staff.

Consequently, the likelihood of some project team members multitasking is high as some activities and assignments will have to be completed within the same time. Multitasking may limit the effectiveness with which the project team members undertake their duties. Moreover, excessive multitasking may lead to time loss hence affecting the project completion.

Cost increment- Existence of resource bottlenecks is another major obstacle that might affect the project.

Risk management Occurrence of risk might hinder the project implementation. Consequently, comprehensive risk management process will be adopted. Four main risk management aspects, which include risk identification, risk response control, risk assessment, and risk response development will be incorporated. The project manager will integrate the following risk management strategies.

Assessment of the milestones- The project manager will evaluate whether the set milestones are achieved.

Balancing project activities with personal activities, the project manager will integrate optimal time management strategies to prevent the team members’ infectiveness because of multitasking.

Effective allocation and control of project resources; this will prevent deviation from the predetermined project budget.

Summary and recommendations Implementing the above project plan will improve the likelihood of the Green Fashion Store succeeding. The feasibility of the project is enhanced as the project will contribute towards environmental protection and the project will promote consumption of ‘green fashion’, hence minimising environmental pollution and climate change.

Moreover, the project feasibility is enhanced by the fact that customers are increasingly becoming conscious of the environment. Therefore, project sponsors will be committed in supporting the project. The success of the project will depend on the effectiveness with which the available project resources are managed. Time is one of the most important resources in the process of implementing the Green Fashion Store.

By implementing the time crashing strategy, the project manager will minimise the duration within which the project has to be implemented. As a result, the amount of resources required will go down. The project manager will be required to assess the work breakdown structure in order to determine the most effective way to crash the project time. Analysing the WBS will enable the project manager to define task durations effectively.

In a bid to improve the project outcome, effective quality management, and control should be integrated, by formulating optimal quality standards. Through effective quality control, the project manager will eliminate non-conformities.

Non-conformities underscore aspects that add no value to the project but they might be inevitable in a project management process if the project manager fails to observe effectiveness for optimal results. The success of the Green Fashion Store project will be determined by the commitment of all the team members, which underscores the importance of optimal project team management.

The project manager can achieve this goal by integrating effective team formation and development strategies such as effective conflict management and communication, which will improve the effectiveness with which the project team members interact.

The project manager should ensure that effective monitoring and evaluation mechanisms are developed by integrating Gantt charts, which should be tracked continuously to improve the likelihood of identifying and adjusting deviations that occur. Upon its completion, the manager should ensure that effective project closure is undertaken by conducting an audit of the project in order to determine its success.

The success of the project might be subject to various internal and external challenges. Consequently, it is imperative for the project manager to integrate effective risk management strategies by ensuring that risks are identified effectively in a bid to address any challenge that might arise during the project management process.


Problems in Implementing a New Project Research Paper college essay help

Introduction In today’s business climate, implementation of projects requires high level of creativity and innovation from the executive and employees of organisations.

The process of implementing projects requires application of innovation management in which firms cut cost as a way of remaining relevant in today’s competitive business environment.

Managers have to use appropriate tools of innovative management in order to influence workforces to work towards achieving organisations’ common goals.

Since organisational projects always aim at helping firms in realising their goals, the inclusion of innovation management is necessary in allowing managers to have joint understanding of objectives and procedures in implementing such projects.

Project managers must have wide management skills to forecast on the challenges that may arise during the implementation stage and even draw possible solutions to the same.

Project Implementation Process The process of implementing new ideas within an organisation requires managers to influence perceptions of stakeholders to support the concept.

Cultures of other organisations may hinder innovation and creativity from the argument that the management only accepts ideas that are in line with the daily operations of the firm and maintain the status quo (Watad 1).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In such firms, employees are passive in their positions, as the management holds the key to all new ideas. However, the current globalisation rate forces firms to adjust changes in order to remain relevant in the market.

Therefore, the management has to convince every person in order to support the implementation of new programmes. In convincing stakeholders, managers have to get the majority on board through consensus building to implement new ideas successfully.

Resistance to Project Implementation In innovation management, even employees have to contribute creatively and innovatively to the progress of a firm. For instance, in a situation where clients’ demands and wants are not met, innovation management helps in finding solutions to those needs.

Resistance in an organisation that originates from company’s beliefs and practices poses great challenges to implementation of projects. Managers should be flexible in their management styles in order to alter the culture of their organisations.

Since implementation of a project does not guarantee achievement of the goals and objectives of the firm (Kilicoglu and Yilmaz 14), most stakeholders develop resistance to such changes.

Inclusive implementation of a new project remains a challenge to most organisations, hence the need for innovative strategies in managing diverse stakeholders’ positions and views.

Companies that desire to gain competitive advantage over their competitors in the market have to employ innovative management in their operations (Collins 8).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Problems in Implementing a New Project specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Such firms set up training and development departments to help in training all staff members. Project managers involve themselves in designing, developing and executing of training programmes through practical in-house training.

Organisational Culture A key problem that arises during implementation of projects majorly comes from organisational culture. This involves rigidity of corporate cultures, as some executives are always resistant to accept change that may occur after implementation of a project (Kilicoglu and Yilmaz 20).

Some projects do bring changes to a company’s organisational culture. Organisational culture is the collective way by which employees interact at the workplace. It encompasses life experiences, values, and beliefs that unite employees within the firm.

Organisational culture is also the way employees in an organisation behave, and the connotation that people attach to their behaviours and life experiences. There are essential aspects of culture that firms have to consider in their management processes within an organisation.

The evaluative element involves the social anticipations, prospects, and principles that companies follow in their daily operations.

Lastly, the social interaction element involves the means of communication within a firm. For instance, the language of communication and communication methods within an organisation constitute social interaction as an element of organisational culture.

Culture brings people together. The concept of corporate culture drives employees in an organisation towards achieving a common goal, hence making them develop a sense of unified responsibility.

As an initiator of unity, culture helps in developing consensus between employees and the management. For example, organisations can conduct training for their employees in order to inculcate the corporate culture in employees.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Problems in Implementing a New Project by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In this aspect, all stakeholders within the organisation strive to work towards achieving the centralised goals. The whole concept of culture within an organisation brings out the image of a firm that the management would like to project (Watad 3).

It remains the role of the HR executive to design ethical organisational behaviours so that employees be able to reinforce the whole system in unison.

It becomes difficult to reshape an organisational culture where unethical practices are manifested at the topic as compared to one, which manifests from the bottom. Clearly, implementing new projects in an organisation that has morally upright executives is quite easy.

The HR should also foster good working relationship and ethical culture within the organisation. Project managers have to make employees and the entire management think differently in order to see the need for such cultural changes.

Organisational and Individual-Level Resistance Since stakeholders cannot have the same perception on the impacts of a project in the organisation, managers have to instil changes in mind-set to the rest of the team. Currently, organisations are experiencing numerous changes in their systems of management and operation.

Resistance within organisations can transpire in three different forms that are at the organisation, group and individual levels. If a project is meant to benefit one department within the firm, resistance can arise in a form of power and control.

The process can create conflict among departments in a firm, as some may feel disadvantaged even after being involved in the entire process of project initiation, implementation and evaluation (Kilicoglu and Yilmaz 15).

At the same time, constant technological updates and demographic characters force organisations to manage change and resultant resistance in order to survive. Organisational-level resistance can also emanate from differences in functional orientation given that departments can view changes within the organisation differently, thus having difficulties in arriving at an irrefutable agreement.

In addition, changes that occur during implementation of a project can alter the norms and values within an organisation. Some corporations have conservatism nature in their cultures, hence focusing less on change as attempts to do it may affect others (Watad 8).

In this aspect, resistance to the changes can arise from the organisation, as the process attempts to disrupt organisational culture.

Simultaneously, cultures that support implementation of new projects can accept lucrative projects, and end up having minimal or no positive effects on the operation system of an organisation if they lack adequate skills and resources to see the project through the phases.

Identifying, planning and financing projects require potential funding backed by necessary skills. In the identification stage, the innovative team identifies ideas that work and those that do not in order to avoid failure during introduction in the market.

This process requires designing of exit strategies to help in conducting viability assessment on potential projects during the early stages.

Group-Level Resistance Employees can also have resistance at group level if they expect the change to interfere with the group cohesiveness and norms. According to Kilicoglu and Yilmaz, changes that tend to alter interactions between groups owing to changes in tasks are likely to receive mass resistance (18).

Moreover, an employee may resist implementation of a project if he/she is uncertain of his/her job security after the changes. Therefore, fear of the unknown can make workforces become resistant to any change that may take place within the company.

In addition, an employee’s economic concern can result in resistance to a project that may reduce the management cost for a firm.

For instance, introducing technological applications within a firm can lower the income level of employees or result in lay-offs. From this dimension, an employee will oppose out-rightly projects that tend to automate services within a company.

Remedies to Resistance Education

Practical in-house training instil required skills into workforce, thus eliminating instances of inadequate knowledge and information management. In project implementation processes, there are instances of lack of training and communication among all stakeholders.

This mostly occurs when there is no training or the training failed to touch on the significance of information flow among stakeholders (Macdonald 16).

The lessons should capture the communication chain and process so that stakeholders understand the formal process of reporting findings. Such seminars create strong awareness among the executives, thus increasing tolerance of uncertainty in introducing new ideas.

In implementing IT innovations within organisations, uncertainty is always predominant. Therefore, managers are to handle external pressures by creating technology awareness in the firm (Austin and Claassen 22).

This move helps in building consensus in a team, as learning is an inclusive affair. Commitment by the executive is vital in implementing IT-enabled innovations given that the management can influence employees’ attitudes to a given project.

Consequently, training can be a great investment in a firm if the facilitators have expansive knowledge in the field where they are conducting the exercise. The organisation had to put into consideration the different dimensions of training apart from just conducting the training.

There should be a need to achieve competitive advantage over other firms after the training period. Through this process, the organisation can generate new knowledge that can have immense impacts on their operations.

Communication and organisational learning

The inclusion of ICT in this process advances the whole process and increases the adaptation of organisation to the rapidly changing environment. Notably, thorough quality analysis enriches an organisation’s strategic planning.

Moreover, ICT can increase communication between the line staff and managerial of a company, thus enhancing greater employee involvement in decision-making processes.

Companies that inculcate regular training sessions in their programmes, find it easy to introduce new changes in their systems, hence gaining competitive advantage over their competitors, which are adamant at introducing such training programmes (Austin and Claassen 27).

Therefore, organisational learning has a direct impact on competitive advantage of an organisation. Firms that constantly engage their employees in training, seminars, and workshops realise massive growth. Businesses should be proactive and remain focused on achieving their strategic objectives.

As a result, such organisations must be open to learning new ideas to advance their knowledgebase. Obviously, organisational learning starts with individual learning that provides a favourable environment for general learning.

The development of knowledge foundation culminates into organisational learning (Collins 7). It is from this foundation that an organisation develops its competitive advantage.

In implementing IT projects, managers identify the nature of interactions that affect the process and impact the effectiveness of the innovation. The framework identifies threats, weaknesses, and opportunities of an innovation project (Bhatti par. 1).

Staff can demonstrate resistance to change passively, actively or aggressively. Resistance from stakeholders can be the threat, while weaknesses can be lack of awareness among stakeholders in supporting the project.

Strengths can be the trainable workforce that only requires well-planned training content on the essence of adopting new ideas. Opportunities can be the inputs and outputs or results that come after implementing the project.

In a passive resistance, employees may accept supporting the implementation process of a project, but end-up not doing so, while active resistance involves blatant actions like engaging in strikes and absenteeism.

The above framework sets a clear path for implementing new projects with minimal resistance from stakeholders given the inclusion of their thoughts and ideas in the whole process.

In addressing resistance to change in an organisation, innovation management becomes necessary for instilling the essence of implementation into the new project in employees and other stakeholders.

Management can employ numerous actions to minimise resistance that may cause insecurity and uncertainty. Education and communication are the aspects that firms can use to communicate with employees in order to enable them to see the sense in implementing a new project.

Resistance that can emanate from groups that supervise substantial amount of resources in a firm is likely not to occur, as their contention with the situations will not be logical in comparison to the new changes.

Communication is essential within a firm, and resistance can even become stronger due to poor communication among stakeholders.

In resolving this challenge, innovation management comes into practice to alter a group’s threat perception of new changes within the firm (Austin and Claassen 29).

Besides, management-employee relations must be based on mutual trust so that there is minimal resistance at the project implementation stage.

Involving all stakeholders in the change process helps in overcoming resistance that can be detrimental to achievement of an organisation’s goals and objectives since it is less likely for individuals to oppose implementation of the decision that they supported.

The stage of making decision requires creativity and innovation to address issues raised by those opposed to the change.

Even though the process consumes a lot of time, inclusive decision-making encompasses the ideas of all stakeholders and, consequently, results in successful implementation of a project.

Employee cancelling and therapy helps in facilitating adjustment among stakeholders on the new project. If resistance emanates from an extremely powerful source, negotiation becomes the best tactic to handle the situation.

Information and knowledge management Information and knowledge management is critical in influencing thoughts and perceptions of organisational members. Introducing new IT system requires strong organisational learning process.

Organisational learning is a process where an organisation creates a favourable environment within its premises to enhance knowledge, improve standards and efficiency by making use of its employees (Macdonald 17).

KM sets a platform that helps in reducing resistance to new projects since employees and other stakeholders will be aware of the impacts of such ideas. Even though some projects may come with limitations, employees will accept them given the varied benefits that accompany the projects.

With constant market dynamism and introduction of new technological advancements, it is critical for organisations to ensure that their employees are updated on these changes.

Moreover, firms can develop a well-organised knowledge network and relation to understand the continuously changing economy. Knowledge management, therefore, is essential in offering organisations with potential or capability to grow and expand their operations.

This will come with speedy response and increased profitability. According to Watad’s research, businesses that have well-organised and managed data improve customer satisfaction and minimise IT costs, thus increasing revenue and improving operational efficiency (7).

This enables organisations to serve their clients better and retain most of them. Consequently, stakeholders will support the implementation of a new project that tends to address clients’ needs and increase customers’ satisfaction.

KM helps in adding value to information that a firm already holds and influence human resource to enhance performance in the organisation. Knowledge acquisition reduces organisational resistance as it ensures efficiency in using resources and effectiveness of a firm.

In setting up a platform that is ready to accept new ideas, firms must be able to create and apply new knowledge in order to bring new ways of behaving in the organisation.

For instance, in implementing IT in an organisation, managers have to educate employees on the importance of tools like e-mails, bulletin boards, and video conferences.

In IT-enabled innovations, system thinking coupled with information and knowledge management put a company above others when implementing such projects. Tacit Knowledge (TK) is crucial in a workplace since it promotes sharing of ideas among stakeholders.

With the current employee diversity in terms of demographics, sharing of information is essential in creating awareness on the need to inculcate recent technological developments in the management process (Macdonald 20).

Organisations with strong KM experiences less resistance in case they introduce and implement a project.

Content of the Learning Sessions The process of educating or training stakeholders as a way of altering the culture of an organisation to accept implementation of a project should take place in a well-coordinated manner in order to facilitate successful delivery of innovation management outcomes.

The plan should capture the cultural issues of an organisation, as this helps capture the true picture of the resistance. Afterwards, employees will join the change process with less or no resistance.

When a training process analyses the historical aspects of a firm, the delivered content does not become subjective in criticising the culture of the organisation, but objective on the content.

In addition, understanding the opinions employees hold helps in applying an inclusive learning approach that easily alters the perceptions of employees on change and innovation processes.

Training makes employees become diverse in their thinking instead of having fixed minds on the given issues.

Resistance to changes or implementation of new ideas reduces if an organisation hires a flexible management team, which reciprocates by instilling the spirit of dynamism and flexibility in employees.

The training process develops a framework that makes an organisation ready to implement a new programme at any time.

Research and Development Companies that set a culture of dynamism are less likely to meet resistance during project implementation phase (Anderson 6). As a result, organisations are to promote research and development as it sets a learning culture within the firm.

Such firms are always ready for any change, and, in the process, make employees receive and implement new ideas. Therefore, research and development play a significant role in facilitating implementation of innovative concepts.

Companies that do not invest in research and development rely on new ideas that their competitors discover. In the end, they lose competitive advantage among their competitors in the market, given that they play catch-up tactics in the operations.

Research and development prepare organisation to accept and apply new ideas that can be beneficial to the market (Anderson 10).

From the aspect of research and development, managers have to work with all staff and the innovation team in identifying good ideas and developing products that will create positive impact on the entire market.

Proper coordination of each stage requires effective management in order to help a great idea reaches to increase its potential. The management process requires establishing policies and procedures that the innovative team follow during implementation of concepts.

Developing workable plans as well as implementation processes are crucial in realising success of a project.

Organisations should create innovation culture so that the environment and people can offer required foundation for occurrence of innovation. Innovative organisations have been able to sustain their innovation levels.

For instance, the Coca-Cola Company has enticed consumers by introducing the Coca Cola Free Style machine that helps consumers mix and produces its own beverage of different flavours (Bhatti par. 5).

This innovative idea has made it difficult for competitors like the Pepsi Company match the levels of this company. This strategy, coupled with the differentiation strategy, will continue making the company profitable even if several beverage companies enter the market.

Therefore, the management at the Coca-Cola Company has been able to instil innovative culture in the entire staff successfully, thus creating experiencing less resistance in implementing such new projects (Bhatti par. 7).

Conclusion and Recommendations Innovation management is necessary in successful implementation of key projects in all organisations. Due to rigid culture, challenges of organisational resistance can put a company at a disadvantaged position in the current global and dynamic market.

Dynamism within an organisation should start from the executive down to the employees, and not in the reverse manner.

This form of resistance has been a major challenge in most firms, given the differences in age between the ambitious young employees and the old senior management staffs who desire to maintain the status quo.

Corporations have been engaging in management overhaul to absorb pro-change executives. KM, organisational learning, and information management have been applicable in altering the cultures of most organisation and the mind-sets of many employees.

These approaches should encompass innovation management practices in their contents as well as the market dynamics that necessitate the need for new ideas, which can be of great help to organisation sustainability.

Even though the discussed measures cannot completely remove resistance to implementation of projects, they assist in creating stakeholders’ awareness, which is extremely vital in minimising huge resistance.

In addition, these programmes ought to inculcate the view of a global market in their analysis as a way of minimising resistance that can emanate from stakeholders.

Works Cited Anderson, Donald. Cases and Exercises in Organization Development


Monetary Policy and Impact on Economic Stabilization Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Introduction Countries, like businesses, control their economic positions to maintain a healthy economic stance regarding their financial resources.

Often, the nations establish their respective central banks that act as the finance department in the country to regulate both the money, as well as the credit system.

The central banks use varied policy tools, including bank reserves, federal funds market, open market operations, discount rates, and foreign currency operations, to achieve their objectives of maximum employment and stable price levels, among other goals (Rose


Alternative Energy Sources for Saving Planet Research Paper essay help site:edu

Table of Contents Introduction

Understanding the issue of alternative energy

Pros and cons of alternative energy

The present and future of nuclear energy


Works Cited

Introduction The heated debate about the dangerous effects that come from the continued use of fossil fuels as the main sources of energy has resulted in a number of recommendations (Kowalski 5). Among the recommendations is the suggestion for other sources of energy, instead of the fossil fuels.

These are known as alternative energy sources. As of today, a lot of resources are being diverted to projects and programs that aim at popularizing alternative energy sources not only at household level, but also at the industrial level.

However, the most important question when it comes to the different forms of renewable energy that have been devised concerns the sustainability of these forms of energy in terms of the quantity and minimal impacts on the environment.

This paper argues that the alternative forms of energy seem not to offer a perfect solution to the demands of energy in the contemporary world. The paper explores alternative energy.

It also focuses on the pros and cons, as well as the contemporary and future developments concerning the subject of alternative energy.

Understanding the issue of alternative energy It is common to hear a lot of people mention the topic of alternative energy when it comes to the issue of sustainable development. Alternative energy sources are sources of energy that are different from fossil fuels. For a long time, fossil fuels have been highly deployed in the production of energy.

However, concerns have been raised about the level of pollution in the environment that is caused by the increased emission of greenhouse gases, like carbon dioxide, which harm the environment. Greenhouse gases are broadly classified into two.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More These are chlorofluorocarbons and hydrochlorofluorocarbons (Metz 165). A larger percentage of greenhouse gases in the atmosphere are emitted from the burning of fossil fuels.

It is important to note that the subject of sustainable development brings into picture the realities about the dangers of continued use of non-renewable forms of energy, the most common being fossil fuels.

Therefore, most people agree with the argument that it is important to tap energy from alternative sources. Different from the non-renewable forms of energy, most of the alternative sources of energy are renewable. This is an aspect that embraces sustainability.

Common alternative energy sources include hydroelectric energy, solar energy, geothermal energy, wind energy, biomass energy, and nuclear energy.

However, Hore-Lacy and Hore-Lacy (7) observe that there is a volatile discussion about the efficient development and use of nuclear energy to generate power. The debate emanates from the politicisation of nuclear energy.

Research shows that billions of dollars have already been pumped into different projects as part of the global initiative of minimizing the use of non-renewable forms of energy, while ensuring that the energy production meets the energy demand.

In this sense, it is important to mention that the index of industrial growth globally is quite high. This indicates the increased demand for energy.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Alternative Energy Sources for Saving Planet specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Therefore, the most critical question that needs to be answered at this juncture concerns the ability of people to balance between reduction in the consumption of non-renewable energy and the introduction and use of alternative energy (Ravilious 21).

Pros and cons of alternative energy As observed earlier, alternative energy is the form of energy that is free from the substances that pollute the environment. More often than not, people refer to the substances as greenhouse gases.

These gases that originate from the non-renewable forms of energy are responsible for the pollution of the environment. They include carbon dioxide, chlorinated fluorocarbons, nitrogen dioxide, methane, and sulphur hexafluoride.

One of the advantages of alternative energy is that it is clean because it does not release the pollutant gases into the environment.

The use of alternative forms of energy as opposed to the use of non-renewable energy results in a significant reduction in the amount of greenhouse gases in the atmosphere.

Balat and Kırtay (7146) observe that the gasification of biomass offers an efficient and economic alternative route to the production of one of the most desirable energy; that is, renewable hydrogen.

Levin (50) observes that one of the advantages of most forms of alternative energy is that they can be recycled. Therefore, it is possible to continue getting significant amounts of energy from the same sources when funding is adequate.

The issue of recycling is important now that a lot of environmentalists show concern about the issue of the depletion of natural resources. This goes hand in hand with the issue of cost.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Alternative Energy Sources for Saving Planet by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More From the outset of things, the costs of establishing alternative energy systems may be high, but the benefits are worthwhile in the long run.

While alternative energy generation receives a lot of support from stakeholders across the board, fears and concerns are also raised about the possible risks associated with different forms of alternative energy.

Moura, Barbosa, and Costa (33) ascertain that there are a number of hazards that are associated with the wind turbines that are used to generate wind energy. It is, therefore, important to observe that the continuous supply of most of the alternative forms of energy depends on nature.

Examples are the wind, hydro-generated electricity, and solar energy.

Picturing this from the perspective of demand and supply of energy, most commentators argue that alternative energy only serves the role of supplementing the non-renewable forms of energy because the quantities of energy generated based on the changes in nature cannot sustain the energy demand.

This means that some forms of alternative energy can only be produced in certain regions where the natural conditions are favourable (Belsie 1).

According to Yuanan and Hefa (3044-3045), alternative forms of energy require people who desire to use them to acquire high levels of technical knowledge, as well as the development of technical systems that support the functioning of the systems.

Taking the example of solar, biomass, and nuclear energy, nuclear plants and solar energy panels have to be in place for the energy to be generated.

It is quite expensive to set up and maintain nuclear plants because it requires a high level of technical competence to manage the plants effectively.

Moreover, such a form of energy is potentially hazardous in case of internally and externally derived risks and uncertainties (Yılmaz and Selim 420-421).

The present and future of nuclear energy It is apparent that zeroing down the production of greenhouse gases in the atmosphere requires an increase in the development and deployment of alternative forms of energy.

However, a lot of developments that happen in the energy industry point to the lack of complete objectivity when it comes to the exploitation of alternative energy sources.

One of the issues that come up here is that the nuclear energy, which is a non-renewable energy source and has the potential of boosting the supply of energy, is subjected to debate.

It is critical to observe that most of the issues raised about the development and use of nuclear energy as an alternative energy form are hefty.

While nuclear energy is the best option in terms of the supply of a large number of alternative energy units, such energy can be equally lethal to the living creatures when it comes to managing the production of the energy (Schiffman 360).

Quatro and Sims (169) note that the use of nuclear energy presents an ethical dilemma that revolves around the possible commercialization of nuclear energy and the dangers that are associated with poor handling and use of this form of energy.

It can be argued that that the fears over the authorization of the development and use of this form of energy are justifiable in the sense that this nuclear energy has proven to be harmful if not handled cautiously.

Examples include the Chernobyl disaster and the recent earthquake in Japan that saw the discharge of radioactive substances into the atmosphere, thereby posing a danger to life. The technical aspects of handling nuclear energy are real.

These aspects are likely to dominate the issue of alternative energy as governments continue to seek for means of increasing the consumption of alternative energy and reducing the consumption of forms of energy that are non-renewable (“Government and Nuclear Energy” 65).

In their research on the future of nuclear energy, Elena et al. (61) observed that there is a need to deliberate on the possibility of reducing the health impacts of nuclear energy. Most of the health concerns revolve around the release of radioactive substances that harm life.

However, this possibility can only become a reality if all the players embrace objectivity. This means that the debate on nuclear energy should focus on the enhancement of the capacity of nations to develop and use nuclear power.

It is possible to boost the supply of alternative energy supply through supporting other countries to develop their potential to generate large volumes of nuclear energy (Araj, Fahmy and Sompon 14-15).

It can be noted that the demand for oil, which is the leading source of energy, continues to rise even as people focus on alternative energy.

However, most countries continue to embrace diversity in terms of sustainable energy supply, a factor that points to the continued development of alternative energy generation. Here, two questions come into the minds of environmental commentators.

The first question concerns the availability of oil, while the second question revolves around the ease of use and cost of oil (Maczulak 5-6). It is obvious that the demand for energy continues to rise as industrial development and the consumerism culture continue to dominate the globe.

The implication here is that the new forms of energy cannot help in meeting the demand for energy (Belsie 1). Moreover, alternative energy sources are not readily available and accessible to people.

This leaves people with the option of non-renewable forms of energy that are readily available, even though they are expensive and destructive to the environment in the long run (de Oliveira, Carlos and Devezas 764).

Another critical thing that is bound to dominate the subject of alternative energy is the possibility of minimizing the risks that are associated with the development and use of these energy forms (Moura, Barbosa, and Costa 34).

Conclusion From the research conducted in the paper, it can be concluded that most people agree with the fact that alternative energy is desirable in combating environmental pollution.

However, it is apparent that the amount of such energy is still far much low in the contemporary economy due to the challenges that are associated with the production and use of large volumes of alternative energy.

Future research needs to focus on the modalities of subsidising alternative energy production to increase the volumes of such energy, thereby replacing non-renewable energy.

Works Cited Araj, Kamal J., Nabil Fahmy, and Chongkum Sompon. “Why Go Nuclear?” Bulletin of The Atomic Scientists 64.4 (2008): 14-19. Print.

Balat, Havva, and Elif Kırtay. “Hydrogen From Biomass – Present Scenario And Future Prospects.” International Journal of Hydrogen Energy 35.14 (2010): 7416-7426. Print.

Belsie, Laurent. “Is The Boom Over For Alternative Energy — Or Just Getting Started?” Christian Science Monitor 14 Apr. 2008: 13 . Web.

de Oliveira Matias, João Carlos, and Tessaleno Campos Devezas. “Consumption Dynamics Of Primary-Energy Sources: The Century Of Alternative Energies.” Applied Energy 84.7/8 (2007): 763-770. Print.

Elena, Bobric, Bucur Cristina, Popescu Ion and Simionov Vasile. “Nuclear Power Generation Alternative For A Clean Energy Future.” Progress Of Cryogenics


Supporting Learning and Leadership with Technology Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help

The world has come to embrace technology, and learning institutions are currently finding it very important to use this technology to support learning and leadership.

For this reason, many learning institutions have been making an effort to integrate the use of technology into their system (Spiro, 2011). This research seeks to redesign the approach that can be taken in implementing technology in learning and leadership process in a school setting.

The focus is on a higher learning institution with a school of computing and informatics.

The school has an intake of about 60-80 students per year, and as the head of ICT department, I have the responsibility of ensuring that this institution develops an appropriate program that can be used to support learning and leadership with the use of technology.

Given the fact that the school has about twenty teachers, and six technologists, it is in a prime position to implement this strategy.

The Instructional Design Principle that would be used in this case is based on ADDIE Model. The choice of this model is based on its popularity in this field, and ease of implementation.

The first stage when using this theory is to analyze the needs. This would involve determination of current organizational needs at this institution and performance gaps (Barone


Public administration in theory Essay (Critical Writing) college essay help: college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction


Structural Improvements


Reference List

Introduction The late 1990s and early 2000s are characterized by attention to holistic approach. Public administration theorists noted that it was crucial to analyze a variety of aspects to be able to come up with effective strategies to make the government effective.

Notably, lots of theorists provided specific strategies which could be employed by politicians and public administrators as well as educators. It is possible to single out two major directions theorists moved, i.e. ethics and structural improvements.

Ethics In the first place, it is necessary to note that the majority of theorists addressed issues related to ethics, but some of them paid special attention to this aspect.

For instance, Lewis stressed that unethical behavior among public administrators will increase in the future due to creation of new groups with certain interests (Shafritz


The Effect of Technological Advancements of Management Practices Proposal best essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Contributions of Don Tapscott to Manufacturing Productivity

Literature Review of Published Work by Don Tapscott



Introduction Technology and innovation are two hybrid components, which while embraced by manufacturing firms, can help to drive their productivity. Fundamentally, innovation means the introduction of something new, especially in a business setting. Innovation takes place when “new products or services are introduced and successfully commercialised” (Tidd


Rural–urban migration and youth in Bhutan Essay essay help online free: essay help online free

Background: Rural-urban migration and youth in Bhutan Rural-urban migration is a universal concern across the globe. Just like other nations, Bhutan is experiencing mass movement of people, especially youths from rural to urban areas. The bulk of Bhutan’s population is composed of the youth. Actually, more than half of Bhutan population is aged below 25 years.

Due to the increasing youth population, the government faces a challenge of ensuring equilibrium between contemporary beliefs and modernity. Bhutan is experiencing massive changes in its personnel due to rural-urban migration. In addition, the mass movement of people to urban areas has led to unemployment and poverty in urban centers.

According to the 2012 labor survey, over 0.7% of the rural populace migrated to towns. Further, the United Nations Food and Agriculture Organization showed that about 33% of Bhutan populace is in deficiency of food safety. The poverty analysis report (2007) exhibited that approximately one-third of the rural populace is poor compared to 2% in the urban areas.

Over the last fifty years, Bhutan has experienced rapid growth of its urban areas due to mass movement of populace from the countryside to urban areas. This trend is a major public concern to the state and the government has experienced a number of obstacles in tackling the challenge of rural-urban migration (Rinzin et al., 2005). A number of factors have been proposed in explaining the trend (Yeung, 2005).

Bhutan’s urban populace augments at a yearly rate of 6.5 percent. The prolonged rural-urban inclination is expected to grow four-fold in the coming twenty years, among which a significant proportion are youth. Studies contend that increased need for education by youth has been a significant factor in influencing the movement of people to towns as well as the growth of urban settlements within Bhutan (Kasarda, 2001).

Rural-urban migration has affected negatively on the development of the rural economy. For instance, a number of youths who migrate to urban centers deprive the rural economy of productive labor that is a significant factor of production leading low agricultural performance and high production costs (Kasarda, 2001).

The movement of youths to towns can also be attributed to Bhutan landscape that ranges from subtropical plains to sub-alpine Himalayan Mountains as well as rugged geographical terrains making farming difficult.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More According to the Human Development Report (2009), Bhutan accounts for the highest rate of rural-urban migration in South Asia. The government acknowledged the positive impact of the trend since it alleviated the pressure on agricultural land that only composes approximately 9% of nation’s overall area.

However, with steady increase in rural-urban migration over the last fifty years, diverse views have been devised to address the issue. For instance, mitigation of rural-urban migration involves the investment of explicit initiatives such as linking rural development with tourism as well as encouraging youths to go back to the villages and help in the transformation of the economic landscape through farming.

The National Statistical Bureau Report (2005) showed that majority of youths migrate to urban centers to pursue employment prospects as well as better education. Further, the increased inclination of the youth towards moving to urban areas arises from the challenges that the youth face in rural areas such as poor health facilities, unemployment, poor living standards as well as poor lifestyles (Kasarda, 2001).

However, in moving to cities, youth encounter a number of challenges including discrimination, unwelcoming communities, financial deficiencies, lack of parental guidance and harassment. According to Zurick (2006), sexual exploitation, as well as emotional and psychological trauma, poses serious concerns for the youth.

Factors for rural-urban migration in Bhutan Education

The need for education by the youth has been identified as a major concern contributing to mass rural-urban migration in Bhutan. Due to an inadequate number of secondary and tertiary institutions in rural areas, a large population of youth move to urban centers to pursue educational needs (Frame, 2005).

In essence, education is significant in the acquisition of skills and training that provide a path for the youth to develop their skills leading to securing of jobs in the industries and factories. In fact, a number of youths in the urban vicinities of Bhutan attend training school offering computer, technology and construction courses, thereby increasing their chances of being employed.

Lack of social amenities and facilities in the village

Yeung (2005) asserts that the pace of rural-urban migration in Bhutan is a serious anxiety for the government, owing to its implication on the socio-economic aspects. Several factors play significant roles in encouraging mass movement of populace to urban centers.

We will write a custom Essay on Rural–urban migration and youth in Bhutan specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Firstly, developments experienced in infrastructure in terms of hospitals, housing, road connectivity and transportation facilities continue to encourage mass movement of populace from rural to urban areas (Radcliffe, 2006). In fact, the UNDP’s human development report (2009) found Bhutan forms the bulk of annual rate of urban migration in South Asia at above five percent.

Family issues

Family issues have been a major factor contributing to rural-urban migration. For instance, families move to cities due to job transfers. In addition, marriages in cities have influenced urban migration. Moreover, relocation desires by family members to settle in urban areas to escape monotony and poverty has shown an increasing trend over the recent past (Radcliffe, 2006).

Rural poverty

Poverty is a major concern for the general Bhutan population accounting for over thirty percent. Over ninety percent of the population in Bhutan resides in the rural areas.

Further, the country’s topography is mainly composed of mountains and valleys, which constrain the prospects of producing food as well as the generation of cash proceeds. Moreover, the rugged terrain leads to deficiency in accessing good quality land resources and diminishes the prospective irrigation facilities (Radcliffe, 2006).

In addition, the rural populace is faced with scarce external inputs and services together with low farm expertise. Therefore, many people have no option but to move to urban areas to search for better livelihoods. Further, Bhutan is characterized with natural catastrophes, including landslides that increase the cost of goods.

Employment prospects and new experiences

Since the bulk of jobs in the rural vicinities of Bhutan are majorly agricultural-oriented, many youths are moving to the cities in search of white-collar jobs. As such, farming activities in the rural neighborhoods compel the youth and other members of the society to move to urban areas in search for employment prospects (Rinzin et al., 2005).

Moreover, a number of people move to towns to fulfill their spirits of adventure and experiences. Through migrating to the urban locations, the people are presented with diverse prospects of arts, living standards, foods as well as leisure activities.

Increasing population

The high population in the rural areas is a major aspect contributing to rural-urban migration. The large percentage of youth (15-24) in Bhutan accounting for over 22% continues to rise steadily. The implications of the rise in the rural areas include poor provision of education services, poor health amenities and unemployment (Frame, 2005).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Rural–urban migration and youth in Bhutan by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The factors put pressure on the youth to move to urban centers to look for better services. Further, the increase in the rural youth population increases the pressure on the need to acquire secondary and tertiary levels of education.

However, the pressure results in deficiency of space as well as teachers prompting many people to move to urban vicinities to gain education services.

Impacts of rural-urban migration in Bhutan Swelling of urban populace

A larger percentage of Bhutan population resides in the rural vicinities accounting for approximately seventy percent. However, over the recent past, the tempo of urbanization has been alarming.

According to the Bhutan Nation Urbanization Strategy 2008, the urban populace has significantly increased over the last decade (1994-2005) by over 100%. The increase in the urban population presents twice the growth of the national population experienced in the same decade (Rizal, 2002).

The rapid growth of population in urban areas comes with its disadvantages. For instance, the unprecedented growth strains the exploitation of the urban services leading to propagation of shanties, inadequate medical facilities, and inadequate drinking water.

Further, the increasing urban population, rates of unemployment, environmental problems including and poor sewerage systems are common in the cities of Thimphu and Phuentsholing.

Land dilapidation and pollution

Bhutan continues to face a serious concern of land dilapidation resulting from human activities as well as innate occurrences such as landslides and floods. In fact, the increasing youth population in the urban centers in search of employment prospects in the industries wields pressure on the ecological and the innate resources in the town vicinities.

For instance, there has been escalating encroachment to forestlands as the populace numbers swell in towns leading to internal biophysical and chemical corrosion (Potter et al., 2004). Further, the increasing populace of the youth in the urban neighborhoods contributes to the emergence of new industries. The industries, in turn, release dangerous emissions into the atmosphere, posing dangerous health concerns to the urban society.

Actually, Bhutan cities continue to record an augmenting inclination of respiratory ailments among its urban populace. Further, the escalation of land fragmentation has increased the deficiency of economies of scales among the youth, thereby blighting their prospects of attaining self-reliance.

Increasing health concerns and social crimes among the youth

The prevalence of early marriages, teenage pregnancies as well as sexually transmitted diseases have been on the increase among the youth in urban cities (Kasarda, 2001). Most importantly, increasing trends in HIV/AIDS infection prevalence have been realized over the past among the youth in Bhutan towns.

Further, due to the increase in the dominance of the HIV/AIDS scourge in the international arena and the neighboring states of Bhutan, the predominance of the virus is expected to increase. Moreover, the increasing rates of unemployment in the urban centers has prompted a number of youths to engage in acts of prostitution thereby posing their lives to the danger of acquiring HIV/AIDS and other sexually transmitted diseases.

Increased cases of substance abuse by the youth in the urban vicinities of Bhutan also contribute to the predominance of the malady.

For example, the statistical yearbook 2007 reported that crime occurrences related to drugs and narcotics tripled within four years jumping from twenty cases in the year two thousand and one to sixty-five cases in the year two thousand and five. Additionally, unsafe abortions have been on the rise among the urban youths leading higher maternal deaths.

Increasing unemployment rates among the youth in urban centers

Unemployment levels have been on the increase within the urban vicinities of Bhutan. In other words, the large number of people from the villages has created pressure on the available job prospects, waste disposal systems, as well as housing (Zurick, 2006). As a result, many people compete for the inadequate number of jobs rendering a higher percentage of the populace unemployed.

Government initiatives to curb rural-urban migration The royal government of Bhutan has made remarkable steps to counter the menace of rural-urban migration. First, the government recognizes the constrictions that the increasing urban populaces pose to the resource limits in the towns.

To stem out the increasing rate of rural-urban migration, the production-access-market policy has played significant role in improving living standards within the countryside neighborhoods (Rizal, 2002). In essence, the policy tries to get better rural education systems as well as introduction of market-receptive crops.

Additionally, the initiative aims at improving the access to local road networks, thereby enhancing living standards and retention of larger proportion of populace in the rural areas. Improving the education facilities in the local areas prevents many youths from moving to urban centers since education is the major factor contributing to rural-urban migration among the youth.

The policy also attempts to eliminate factors that encourage movement of families into urban areas through promoting the development of urban centers in vicinities with large number of people as well as commercially feasible areas (Frame, 2005). Further, the government has made tremendous steps in expanding and relocating the rural neighborhoods into new local towns, thereby absorbing the large populace moving to towns.

For instance, the development of Khuruthang town, a commercial and education hub is a success of the initiative. In fact, the center has been significant in absorbing migrants from rural vicinities (Frame, 2005).

Bhutan’s national urbanization strategy has also been invaluable in stemming out the increasing number of youths in urban areas. The policy focuses on improving the well-being of poor rural populace as well as maintaining the sustainability of the ecology.

Further, through the construction of roads in different parts of the country, linkages between different areas of Bhutan have been efficient leading to development of new urban centers (Frame, 2005).

The government has increased awareness among the members of the public on the effects of population growth. Actually, the government has disseminated data related to population growth implications to the citizens through publications as well as electronic media channels.

In addition, the government has increased its focus on the provision of accessible education services and reproductive health services to the youth in both urban and rural vicinities preventing mass movements to urban areas (Frame, 2005).

The creation of an enabling environment where the rural populaces have access to financial and investment opportunities has proven invaluable in containing rural-urban migration. In fact, there have been increased systems that have tremendously expanded employment and benefits to the rural fraternity slowing down the rate of rural-urban migration.

The dynamism experienced in the global fraternity has forced the government to provide solutions to the problems affecting youths and keep them posted on the contemporary issues in the society. A large proportion of Bhutan youths abuse drugs such as marijuana and inhalants as well as alcohol.

The porous frontier of India and Bhutan has increased rates of drug trafficking among youths. The government is addressing the concern of drug abuse through the establishment of treatment and rehabilitation centers. For instance, the youth development fund supports several one drop-in centers.

Education is a major aspect influencing the migration of youth to urban centers. The Bhutanese government is tackling this concern through a number of initiatives. For instance, the government is posting more graduates in the rural education facilities. Further, the government also encourages the media coverage on challenges experienced in urban areas to bring out clearly the real picture of turban environment.

The escalating joblessness in urban centers has occasioned a number of youths to engage in petty crimes and prostitution. However, the Bhutan Foundation has played major roles in countering such concerns. The foundation engages the youth through offering scholarships and education prospects, promotion of sports, music and arts as well as employment opportunities.

The royal government of Bhutan also continues to focus on improving vocational education among the youth in the rural areas through expansion of science, information technology as well as crafts (Rinzin et al., 2005). In addition, strengthening of the training institutions’ capacities in the rural population has proven significant in the prevention of further migrations to the urban centers.

Unemployment among the youth has been found to be one of the major factors contributing to rural-urban migration (Rinzin et al., 2005). As such, the government has focused on a number of initiatives to reduce unemployment as a way of curbing rural-urban movement. For instance, the government is diversifying job prospects across the country.

The development of coordinated and planned urban expansion systems that are equivalent to the rate of migration has been invaluable (Rinzin et al., 2005). Further, the government has been encouraging regional equality through provision of quality services and employment prospects across the country.

Through the establishment of the rural livelihoods funds, the government has been able to mitigate rural-urban migration by initiating programs that improve rural revenue and livelihoods through agricultural development (Frame, 2005).

In fact, the program has realized massive achievements concerning poverty alleviation through the construction of revenue-generating enterprises in the rural areas such as Lamtang and Pam-Chaibi, among others.

References Frame, B. 2005. “Bhutan: a review of its approach to sustainable development,” Development Practice, vol.15 no.2, pp.216-221.

Kasarda, JD 2001, “Third world urbanization: dimensions, theories, and determinants,” Annual Review of Sociology, vol.17 no.3, pp.467-501.

Potter, RT, Elliott, BJ


The Boston Beer Company Case Study cheap essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Samuel Adams – the Boston Beer Company

Structure and Control System of Samuel Adams

Hierarchical Structure

Works Cited

Introduction The case study on Samuel Adams, the Boston Beer Company, has been developed using information from the company’s annual reports, the website, and articles from mass media.

The case presents a background of the company, and then shows the present problems faced by the company and how they are related to the centralized hierarchical structure. Further, the case study will attempt to understand if such a structure is affecting the company’s performance and strategy.

Samuel Adams – the Boston Beer Company The company under consideration is one of the largest brewers of handcrafted beer in America . The founder of the company Jim Koch maintains the traditional method of brewing which makes the company distinct in style. It brews 30 different styles of beer and has won numerous prizes.

The beer brewing industry has undergone considerable changes over the last several years. The Boston Beer Company is a leader in the better beer segment in the US and sells almost 18 percent of the beer in the country’s field . It also covers 1.3 percent of the overall sales in the American beer market .

Since its inception in 1984 the Boston Beer Company has been micromanaged by the founder Jim Koch who went bar-to-bar to promote Samuel Adams beer as well as appear in TV ads for the product in order to convince customers to purchase it.

Though many believe that Koch was a brilliant marketer, but the fear of an entrepreneur to micro-manage the company was evident in the operations and the strategy making of Samuel Adams. However, the Boston Beer Company went public in 1995, but the top-down approach of making strategy in the company remained with Koch leading the centralized decision-making process.

The next section shows how the strategy has been affected by the structure and control system of the company. Further, an analysis of the income statement of the company over the last three years shows that the net income of the company has fallen from 2011 to 2012 from $66,059 to $59,467 .

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Structure and Control System of Samuel Adams The BBC breweries have around 900 employees in Boston, Pennsylvania, and Cincinnati. The risk the company faces presently is the expansion of the market both in domestic and international markets. This results in no assured growth of the company making its future uncertain.

In addition, the company has increased its brands and products offering at the risk of eroding the sales of its already existing products. There is also a risk of the company owned breweries not to meet production target in future. Such problems that are impending on the company show that there are certain inherent challenges within the company that must be addressed immediately to remove the coming risks .

The first factor that we will consider in analyzing the internal problem of the Boston Beer Company is its structure. The organization’s control system is unpredictable, which has affected its stock prices. The company endeavors to make substantial expenses in marketing and promotional activities to promote its brand.

However, these expenditures have not resulted in higher sales in case of BBC. The increased expenditure in this sector has led to higher expenditures but sales have not picked up as expected. This has adversely affected the income amounts of the company.

It should be noted that the Boston Beer Company changed its strategy since 2008. Before 2008, it had employed a production-oriented strategy, which included that the company owned breweries worked in close coordination with the third party breweries that worked for the company.

The arrangement with the third party brewers allowed the Boston Beer Company to utilize excess capacity that gave the company flexibility to maintain full control over the brewing process, which its competitors could not. Nevertheless, since 2008 the company has acquired all the other third party breweries, increasing the company owned breweries’ production from 35 percent to 100 percent of its sales.

Though the management believes that this increased control over the production process will give them an edge over their competitors, it should be considered that such production complexities has led to “operation inefficiencies and control deficiencies” .

We will write a custom Case Study on The Boston Beer Company specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Such inefficiencies may have a negative effect on the company’s business. Moreover, this may affect the growth of the company and its performance as changes in its operations would lead to increased capital investments and increased complexities.

Another problem that the company faces is its dependence on distributors. Changes in the control of the company’s ownership in the distributorship network could hamper the distribution channel.

The CEO heads the company and the management include the CEO (Chief Executive Officer) and the CFO (Chief Financial Officer). The company structure of the executive body is presented below.

Figure 1: Structure Strategy, Structure and Control System

The structure and control system that the company utilizes to implement its strategy is highly centralized. The control system is becoming more and more centralized as the company has aimed at gaining complete control over all its breweries. This move is carried out by putting the production process under direct control of the CEO of the Boston Beer Company.

Further, the organization’s structure, as presented in Figure 1, shows that the CEO and the President of the company directly control the whole functioning process. The operations and the sales are under the supervision of the CEO and the CFO. Now, any of the operations of the breweries for any particular label are managed by the VP operations and the VP sales.

This demonstrates the degree of centralization in the operations and control of the company. Such increased supervision over the production and marketing processes is helpful when the company operates in a small market. However, when expansion is a strategy that the organization aims to employ, such a structure may become a hindrance.

It is caused by the fact that it operates on the basis of micromanagement, which is not possible in case of a larger company. Instead, it must be outlined that the company should operate with less centralization.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Boston Beer Company by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Hierarchical Structure The structure of the company is hierarchical in nature, which enables the company management to have close control over the financial and operational processes of the company. However, the centralized structure of the company deterred its operations. Further, the hierarchical structure prevented the Boston Beer Company from expanding its operations.

The control structure and centralized structure adversely affected the performance of the organization. Hence, it can be said that the company needs to decentralize its operations to help expand its operations scale and gain a greater market.

The Boston Beer Company not only continues to succeed in their niche market but also thrives as a miracle. The article drills into the industry and the company’s evolvement, and discovers the secrets that make the company sustainable in three aspects: culture revolution, marketplace innovation, and operational innovation.

Works Cited Coffey, Brendan. “How Boston Beer’s founder became a billionaire.” 16 September 2013. The Boston Globe. Web.

Samuel Adams. The Boston Bear Compny. 11 October 2013. Web.

The Beer Company. Annual Report 2012. 2012. Web.

US Securities and Exchange Commission. The Bostoon Beer Company FORM 10-K. 2012. Web.

Yahoo Finance. The Boston Beer Compnay. 2013. Web.